Amber Books Spring 2018 Catalogue

Amber Books Ltd United House North Road London N7 9DP United Kingdom Tel: +44 (0)20 7520 7600 rights@amberbooks.co.uk www.amberbooks.co.uk www.facebook.com/amberbooks twitter: @amberbooks itunes.com/amberbooksltd pinterest: amberbooksltd instagram: amberbooksltd

BOOKS Spring 2018

UK & IRELAND

COMPASS INDEPENDENT PUBLISHING SERVICES HEAD OFFICE Compass Ltd Great West House Great West Road Brentford TW8 9DF Tel: 020 8326 5696 Email: sales@compass-ips.london

LONDON, SOUTH EAST, ESSEX Sue Wilcox Mobile: 07801 926247 Email: sue@compass-ips.london

THE NORTH OF ENGLAND AND SCOTLAND David Smith Mobile: 07901 916164 Email: david@compass-ips.london

SALES ADMINISTRATION Pat Vance Tel: 020 8326 5696 pat@compass-ips.london

Join our mailing list

IRELAND SALES Brian Blennerhassett Butler Sims Ltd First Floor, 89 Rathgar Road Rathgar, Dublin 6 Ireland Tel: +353 1 406 3639 Mobile: +353 86 825 7305 Email: butlersims@eircom.net

OPERATIONS MANAGER Nuala O’Neill Mobile: 07584 020 951 Email: nuala@compass-ips.london

Help us to keep you up to date on new releases, special offers and any other relevant news.

You can either sign up direct on our website: www.amberbooks.co.uk/about-us Or you can email us at editorial@amberbooks.co.uk Or you can fill in the form and send it to us at the address below:

SOUTH WEST, SOUTH WALES, EAST ANGLIA AND THE MIDLANDS Martin Remmers Mobile: 07747 794271 Email: martin@compass-ips.london

Amber Books mailing list Name/Company name

EXPORT SALES & MARKETING Gunnar Lie & Associates Ltd. 3 Linkside New Malden Surrey KT3 4LA United Kingdom Tel: +44 (0)20 8605 1097 E-mail: gunnar@gunnarlie.com www.gunnarlie.com GUNNAR LIE TERRITORIES: South-East Asia, Indian Sub-Continent, Africa ADDRESS AS ABOVE Tel: +44 771 2526 894 E-mail: gunnar@gunnarlie.com JOHN EDGELER TERRITORIES: Scandinavia, Middle East, Caribbean, Greece & Cyprus, The Netherlands ADDRESS AS ABOVE Tel: +44 780 1866 936 E-mail: john@gunnarlie.com GUILLAUME FERRAND TERRITORIES: France, Belgium, Eastern Europe, Luxembourg, Spain, Portugal, Italy, Central & South America, Gibraltar, Malta ADDRESS AS ABOVE Tel: +44 (0)20 8605 1097 E-mail: guillaume@gunnarlie.com GABRIELE KERN TERRITORIES: Austria, Germany, Switzerland ADDRESS: Gabriele Kern Publishers Services Ziegenhainer Strasse 169, D-60433 Frankfurt Germany Tel +49 69 510 694 Fax +49 69 510 695 E-mail: Gabriele.Kern@publishersservices.de

LORIE & MICHAEL OCAMPO TERRITORIES: Korea, Philippines, Taiwan, Japan, China, Hong Kong ADDRESS: Lorie Ocampo Marketing Services for Publishers 57 STA Teresita, Kapitolyo, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel +63 2 635 3592 Fax + 63 2 635 3593 E-mail: lorieocampo78@gmail.com michael.c.ocampo@gmail.com

PANSING DISTRIBUTION PTE LTD TERRITORIES: Singapore, Malaysia, Brunei ADDRESS: Times Centre 1 New Industrial Road Singapore 536196 Tel: 65 6319 9939 Fax: 65 6459 4930 Email: infobooks@pansing.com

AJAY PARMAR TERRITORIES: India ADDRESS : Ajay Parmar Research Press GF-31, Ground Floor, MGF Megacity Mall, M G Road, Gurgaon, 122002 India Tel: +91 124 4040017 Email: marketing@researchpress.co.in

GENERAL SALES/ RIGHTS ENQUIRIES

Address

Postcode/ZIP code

Country:

Telephone number

Sara McKie Rights Director– sara@amberbooks.co.uk

Email address

PRESS/MEDIA ENQUIRIES

Charles Catton Publishing Manager charles@amberbooks.co.uk

Are you on Social Media?

PHAMBILI TERRITORIES: South Africa ADDRESS: Phambili Agencies cc Book wholesalers to trade and libraries Address : Unit 57, 5 Sunnyrock Park Sunrock Close Germiston, South Africa, 1401 Tel: 0027114553537/4550091 Email: phambili@wbs.co.za Contact: Rosanna Kalogiannis Email: rosannak@phambili.com

Twitter: Facebook: Instagram: Thank you for taking time in helping us to keep you up to date

Amber Books Ltd

DISTRIBUTOR

Orca Book Services Ltd 01235465500 tradeorders@orcabookservices.co.uk

11/17

United House North Road London N7 9DP United Kingdom Tel: +44 (0)20 7520 7600

Contents Spring 2018 Titles January 2 February 3 March 5 April 10 May

16

June

20

eBooks Many of our titles are also available as eBooks from major online stores.

For details and links, please visit www.amberbooks.co.uk/ebooks

FEBRUARY 2018 Publication

JANUARY 2018 Publication

The Wehrmacht

Hitler’s Secret Weapons

Rising from the ashes of the post-World War I Reichswehr, the Wehrmacht became one of the cornerstones of Hitler’s reassertion of German military might.

With chapters on the history of the German Army, pre-war development, command structures, infantry, armoured formations, artillery and support services, The Wehrmacht offers military history enthusiasts key data on every aspect of Nazi Germany’s ground forces.

Following the invasion of the Soviet Union and the realization that the war could continue for years, Hitler put great resources into the development of technologically advanced weaponry, in the belief that the production of ‘wonder weapons’ was the key to victory. From submarines to chemical and nuclear weapons, from superguns to experimental aircraft, Hitler’s Secret Weapons reveals the extent of Germany’s munitions development.

david porter

michael e. haskew

c o m m an d s tr uc tur e

authorized units of the Heer to utilize extreme measures in the process.

Furthermore, officers were directed to use ‘collective measures’ against the local population where attacks against German forces occurred if the actual culprits could not be located.

Officers were also empowered to execute hostile persons without trial or formal adherence to any law or legal process. Officers of the Heer were assured that they were

c o m m a n d s t r u cture

authorized to exercise such authority without fear of prosecution for actions which would normally be violations of German law. Generals and senior commanders who protested summary executions and acts of brutality committed by both Army and WaffenSS personnel were often relieved of duty or otherwise silenced. Each of these orders originated with Hitler; however, the implementation of them rested with Wilhelm Keitel and the

signature on the actual paper order was his.

While Keitel had considered himself a loyal officer of the German Army, he had fatally linked that loyalty to the person of Adolf Hitler.

In doing so, he undermined the effectiveness of the Army General Staff and OKH, precipitated an indelible stain on the honour of the Army and the officer corps, and was hanged as a war criminal.

FIELD MARSHAL WILHELM BODEWIN GUSTAv KEITEL A senior Nazi and member of Hitler’s inner circle throughout World War II, Keitel served as chief of the Oberkommando der Wehrmacht (OKW) and conducted the armistice negotiations with the French government in the Forest of Compiègne in 1940. Keitel was a career soldier and was wounded in action during World War I. Acknowledged as a capable staff officer, his blind allegiance to Hitler facilitated numerous errors in the strategic and tactical prosecution of the German war effort. Field Marshal Keitel was tried at Nuremberg and convicted of war crimes and crimes against humanity. He was hanged on 16 October 1946.

Birth: Death: Place of Birth: father: Mother: Personal relationshiPs: Service:

n Keitel (left) talks with Luftwaffe supremo

Hermann Göring, 1943.

22 September 1882 16 October 1946 Helmscherode, Braunschweig Carl Keitel Apollonia vissering Married to Lisa Fontaine (six children) Cadet Officer 1901 Wounded in action 1914 Joined Freikorps 1919 Head of Army Organization Department 1929 Brigadier-General 1934 Head of Armed Forces Office 1935 Major-General 1936 General of Artillery 1937 Armed Forces High Command 1938 Colonel-General 1938 Chief of OKW 1938 Field Marshal 1940 Convicted and executed at Nuremberg 1946

The Führer’s Orders

240 x 189mm (9½ x 7½”) 192pp 50,000 words 150 photos, diagrams and maps ISBN: 978-1-78274-592-1 £19.99 Paperback

command structure

GERMAN SOLDIER’S TEN COMMANDMENTS (PRINTED IN PAY BOOK)

OKW. In its subordinate role, OB West was mainly responsible for the implementation of orders issued directly by Hitler and transmitted through OKW. The OB West area of operations primarily included the coastal defences of the Atlantic Wall, which opposed the Allied landings in Normandy on 6 June 1944, and the occupied territories of the Low Countries. At the end of the war, the remnants of the OB West command were concentrated in Bavaria.

Indicative of Hitler’s continuing suspicions of the Army General Staff and the high-ranking commanders whose careers were traced to the officer elite of the Junker class, he replaced the commanders of

1. While fighting for victory, the German soldier will observe the rules of chivalrous warfare. Cruelties and needless destruction are below his values.

2. Combatants will be wearing uniform or will wear specially introduced and clearly identifiable badges. Fighting in civilian clothes or without such badges is prohibited.

OB West no fewer than six times.

Field Marshal Gerd von Rundstedt was appointed and then sacked on three occasions. He commanded OB West from October 1940 to April 1941 and was replaced by Field Marshal Erwin von Witzleben from May 1941 to March 1942. Rundstedt was reinstated and commanded OB West from March 1942 to July 1944 and was followed by Field Marshal Günther von Kluge from early July to mid-August of that year. Field Marshal Walther Model held the post for only two weeks in August and September 1944, and Rundstedt again commanded OB West from September 1944 until March 1945.

The final commander of OB West was

3. No enemy who has surrendered will be executed, including partisans and spies. They will be duly punished by courts.

4. POWs will not be ill-treated or mocked. Arms, maps and records will be taken away from them, but their personal belongings will not be touched.

5. Dum-Dum bullets are prohibited; also no other bullets may be transformed into Dum-Dums.

6. Red Cross institutions are sacrosanct. Injured enemies are to be treated humanely. Medical personnel and army chaplains should not be hindered in performing their medical or clerical activities.

7. The civilian population is sacrosanct. No looting nor egregious destruction is permitted by the soldier.

Landmarks of historical value or buildings serving religious purposes, art, science, or charity are to be especially respected. Deliveries in kind made, as well as services rendered by the population, may only be claimed if ordered by superiors and only against compensation.

THEATRE COMMANDS, 1940–45

u

The Wehrmacht

command structure

In the spring of 1940, the German armed forces moved against Norway and Denmark.

Historically, such an operation would have been planned by the General Staff of the Army and executed through OKH. However, Operation ‘Weserübung’ (Weser Exercise) was controlled from the outset by OKW. Soon afterward, OKW issued orders to move an entire division of the Heer from Norway to Finland, establishing a new theatre of war for the armed forces which was completely outside the control or influence of the General Staff or OKH. When the invasion of the Soviet Union began on 22 June 1941, and 120 German divisions attacked the Red Army along a 1600km (1000-mile) front, Hitler could not refrain from interfering with ongoing operations.

He accomplished this through orders issued via OKW. Just as he had done in France weeks earlier, ordering his ground troops to halt and allowing thousands of British and French soldiers to escape from Dunkirk, he grew restless as German forces neared the Soviet capital of Moscow.

Hitler diverted troops of Field Marshal Fedor von Bock’s Army Group Centre to the north and south of the Soviet capital, rendering Bock’s planned armoured thrust to capture Moscow impossible and depriving him of the initiative necessary to potentially win the war in the East.

From the autumn of 1940 until the end of the war, the Feldheer in the West, also known as the Westheer, was under the control of Oberbefehlshaber West, or OB West, which answered directly to

WORLD WAR II GERMANY:

füHrer Adolf Hitler

n

Gen FM Erwin von Witzleben (1941–2) Gen FM Günther von Kluge (1944) Gen FM Walter Model (1944) Gen FM Albert Kesselring (1945) n OB Süd West Gen FM Albert Kesselring (1943–5) Gen FM Heinrich von Vietinghoff-Scheel (1945)

n a young German soldier poses for the camera

during the invasion of france, may 1940. He is armed with a Kar 98 rifle and has a stick grenade

8. Neutral territory will never be entered nor passed over by aircraft, nor shot at; it will not be the focus of warmaking of any kind.

n OB West Gen FM Gerd von Rundstedt (1940–1, 1942–4, 1944–5)

tucked in his belt.

9. If a German soldier is made a POW he will give his name and rank if he is asked for them. Under no circumstances will he reveal the unit to which he belongs, nor will he give any information about German military, political and economic conditions. Neither promises nor threats may induce him to do so.

n OB Süd Ost Gen-Ob Alexander Löhr (1943–5)

10. Offences against the a/m matters of duty will be punished. Enemy offences against the principles under 1 to 8 are to be reported. Reprisals are only permissible on order of higher commands.

n OB Nord West Gen FM Ernst Busch (1945)

42

43

people. Every German is liable to military service. In time of war, in addition to liability to military service, every German man and every German woman is liable to service to the Fatherland,’ it read.

From 1935 on, German men were subject to military service from their 18th birthday until the end of the month of March following their 45th birthday. Later, conscription was extended to cover those aged 17 to 61, and during the last days of the Third Reich boys as young as 12 were defending the smouldering ruins of Berlin. Individuals who were deemed as somewhat short of immediate fitness for service were classified in one of several reserve components and subject to activation as needed.

Certain classes of the population, such as Jews, were excluded from service. However, as the need for manpower increased the standards for physical fitness were lowered, convicts serving prison terms were pressed into the ranks, and convalescing soldiers who might have previously been sent on leave were returned to their units.

During World War II, the strength of the Heer at its peak approached 10 million men. Between 1939 and 1945, the Heer suffered more than 4.2 million dead and nearly 400,000 taken prisoner, bearing by far the lion’s share of the burden of the fight for Germany. The combat prowess of the German soldier in World War II was grudgingly acknowledged by his adversaries, and historians have noted that as a whole the German Army acquitted itself with tremendous courage in the face of a continually deteriorating strategic

GERMAN MILITARY CASUALITIES IN WORLD WAR II (MILLION)

m issiles a nd a ir- la u nch ed wea po ns

NUMBERS OF V-2s FIRED AT TARGETS IN EUROPE

20

Location Belgium

18,000,000

18

Antwerp

16 14

13 9

Diest

10

London Norwich Ipswich

7,856,000

8 6

4,606,000 4

3,250,000

Total killed, wounded and captured

Total dead and wounded

Killed and missing

and tactical situation after 1942.

Although some Heer units are known to have committed atrocities against prisoners of war and civilians alike, most common soldiers of the German Army acquitted themselves honourably in combat.

In his acclaimed book Frontsoldaten, Stephen G. Fritz points out, ‘As perpetrators, whether out of conviction or not, these common men existed as part of a great destructive machine, ready and willing to kill and destroy in order to achieve the goals of a murderous regime. In the role of victims, they lived daily with the physical hardships, the psychological burdens, and the often crushing anxieties of death and killing that constitute the everyday life of all combat soldiers.’

Wounded

POWs

n every German campaign, even the

successful ones, added significantly to the death toll on the German army. tens of thousands died in poland, france, and the Balkans, but the real price was paid on the eastern front.

For all his ineptitude as a military strategist, particularly his strategic blunders committed in 1940 and later, Adolf Hitler was nevertheless the catalyst for the growth and development of a fighting machine which was, up to that time, the most formidable in the world. The Heer, in turn, was the premier component of that machine, fighting across fronts which extended from the Caucasus to the deserts of North Africa and from the English Channel to the Arctic Circle.

48

49

2 1358 43 1 76

Lille

25

Paris

22

Tourcoing

19

Cambrai

0

3 1402

France

Arras 2

1610 27

uK 10,000,000

1664

Hasselt Tournai Mons

12

Total

Liège

6 4

netherlands (maastricht)

19

Germany (remagen)

11

failures, von Braun was confident that the design was sound, but the deteriorating military situation forced the evacuation of the Peenemünde site before any further trials could be carried out.

A final variant of the A-4b was intended to be fitted with a ring of 10 solid propellant booster rockets to achieve a speed of Mach 6 at an altitude of 20km (12 miles), extending the range of the missile to 950– 1000km (590–621 miles).

First ICBM The first stage of the proposed ICBM, the A-10, was to be powered by six modified V-2 rocket engines and was intended to carry the second stage A-4b/A-9 embedded in its nose. The problem of achieving any sort of accuracy against US targets was

considerable, given the limitations of 1940s technology.

Two options were seriously considered, the first was guidance by radio beacons which were to be set up by German agents operating in the USA and the second was to utilize a manned version of the A-4b/A-9. In theory, the pilot was to eject after setting the missile on course to its target.

The A4b/A-10 combination was designed in parallel with the A-9/A4b and its development was also officially suspended in 1943 to free resources for the V-2 programme.

However, there is some surprising evidence to the contrary at two locations in Normandy, one at Haut Mesnil, near Caen and the other at La Meauffe, near St Lo. Both were quarries that had been taken over for conversion to V-2 storage areas in 1942, but little work was completed up to the end of 1943. In early 1944, urgent construction work suddenly began at both sites and after their capture, Allied intelligence teams found that they contained networks of tunnels and loading equipment for missiles almost twice the size of the V-2. Perhaps, therefore, work on A-4b/A-10 was much closer to completion than official historical research suggests.

Rheinbote (Rhine Messenger) In the late 1930s, the armaments firm Rheinmetall-Borsig had built up considerable expertise in the development of solid fuel rockets for army use in the short-range bombardment role (the 28/32cm (11/12.6in) NbW 41 series). It appears that there were some misgivings

m issiles a nd a ir- la u nch ed wea po ns

at this time about the feasibility of the large, liquid-fuelled missiles under development at Peenemünde and that Rheinmetall-Borsig were requested to design a solid fuel missile to act as back-up in the event of the failure of the V-1 or V-2 design and construction projects.

By May 1942, plans had been drawn up for a multi-stage, solid fuel rocket carrying a 1225kg (2695lb) warhead to a maximum range of 241km (150 miles). Although a production contract was issued, it soon became apparent that development would be a lengthy business and attention turned to smaller versions of the missile that could be brought into service more quickly. The selected type, the Rh-Z-61/9, was dubbed Rheinbote and was a four-stage, fin-stabilized missile with no guidance or control system that had to be accurately aimed at its target before launch to have any chance of hitting it.

General Dornberger expressed deep reservations about the practicality of the design which used a 1715kg (3775lb) multi-stage missile to inaccurately deliver a 40kg (88lb) warhead containing only 20kg (44lb) of explosives. However, the SS believed that the system had real potential to damage Allied targets and used their increasing influence over missile development to issue a production order for the Rheinbote in November 1944.

The Rheinbote trials unit was accordingly mobilized as Artillerie Abeitlung 709 and deployed to Nunspeet in the Netherlands to take part in the massive bombardment of Antwerp, which was an important

supply port. The unit was supposed to be equipped with 12 launchers, but only seems to have received four.

The launcher was the FR-Wagen, a modification of the Meillerwagen transporter/erector trailer used for the V-2. The missile was fired from a launch rail mounted on the erector frame rather than from a separate launch pad, as in the case of the V-2.

Combat Effectiveness The shortage of launchers

accentuated the ineffectiveness of the Rheinbote bombardment which began on Christmas Eve and continued into January 1945. The average rate of fire for each launcher seems to have been roughly one missile per hour – estimates of the total number of missiles fired vary, but it was certainly no more than 200. As predicted, the effectiveness of these missiles was very limited and by the end of January 1945, even the SS appreciated that the

V-2 LAUNCH SITES AND TARGETS

North Sea

NETHERLANDS Norwich

ENGLAND

chris mcnab

The SS examines the history and development of the Schutzstaffel from its origin as Hitler’s personal bodyguard to its growth into a millions-strong organization by the war’s end. Highly illustrated and broken down into key constituent parts – such as the police, concentration camps, security services, Waffen-SS, slave labour and Einsatzgruppen – the book is an essential reference guide for anyone interested in the history and structure of this infamous organization.

Ipswich

London

Antwerp

The SS

240 x 189mm (9½ x 7½”) 192pp 50,000 words 150 photos, diagrams and maps ISBN: 978-1-78274-593-8 £19.99 Paperback

police and intelligence

6 kripo offices

Motorisierte Gendarmerie (Motorized Traffic Gendarmerie)

Feuerschutzpolizei (Fire Protection Police)

Polizei Fliegerstaffeln (Police Flying units)

Feuerwehren (Fire Brigades) 1

Polizei Nachrichtenstaffeln (Police Signal units)

Luftschutzpolizei (Air Raid Police)

Gendarmerie (Rural Police)

Technische Nothilfe, TeNo (Technical Emergency Service)

Polizei Reiterstaffeln (Mounted Police units)

Feldjägerkrops, FJK (Auxiliary Police)

Schutzpolizei des Reichs (Reich Protection Police) 5

Verwaltungspolizei (Administrative Police)

Schutzpolizei, Schupo (Protection Police)

Gesundheitspolizei (Health Police)

Verkehrsbereitschaften (Traffic Police)

Gewerbepolizei (Factory & Shops Police)

Verkehrskompanien (mot) zbV (Motorized Special Duty Traffic Police)

Hochgebirgs Gendarmerie (Mountain Gendarmerie)

Wasserschutzpolizei (Waterways Protection Police)

Schutzpolizei der Gemeinden (Municipal Police)

n The Gestapo often used dogs for lightning swoops on homes and snatches

of suspects. Here, dogs are being trained at the Gestapo School of Canine Intelligence at Rotengal.

149

2

police and intelligence

Baupolizei (Buildings Police)

Landespolizei (Barracked Territorial Police) 2

The German police and security services would become both instruments of terror and order, integral to the ideological and daily life of the Third Reich.

GERMANY

Liège

English Channel V-2 launch sites Headquarters

FRANCE

Targeted cities Distance: 319km (198 miles) Altitude: 80km (50 miles)

148

149

missile s and air-launche d we apons

Surface-to-Surface Missiles

surFACE-To-surFACE mIssIlEs ComPArED

Although they were far from being the decisive weapons that Hitler had envisaged, the V-1 and V-2 inflicted significant damage to their targets and compelled the Allies to divert considerable resources to countering the threat that they posed.

V-1 In common with many other countries, Germany had experimented with unmanned aircraft during the inter-war years, but had never seriously considered their potential as flying bombs. Tentative proposals for such weapons were rejected in 1939 and 1941, but by 1942, the erosion of German air superiority prompted the Luftwaffe to reconsider the matter and begin the development of a small, cheap flying bomb, with a range of about 250km (155 miles) and a 800kg (1760lb) warhead, that could hit an area target, evading interception by flying in at high speed and low altitude.

The project was given the cover designation of Flakzielgerät 76 (FZG 76) – ‘AA target equipment 76’.

The FZG 76 was powered by an Argus pulse jet – a simple tube containing a fuel injection system and a spark plug, with its front covered by a screen of spring-loaded flaps.

In flight, the airflow forced the flaps open, which operated a valve spraying fuel into the tube. The fuel/ air mix was ignited by the spark plug and the explosion blew the flaps shut, producing a brief burst of thrust before the flaps were again forced open by the airflow to restart the operating cycle. At full speed, the engine produced these pulses at an approximate rate of 42 per second.

While it was a crude engine, which could only operate effectively at low altitude, it would run well on low octane petrol and was ideally suited to power a flying bomb.

The initial test flight of an airlaunched unpowered prototype was made in early December 1942, with the first powered flight following on Christmas Eve, when a missile was air-launched from a Focke-Wulf Fw 200 Condor from Peenemünde.

New launch system Considerable development work was still required, but by mid-1943, a workable catapult launching system had been devised. A gyrocompassbased autopilot guidance system had been adopted which gave sufficient accuracy for use against area targets and selection of launch sites began. Potential launch sites were fewer than had been anticipated, as steadily increasing weight had degraded the missile’s performance.

It had been estimated that it would have a range of 483km (300 miles)

and a speed of 720–800km/h (450– 500mph) but in practice these figures were reduced to approximately 240km (150 miles) and 560–640km/h (350–400mph).

Production examples of the V-1 were fitted with an odometer driven by a vane anemometer on the nose that determined when the target area had been reached. Before launch, the counter was set to a value that would reach zero upon arrival at the target in the prevailing wind conditions. As the missile flew, the airflow turned the propeller, with every 30 rotations counting down one number on the counter. This counter triggered the arming of the warhead after about 60km (38 miles). When the counter reached zero, two explosive bolts were fired and two spoilers on the elevator were released, the linkage between the elevator and servo was jammed and a guillotine device cut off the control hoses to the rudder servo, setting the rudder in neutral.

These actions put the V-1 into a steep dive.

9m

6m

3m V-1 length: 8m (26ft) 0m

0m

3m

6m

9m

12m

0m

3m

6m

9m

12m

15m

18m

21m

24m

21m

24m

27m

30m

33m

36m

27m

30m

33m

36m

33m

36m

9m

6m

V-2 length: 14m (46ft)

3m

0m

15m

18m

9m

A-9/A-10 length: 25.8m (84ft 8in)

6m

3m

0m

0m

3m

6m

9m

12m

15m

18m

21m

24m

27m

30m

range

Rheinbote, V-1, V-2, AnD A9/A10 sIZEs ComPArED

V-1

Missile

Length

Max Diameter

Span

Rheinbote

11.5m (37ft 6in)

0.535m (1ft 9in)

1.49m (4ft 10in)

V-1 V-2 A-9/A-10 Amerikarakete

8m (26ft)

0.84m (2ft 9in)

5m (17ft)

14m (46ft)

1.68m (5ft 6in)

3.5m (11ft 6in)

25.8m (84ft 8in)

4.3m (14ft 1in)

9m (29ft 6in)

V-2

240km (149 miles) 330km (205 miles)

5000km (3107 miles)

A-9/A-10

138

139

During World War II, the Germans fielded 29 panzergrenadier divisions, in which the infantry units were fully motorised to operate alongside tanks and assault guns on the battlefield.

Illustrated with more than 90 photographs and artworks, Fighting Techniques of a Panzergrenadier is a comprehensive guide to the training, techniques and weaponry of these soldiers.

WORLD WAR II GERMANY:

Kasernierte Polizei (Barrack Police)

What came to unite all the police and security services of the Third Reich was the SS. When the Nazis took control in 1933, the police forces of Germany were arranged on an individual state basis. This arrangement was not suited to a centralized dictatorship, so Hitler, Göring and Himmler began to shift existing Landespolizei (State Police) under SS control, while also establishing new security services such as the Sicherheitspolizei (Security Police; Sipo) and Sicherheitsdienst (Security Service; SD).

Burgsteinfurt Darfield

Maastricht

BELGIUM

Lille

Heek

m issiles a nd a ir- la u nch ed wea po ns

matthew hughes and chris mann

uNITS WITHIN THE ORDNUNGSPOLIZEI (ORDER POLICE; ORPO)

The Nazi system of policing the Third Reich was labyrinthine in the extreme. There were multiple security and police organizations, some of them legacies from the Weimar Republic and older police institutions, while others were new creations established after Hitler’s taking of power in 1933.

Ommen

Archem Hellendoom Nikverdal Wassenaar Haaksbergen The Hague Hoek van Holland Kleve Serooskerke Middleburg

C H A P T E R

Police and Intelligence

Rijs Dalfsen

Hitler’s Secret Weapons 240 x 189mm (9½ x 7½”) 192pp 50,000 words 150 photos, diagrams and maps ISBN: 978-1-78274-595-2 £19.99 Paperback

Fighting Techniques of a Panzergrenadier 1941–45

The SS

chapter 6

rocket was militarily useless and the project was finally cancelled the following month.

While the service version of Rheinbote was a total disaster, there were designs derived from the original study that could have been at least as effective as the V-2. The most advanced of these seems to have been the Rheinbote III, which had a 771kg (1700lb) warhead and a range of 241km (150 miles).

WORLD WAR II GERMANY:

Landwacht (Rural Guards) 3 Stadtwacht (City Guards) 4

In a sense, the regular street-level policing continued much as it had always done, but there were distinct signals that it was now the SS that was in ultimate control, as Gordon Williamson here points out: Himmler would ensure that the majority of senior and middle-level Police posts were filled by men who were also members of the SS and thus owed obedience to him...

Senior ranks who remained in the Police and who were not already members of the SS were pressured into joining; membership became a prerequisite for a successful Police career.

(Williamson, 2006) Williamson also goes on to note that from 1942 all police were issued with a pay book ‘bearing the SS runes rather than the Police eagle on the cover’. There was no doubt as to who was in charge.

152

the kripo maintained offices in most of the major towns and cities across the reich. the offices at a sub-regional level would report back to the relevant regional office headquarters. in turn, the reports from regional offices were then passed on to the central office in Berlin, part of the rsha.

who were not oriented towards the Nazi Party, in the process depriving the force of thousands of excellent officers and consequently reducing its efficiency.

He also encouraged members of the Allgemeine-SS to join the police ranks, breeding tensions and suspicions amongst the older officers and the new intake.

Kriminalpolizei – the Criminal Police, better known as the Kripo – and the Ordnungspolizei (Order Police; Orpo).

The Orpo was commanded from 1936 to 1945 by SS-Oberstgruppenführer Kurt Daluege, an unpleasant and brutish man who was generally unpopular with the civilian career policemen who made up the service’s ranks. Daluege purged Orpo officials

Structured law enforcement The RSHA was divided into seven major departments, including two SD departments (Amt III and Amt VI) responsible for domestic and foreign intelligence respectively, and Amt IV – the Gestapo. It also included the Kriminalpolizei in Amt V (see below).

In terms of their regional and local arrangements, the police forces within Germany were split

into the following administrative divisions. At the regional level was the Landespolizeibehörde (Regional Police Authority), controlled by the Länder authorities or, in the case of Prussia and Bavaria, by the Regierungspräsident (Government President). The next level of command came with the Kreispolizeibehörde (City/County Police Authority), headed by various civic officials depending on the nature of the territory, and finally the Ortspolizeibehörde (Local Police Authority), controlled typically by a local mayor. While the security services were the most feared elements of policing, the main interface of law and order – and therefore the most pervasive tool of the domestic SS – was the regular police forces.

Ordnungspolizei The two major regular police forces in the Third Reich were the

36

285 x 213mm (11¼ x 8¼in) 96 pages 35,000 words 50 artworks, 40 photos ISBN: 978-1-78274-599-0 £14.99 Paperback

Panzergrenadiers in action in the West

Panzergrenadiers in action in the West, 1939–45

Panzergrenadiers in Action in the West, 1939– 45

Stukas dropped their bombs a ‘hair’s breadth’ from the attacking Germans as they stormed the French defences on the slopes of the hill of La Marfée. The French defenders, many of whom were raw conscripts, were left bewildered by the ferocity of the German bombardment. The ensuing battle for the west bank shows that panzergrenadiers often fought fixed piece assaults on prepared defences. This was classic infantry action. Courbiere again: ‘After a short fight the bunker is reached by a sergeant and two men.

The enemy are smoked out by hand grenades; they are completely vanquished; they come out. Their faces reveal the psychological strain of this fighting. Close to each other they stand with their backs to their bunker and raise their hands.’ In the savage fighting, some of the French defenders in the bunkers were shot after they had surrendered. The panzergrenadiers cleared out bunker after bunker so there would be a foothold on the west bank sufficiently large for

Although the invasion of Poland saw the first use of motorised infantry, the 1940 French campaign showed

Panzergrenadiers were used war in the West, before examining the German blitzkrieg tactics throughout World War II, from the events on the Eastern Front in the next invasion of Poland in September 1939, chapter. With this in mind, this chapter to full effect. Conversely, by to the battle for Berlin in April 1945. As a will deal briefly with the invasion of 1944, the panzergrenadiers fighting elite accompanying the panzers Poland before examining two case into action, or as infantry fighting studies in which panzergrenadiers proved themselves highly stubborn rearguard actions, they were were heavily involved: firstly, the elite skilled at delaying the Allied typically engaged in the thickest fighting Grossdeutschland Regiment’s offensive advance through France and of the war. They fought in both offensive action in Operation Niwi and across the and defensive mode; as the war went river Meuse at the battle of Sedan in May the Low Countries. against Germany from 1942–43 it was 1940 during the Fall of France; secondly, increasingly in the latter role that they the defensive action of the 12th SS Hitler were deployed. Throughout the war, Jugend (Hitler Youth) Panzer Division some of the best units of the German armed forces fought in Normandy in 1944. Chapter Four will then cover the as panzergrenadiers. These included the Grossdeutschland panzergrenadiers’ war on the Eastern Front by examining Division, 1st SS Leibstandarte Adolf Hitler Division, 2nd three pertinent case studies: firstly, the German advance on SS Das Reich Division, 12th SS Hitler Jugend Division, the Moscow following Operation Barbarossa when it looked as Brandenburg Division and the Luftwaffe’s elite Hermann though Germany would capture Moscow and conquer the Göring Division. Although many of these panzergrenadier USSR; secondly, panzergrenadiers in action during the battle divisions were later reorganised as panzer divisions, even of Kursk in 1943, the biggest tank battle of the war, with with such reorganisation, all panzer divisions, including elite over 6000 tanks and self-propelled guns involved, where the formations such as the Wehrmacht’s Panzer Lehr Division, Soviets halted the German advance; finally, panzergrenadiers always had attached panzergrenadier regiments that would in a defensive role on the borders of Germany in 1944 as the go into battle with the armour.

Red Army steamrollered west into Poland and Germany.

To make sense of the widely spread theatres of war These case studies provide accounts of panzergrenadiers in which panzergrenadiers fought, the two chapters on in a variety of different theatres of war, and show how the the panzergrenadiers’ war record will focus firstly on the panzergrenadier performed in attack as well as defence. As will be seen, whether fighting in the woods of the Ardennes, the bocage of Normandy, or the steppes of the Soviet Union, Left: SS panzergrenadiers from Kampfgruppe Hansen smoking German panzergrenadiers invariably proved the maxim of captured American Camel cigarettes, somewhere in the Ardennes the German army commander of the 1920s, Hans von Seekt: during the Battle of the Bulge, 1944. Behind them is a knocked-out ‘Mehr seins als Schein’ (‘Be more than you appear to be’).

American M8 armoured car.

LOCATION OF KRIPO REGIONAL OFFICES

1. Served as an auxiliary force to the Feuerschutzpolizei 2. under Wehrmacht authority from 1935 3. Assisted the Gendarmerie 4. Assisted the Schutzpolizei 5. Responsible for cities and large towns

Another major organizational change in policing during the 1930s came with the formation of the Reichssicherheitshauptamt (Reich Main Security Office; RSHA), which was established in September 1939 as the supreme security office in the Third Reich. (The previous security office had been known as the Sicherheitshauptamt.) Headed

by Reinhard Heydrich until his assassination in 1942, the RSHA became the umbrella organization for suppressing ‘enemies of the state’.

3

Fighting Techniques of a Panzergrenadier 1941–45

n

Danzig

n

Königsberg

EAST PRuSSIA n n

Bremen n

n

Stettin

Berlin

n

Posen

n

Breslau

Hanover

POLAND n

n

Cologne

Dresden

GERMANY

n n

n n n

Nuremberg

CZEC

Stuttgart

Strasbourg n

Vienna

Munich n

Kattowice

Prague

HOSL

OVAK

IA

n

Salzburg

AuSTRIA

goes unnoticed. The enemy fire begins to slacken noticeably, but nevertheless the crossing of the first storm boats, the engineers, remains a hard task, a task from which many don’t come back. In impotent rage, the tank crews watch boats torn to pieces by direct hits.’

While the tanks remained static, the men of the Grossdeutschland (and 1st Motorised Rifle Regiment) attempted to consolidate the bridgehead. The panzergrenadiers operated within the German military tradition of auftragstaktik (mission-oriented tactics), which

37

combat engineers to build ferries and a bridge onto which the panzers could pass. All along the Meuse, the experience of the men of the Grossdeutschland was repeated as other Wehrmacht motorised infantry units paddled across the river in the face of fierce French fire. Casualties in such an assault were high and for men wounded on the west bank the delay in ferrying them back to regimental aid posts on the east bank often proved fatal. Another problem was the lack of water, and the Germans relied on captured bottles of water to keep them going.

Combat Engineers at the Crossing of the Meuse The Grossdeutschland was just one motorised infantry regiment crossing the Meuse. The experience of the other motorised infantry crossing the river was very similar to that of the Grossdeutschland. But it was an all-arms

Above: SS panzergrenadiers crossing a river. River crossings were extremely hazardous and costly operations, and required large amounts of courage, as those crossing the river were extremely exposed to any defensive enemy fire.

allowed junior officers and NCOs to react to the situation on the ground, and ignore orders if they thought their actions would help achieve the unit’s mission.

The Ju-87 Stuka dive-bomber was invaluable in providing mobile fire support for the attacking infantry at the Meuse.

A common blitzkrieg tactic: whilst the German tanks

Should the bridge be blown, tanks would again provide

fixed the bridge’s defenders with their support fire, the

supporting fire with the panzergrenadiers, while the pioneers

panzergrenadiers would outflank the position, and race

attempted to cross the river in rubber boats. Once across,

through the defences to capture the bridge intact.

they would seize a bridgehead, and build an assault bridge.

153

3

FEBRUARY 2018 Publication

JANUARY 2018 Publication

The Wehrmacht

Hitler’s Secret Weapons

Rising from the ashes of the post-World War I Reichswehr, the Wehrmacht became one of the cornerstones of Hitler’s reassertion of German military might.

With chapters on the history of the German Army, pre-war development, command structures, infantry, armoured formations, artillery and support services, The Wehrmacht offers military history enthusiasts key data on every aspect of Nazi Germany’s ground forces.

Following the invasion of the Soviet Union and the realization that the war could continue for years, Hitler put great resources into the development of technologically advanced weaponry, in the belief that the production of ‘wonder weapons’ was the key to victory. From submarines to chemical and nuclear weapons, from superguns to experimental aircraft, Hitler’s Secret Weapons reveals the extent of Germany’s munitions development.

david porter

michael e. haskew

c o m m an d s tr uc tur e

authorized units of the Heer to utilize extreme measures in the process.

Furthermore, officers were directed to use ‘collective measures’ against the local population where attacks against German forces occurred if the actual culprits could not be located.

Officers were also empowered to execute hostile persons without trial or formal adherence to any law or legal process. Officers of the Heer were assured that they were

c o m m a n d s t r u cture

authorized to exercise such authority without fear of prosecution for actions which would normally be violations of German law. Generals and senior commanders who protested summary executions and acts of brutality committed by both Army and WaffenSS personnel were often relieved of duty or otherwise silenced. Each of these orders originated with Hitler; however, the implementation of them rested with Wilhelm Keitel and the

signature on the actual paper order was his.

While Keitel had considered himself a loyal officer of the German Army, he had fatally linked that loyalty to the person of Adolf Hitler.

In doing so, he undermined the effectiveness of the Army General Staff and OKH, precipitated an indelible stain on the honour of the Army and the officer corps, and was hanged as a war criminal.

FIELD MARSHAL WILHELM BODEWIN GUSTAv KEITEL A senior Nazi and member of Hitler’s inner circle throughout World War II, Keitel served as chief of the Oberkommando der Wehrmacht (OKW) and conducted the armistice negotiations with the French government in the Forest of Compiègne in 1940. Keitel was a career soldier and was wounded in action during World War I. Acknowledged as a capable staff officer, his blind allegiance to Hitler facilitated numerous errors in the strategic and tactical prosecution of the German war effort. Field Marshal Keitel was tried at Nuremberg and convicted of war crimes and crimes against humanity. He was hanged on 16 October 1946.

Birth: Death: Place of Birth: father: Mother: Personal relationshiPs: Service:

n Keitel (left) talks with Luftwaffe supremo

Hermann Göring, 1943.

22 September 1882 16 October 1946 Helmscherode, Braunschweig Carl Keitel Apollonia vissering Married to Lisa Fontaine (six children) Cadet Officer 1901 Wounded in action 1914 Joined Freikorps 1919 Head of Army Organization Department 1929 Brigadier-General 1934 Head of Armed Forces Office 1935 Major-General 1936 General of Artillery 1937 Armed Forces High Command 1938 Colonel-General 1938 Chief of OKW 1938 Field Marshal 1940 Convicted and executed at Nuremberg 1946

The Führer’s Orders

240 x 189mm (9½ x 7½”) 192pp 50,000 words 150 photos, diagrams and maps ISBN: 978-1-78274-592-1 £19.99 Paperback

command structure

GERMAN SOLDIER’S TEN COMMANDMENTS (PRINTED IN PAY BOOK)

OKW. In its subordinate role, OB West was mainly responsible for the implementation of orders issued directly by Hitler and transmitted through OKW. The OB West area of operations primarily included the coastal defences of the Atlantic Wall, which opposed the Allied landings in Normandy on 6 June 1944, and the occupied territories of the Low Countries. At the end of the war, the remnants of the OB West command were concentrated in Bavaria.

Indicative of Hitler’s continuing suspicions of the Army General Staff and the high-ranking commanders whose careers were traced to the officer elite of the Junker class, he replaced the commanders of

1. While fighting for victory, the German soldier will observe the rules of chivalrous warfare. Cruelties and needless destruction are below his values.

2. Combatants will be wearing uniform or will wear specially introduced and clearly identifiable badges. Fighting in civilian clothes or without such badges is prohibited.

OB West no fewer than six times.

Field Marshal Gerd von Rundstedt was appointed and then sacked on three occasions. He commanded OB West from October 1940 to April 1941 and was replaced by Field Marshal Erwin von Witzleben from May 1941 to March 1942. Rundstedt was reinstated and commanded OB West from March 1942 to July 1944 and was followed by Field Marshal Günther von Kluge from early July to mid-August of that year. Field Marshal Walther Model held the post for only two weeks in August and September 1944, and Rundstedt again commanded OB West from September 1944 until March 1945.

The final commander of OB West was

3. No enemy who has surrendered will be executed, including partisans and spies. They will be duly punished by courts.

4. POWs will not be ill-treated or mocked. Arms, maps and records will be taken away from them, but their personal belongings will not be touched.

5. Dum-Dum bullets are prohibited; also no other bullets may be transformed into Dum-Dums.

6. Red Cross institutions are sacrosanct. Injured enemies are to be treated humanely. Medical personnel and army chaplains should not be hindered in performing their medical or clerical activities.

7. The civilian population is sacrosanct. No looting nor egregious destruction is permitted by the soldier.

Landmarks of historical value or buildings serving religious purposes, art, science, or charity are to be especially respected. Deliveries in kind made, as well as services rendered by the population, may only be claimed if ordered by superiors and only against compensation.

THEATRE COMMANDS, 1940–45

u

The Wehrmacht

command structure

In the spring of 1940, the German armed forces moved against Norway and Denmark.

Historically, such an operation would have been planned by the General Staff of the Army and executed through OKH. However, Operation ‘Weserübung’ (Weser Exercise) was controlled from the outset by OKW. Soon afterward, OKW issued orders to move an entire division of the Heer from Norway to Finland, establishing a new theatre of war for the armed forces which was completely outside the control or influence of the General Staff or OKH. When the invasion of the Soviet Union began on 22 June 1941, and 120 German divisions attacked the Red Army along a 1600km (1000-mile) front, Hitler could not refrain from interfering with ongoing operations.

He accomplished this through orders issued via OKW. Just as he had done in France weeks earlier, ordering his ground troops to halt and allowing thousands of British and French soldiers to escape from Dunkirk, he grew restless as German forces neared the Soviet capital of Moscow.

Hitler diverted troops of Field Marshal Fedor von Bock’s Army Group Centre to the north and south of the Soviet capital, rendering Bock’s planned armoured thrust to capture Moscow impossible and depriving him of the initiative necessary to potentially win the war in the East.

From the autumn of 1940 until the end of the war, the Feldheer in the West, also known as the Westheer, was under the control of Oberbefehlshaber West, or OB West, which answered directly to

WORLD WAR II GERMANY:

füHrer Adolf Hitler

n

Gen FM Erwin von Witzleben (1941–2) Gen FM Günther von Kluge (1944) Gen FM Walter Model (1944) Gen FM Albert Kesselring (1945) n OB Süd West Gen FM Albert Kesselring (1943–5) Gen FM Heinrich von Vietinghoff-Scheel (1945)

n a young German soldier poses for the camera

during the invasion of france, may 1940. He is armed with a Kar 98 rifle and has a stick grenade

8. Neutral territory will never be entered nor passed over by aircraft, nor shot at; it will not be the focus of warmaking of any kind.

n OB West Gen FM Gerd von Rundstedt (1940–1, 1942–4, 1944–5)

tucked in his belt.

9. If a German soldier is made a POW he will give his name and rank if he is asked for them. Under no circumstances will he reveal the unit to which he belongs, nor will he give any information about German military, political and economic conditions. Neither promises nor threats may induce him to do so.

n OB Süd Ost Gen-Ob Alexander Löhr (1943–5)

10. Offences against the a/m matters of duty will be punished. Enemy offences against the principles under 1 to 8 are to be reported. Reprisals are only permissible on order of higher commands.

n OB Nord West Gen FM Ernst Busch (1945)

42

43

people. Every German is liable to military service. In time of war, in addition to liability to military service, every German man and every German woman is liable to service to the Fatherland,’ it read.

From 1935 on, German men were subject to military service from their 18th birthday until the end of the month of March following their 45th birthday. Later, conscription was extended to cover those aged 17 to 61, and during the last days of the Third Reich boys as young as 12 were defending the smouldering ruins of Berlin. Individuals who were deemed as somewhat short of immediate fitness for service were classified in one of several reserve components and subject to activation as needed.

Certain classes of the population, such as Jews, were excluded from service. However, as the need for manpower increased the standards for physical fitness were lowered, convicts serving prison terms were pressed into the ranks, and convalescing soldiers who might have previously been sent on leave were returned to their units.

During World War II, the strength of the Heer at its peak approached 10 million men. Between 1939 and 1945, the Heer suffered more than 4.2 million dead and nearly 400,000 taken prisoner, bearing by far the lion’s share of the burden of the fight for Germany. The combat prowess of the German soldier in World War II was grudgingly acknowledged by his adversaries, and historians have noted that as a whole the German Army acquitted itself with tremendous courage in the face of a continually deteriorating strategic

GERMAN MILITARY CASUALITIES IN WORLD WAR II (MILLION)

m issiles a nd a ir- la u nch ed wea po ns

NUMBERS OF V-2s FIRED AT TARGETS IN EUROPE

20

Location Belgium

18,000,000

18

Antwerp

16 14

13 9

Diest

10

London Norwich Ipswich

7,856,000

8 6

4,606,000 4

3,250,000

Total killed, wounded and captured

Total dead and wounded

Killed and missing

and tactical situation after 1942.

Although some Heer units are known to have committed atrocities against prisoners of war and civilians alike, most common soldiers of the German Army acquitted themselves honourably in combat.

In his acclaimed book Frontsoldaten, Stephen G. Fritz points out, ‘As perpetrators, whether out of conviction or not, these common men existed as part of a great destructive machine, ready and willing to kill and destroy in order to achieve the goals of a murderous regime. In the role of victims, they lived daily with the physical hardships, the psychological burdens, and the often crushing anxieties of death and killing that constitute the everyday life of all combat soldiers.’

Wounded

POWs

n every German campaign, even the

successful ones, added significantly to the death toll on the German army. tens of thousands died in poland, france, and the Balkans, but the real price was paid on the eastern front.

For all his ineptitude as a military strategist, particularly his strategic blunders committed in 1940 and later, Adolf Hitler was nevertheless the catalyst for the growth and development of a fighting machine which was, up to that time, the most formidable in the world. The Heer, in turn, was the premier component of that machine, fighting across fronts which extended from the Caucasus to the deserts of North Africa and from the English Channel to the Arctic Circle.

48

49

2 1358 43 1 76

Lille

25

Paris

22

Tourcoing

19

Cambrai

0

3 1402

France

Arras 2

1610 27

uK 10,000,000

1664

Hasselt Tournai Mons

12

Total

Liège

6 4

netherlands (maastricht)

19

Germany (remagen)

11

failures, von Braun was confident that the design was sound, but the deteriorating military situation forced the evacuation of the Peenemünde site before any further trials could be carried out.

A final variant of the A-4b was intended to be fitted with a ring of 10 solid propellant booster rockets to achieve a speed of Mach 6 at an altitude of 20km (12 miles), extending the range of the missile to 950– 1000km (590–621 miles).

First ICBM The first stage of the proposed ICBM, the A-10, was to be powered by six modified V-2 rocket engines and was intended to carry the second stage A-4b/A-9 embedded in its nose. The problem of achieving any sort of accuracy against US targets was

considerable, given the limitations of 1940s technology.

Two options were seriously considered, the first was guidance by radio beacons which were to be set up by German agents operating in the USA and the second was to utilize a manned version of the A-4b/A-9. In theory, the pilot was to eject after setting the missile on course to its target.

The A4b/A-10 combination was designed in parallel with the A-9/A4b and its development was also officially suspended in 1943 to free resources for the V-2 programme.

However, there is some surprising evidence to the contrary at two locations in Normandy, one at Haut Mesnil, near Caen and the other at La Meauffe, near St Lo. Both were quarries that had been taken over for conversion to V-2 storage areas in 1942, but little work was completed up to the end of 1943. In early 1944, urgent construction work suddenly began at both sites and after their capture, Allied intelligence teams found that they contained networks of tunnels and loading equipment for missiles almost twice the size of the V-2. Perhaps, therefore, work on A-4b/A-10 was much closer to completion than official historical research suggests.

Rheinbote (Rhine Messenger) In the late 1930s, the armaments firm Rheinmetall-Borsig had built up considerable expertise in the development of solid fuel rockets for army use in the short-range bombardment role (the 28/32cm (11/12.6in) NbW 41 series). It appears that there were some misgivings

m issiles a nd a ir- la u nch ed wea po ns

at this time about the feasibility of the large, liquid-fuelled missiles under development at Peenemünde and that Rheinmetall-Borsig were requested to design a solid fuel missile to act as back-up in the event of the failure of the V-1 or V-2 design and construction projects.

By May 1942, plans had been drawn up for a multi-stage, solid fuel rocket carrying a 1225kg (2695lb) warhead to a maximum range of 241km (150 miles). Although a production contract was issued, it soon became apparent that development would be a lengthy business and attention turned to smaller versions of the missile that could be brought into service more quickly. The selected type, the Rh-Z-61/9, was dubbed Rheinbote and was a four-stage, fin-stabilized missile with no guidance or control system that had to be accurately aimed at its target before launch to have any chance of hitting it.

General Dornberger expressed deep reservations about the practicality of the design which used a 1715kg (3775lb) multi-stage missile to inaccurately deliver a 40kg (88lb) warhead containing only 20kg (44lb) of explosives. However, the SS believed that the system had real potential to damage Allied targets and used their increasing influence over missile development to issue a production order for the Rheinbote in November 1944.

The Rheinbote trials unit was accordingly mobilized as Artillerie Abeitlung 709 and deployed to Nunspeet in the Netherlands to take part in the massive bombardment of Antwerp, which was an important

supply port. The unit was supposed to be equipped with 12 launchers, but only seems to have received four.

The launcher was the FR-Wagen, a modification of the Meillerwagen transporter/erector trailer used for the V-2. The missile was fired from a launch rail mounted on the erector frame rather than from a separate launch pad, as in the case of the V-2.

Combat Effectiveness The shortage of launchers

accentuated the ineffectiveness of the Rheinbote bombardment which began on Christmas Eve and continued into January 1945. The average rate of fire for each launcher seems to have been roughly one missile per hour – estimates of the total number of missiles fired vary, but it was certainly no more than 200. As predicted, the effectiveness of these missiles was very limited and by the end of January 1945, even the SS appreciated that the

V-2 LAUNCH SITES AND TARGETS

North Sea

NETHERLANDS Norwich

ENGLAND

chris mcnab

The SS examines the history and development of the Schutzstaffel from its origin as Hitler’s personal bodyguard to its growth into a millions-strong organization by the war’s end. Highly illustrated and broken down into key constituent parts – such as the police, concentration camps, security services, Waffen-SS, slave labour and Einsatzgruppen – the book is an essential reference guide for anyone interested in the history and structure of this infamous organization.

Ipswich

London

Antwerp

The SS

240 x 189mm (9½ x 7½”) 192pp 50,000 words 150 photos, diagrams and maps ISBN: 978-1-78274-593-8 £19.99 Paperback

police and intelligence

6 kripo offices

Motorisierte Gendarmerie (Motorized Traffic Gendarmerie)

Feuerschutzpolizei (Fire Protection Police)

Polizei Fliegerstaffeln (Police Flying units)

Feuerwehren (Fire Brigades) 1

Polizei Nachrichtenstaffeln (Police Signal units)

Luftschutzpolizei (Air Raid Police)

Gendarmerie (Rural Police)

Technische Nothilfe, TeNo (Technical Emergency Service)

Polizei Reiterstaffeln (Mounted Police units)

Feldjägerkrops, FJK (Auxiliary Police)

Schutzpolizei des Reichs (Reich Protection Police) 5

Verwaltungspolizei (Administrative Police)

Schutzpolizei, Schupo (Protection Police)

Gesundheitspolizei (Health Police)

Verkehrsbereitschaften (Traffic Police)

Gewerbepolizei (Factory & Shops Police)

Verkehrskompanien (mot) zbV (Motorized Special Duty Traffic Police)

Hochgebirgs Gendarmerie (Mountain Gendarmerie)

Wasserschutzpolizei (Waterways Protection Police)

Schutzpolizei der Gemeinden (Municipal Police)

n The Gestapo often used dogs for lightning swoops on homes and snatches

of suspects. Here, dogs are being trained at the Gestapo School of Canine Intelligence at Rotengal.

149

2

police and intelligence

Baupolizei (Buildings Police)

Landespolizei (Barracked Territorial Police) 2

The German police and security services would become both instruments of terror and order, integral to the ideological and daily life of the Third Reich.

GERMANY

Liège

English Channel V-2 launch sites Headquarters

FRANCE

Targeted cities Distance: 319km (198 miles) Altitude: 80km (50 miles)

148

149

missile s and air-launche d we apons

Surface-to-Surface Missiles

surFACE-To-surFACE mIssIlEs ComPArED

Although they were far from being the decisive weapons that Hitler had envisaged, the V-1 and V-2 inflicted significant damage to their targets and compelled the Allies to divert considerable resources to countering the threat that they posed.

V-1 In common with many other countries, Germany had experimented with unmanned aircraft during the inter-war years, but had never seriously considered their potential as flying bombs. Tentative proposals for such weapons were rejected in 1939 and 1941, but by 1942, the erosion of German air superiority prompted the Luftwaffe to reconsider the matter and begin the development of a small, cheap flying bomb, with a range of about 250km (155 miles) and a 800kg (1760lb) warhead, that could hit an area target, evading interception by flying in at high speed and low altitude.

The project was given the cover designation of Flakzielgerät 76 (FZG 76) – ‘AA target equipment 76’.

The FZG 76 was powered by an Argus pulse jet – a simple tube containing a fuel injection system and a spark plug, with its front covered by a screen of spring-loaded flaps.

In flight, the airflow forced the flaps open, which operated a valve spraying fuel into the tube. The fuel/ air mix was ignited by the spark plug and the explosion blew the flaps shut, producing a brief burst of thrust before the flaps were again forced open by the airflow to restart the operating cycle. At full speed, the engine produced these pulses at an approximate rate of 42 per second.

While it was a crude engine, which could only operate effectively at low altitude, it would run well on low octane petrol and was ideally suited to power a flying bomb.

The initial test flight of an airlaunched unpowered prototype was made in early December 1942, with the first powered flight following on Christmas Eve, when a missile was air-launched from a Focke-Wulf Fw 200 Condor from Peenemünde.

New launch system Considerable development work was still required, but by mid-1943, a workable catapult launching system had been devised. A gyrocompassbased autopilot guidance system had been adopted which gave sufficient accuracy for use against area targets and selection of launch sites began. Potential launch sites were fewer than had been anticipated, as steadily increasing weight had degraded the missile’s performance.

It had been estimated that it would have a range of 483km (300 miles)

and a speed of 720–800km/h (450– 500mph) but in practice these figures were reduced to approximately 240km (150 miles) and 560–640km/h (350–400mph).

Production examples of the V-1 were fitted with an odometer driven by a vane anemometer on the nose that determined when the target area had been reached. Before launch, the counter was set to a value that would reach zero upon arrival at the target in the prevailing wind conditions. As the missile flew, the airflow turned the propeller, with every 30 rotations counting down one number on the counter. This counter triggered the arming of the warhead after about 60km (38 miles). When the counter reached zero, two explosive bolts were fired and two spoilers on the elevator were released, the linkage between the elevator and servo was jammed and a guillotine device cut off the control hoses to the rudder servo, setting the rudder in neutral.

These actions put the V-1 into a steep dive.

9m

6m

3m V-1 length: 8m (26ft) 0m

0m

3m

6m

9m

12m

0m

3m

6m

9m

12m

15m

18m

21m

24m

21m

24m

27m

30m

33m

36m

27m

30m

33m

36m

33m

36m

9m

6m

V-2 length: 14m (46ft)

3m

0m

15m

18m

9m

A-9/A-10 length: 25.8m (84ft 8in)

6m

3m

0m

0m

3m

6m

9m

12m

15m

18m

21m

24m

27m

30m

range

Rheinbote, V-1, V-2, AnD A9/A10 sIZEs ComPArED

V-1

Missile

Length

Max Diameter

Span

Rheinbote

11.5m (37ft 6in)

0.535m (1ft 9in)

1.49m (4ft 10in)

V-1 V-2 A-9/A-10 Amerikarakete

8m (26ft)

0.84m (2ft 9in)

5m (17ft)

14m (46ft)

1.68m (5ft 6in)

3.5m (11ft 6in)

25.8m (84ft 8in)

4.3m (14ft 1in)

9m (29ft 6in)

V-2

240km (149 miles) 330km (205 miles)

5000km (3107 miles)

A-9/A-10

138

139

During World War II, the Germans fielded 29 panzergrenadier divisions, in which the infantry units were fully motorised to operate alongside tanks and assault guns on the battlefield.

Illustrated with more than 90 photographs and artworks, Fighting Techniques of a Panzergrenadier is a comprehensive guide to the training, techniques and weaponry of these soldiers.

WORLD WAR II GERMANY:

Kasernierte Polizei (Barrack Police)

What came to unite all the police and security services of the Third Reich was the SS. When the Nazis took control in 1933, the police forces of Germany were arranged on an individual state basis. This arrangement was not suited to a centralized dictatorship, so Hitler, Göring and Himmler began to shift existing Landespolizei (State Police) under SS control, while also establishing new security services such as the Sicherheitspolizei (Security Police; Sipo) and Sicherheitsdienst (Security Service; SD).

Burgsteinfurt Darfield

Maastricht

BELGIUM

Lille

Heek

m issiles a nd a ir- la u nch ed wea po ns

matthew hughes and chris mann

uNITS WITHIN THE ORDNUNGSPOLIZEI (ORDER POLICE; ORPO)

The Nazi system of policing the Third Reich was labyrinthine in the extreme. There were multiple security and police organizations, some of them legacies from the Weimar Republic and older police institutions, while others were new creations established after Hitler’s taking of power in 1933.

Ommen

Archem Hellendoom Nikverdal Wassenaar Haaksbergen The Hague Hoek van Holland Kleve Serooskerke Middleburg

C H A P T E R

Police and Intelligence

Rijs Dalfsen

Hitler’s Secret Weapons 240 x 189mm (9½ x 7½”) 192pp 50,000 words 150 photos, diagrams and maps ISBN: 978-1-78274-595-2 £19.99 Paperback

Fighting Techniques of a Panzergrenadier 1941–45

The SS

chapter 6

rocket was militarily useless and the project was finally cancelled the following month.

While the service version of Rheinbote was a total disaster, there were designs derived from the original study that could have been at least as effective as the V-2. The most advanced of these seems to have been the Rheinbote III, which had a 771kg (1700lb) warhead and a range of 241km (150 miles).

WORLD WAR II GERMANY:

Landwacht (Rural Guards) 3 Stadtwacht (City Guards) 4

In a sense, the regular street-level policing continued much as it had always done, but there were distinct signals that it was now the SS that was in ultimate control, as Gordon Williamson here points out: Himmler would ensure that the majority of senior and middle-level Police posts were filled by men who were also members of the SS and thus owed obedience to him...

Senior ranks who remained in the Police and who were not already members of the SS were pressured into joining; membership became a prerequisite for a successful Police career.

(Williamson, 2006) Williamson also goes on to note that from 1942 all police were issued with a pay book ‘bearing the SS runes rather than the Police eagle on the cover’. There was no doubt as to who was in charge.

152

the kripo maintained offices in most of the major towns and cities across the reich. the offices at a sub-regional level would report back to the relevant regional office headquarters. in turn, the reports from regional offices were then passed on to the central office in Berlin, part of the rsha.

who were not oriented towards the Nazi Party, in the process depriving the force of thousands of excellent officers and consequently reducing its efficiency.

He also encouraged members of the Allgemeine-SS to join the police ranks, breeding tensions and suspicions amongst the older officers and the new intake.

Kriminalpolizei – the Criminal Police, better known as the Kripo – and the Ordnungspolizei (Order Police; Orpo).

The Orpo was commanded from 1936 to 1945 by SS-Oberstgruppenführer Kurt Daluege, an unpleasant and brutish man who was generally unpopular with the civilian career policemen who made up the service’s ranks. Daluege purged Orpo officials

Structured law enforcement The RSHA was divided into seven major departments, including two SD departments (Amt III and Amt VI) responsible for domestic and foreign intelligence respectively, and Amt IV – the Gestapo. It also included the Kriminalpolizei in Amt V (see below).

In terms of their regional and local arrangements, the police forces within Germany were split

into the following administrative divisions. At the regional level was the Landespolizeibehörde (Regional Police Authority), controlled by the Länder authorities or, in the case of Prussia and Bavaria, by the Regierungspräsident (Government President). The next level of command came with the Kreispolizeibehörde (City/County Police Authority), headed by various civic officials depending on the nature of the territory, and finally the Ortspolizeibehörde (Local Police Authority), controlled typically by a local mayor. While the security services were the most feared elements of policing, the main interface of law and order – and therefore the most pervasive tool of the domestic SS – was the regular police forces.

Ordnungspolizei The two major regular police forces in the Third Reich were the

36

285 x 213mm (11¼ x 8¼in) 96 pages 35,000 words 50 artworks, 40 photos ISBN: 978-1-78274-599-0 £14.99 Paperback

Panzergrenadiers in action in the West

Panzergrenadiers in action in the West, 1939–45

Panzergrenadiers in Action in the West, 1939– 45

Stukas dropped their bombs a ‘hair’s breadth’ from the attacking Germans as they stormed the French defences on the slopes of the hill of La Marfée. The French defenders, many of whom were raw conscripts, were left bewildered by the ferocity of the German bombardment. The ensuing battle for the west bank shows that panzergrenadiers often fought fixed piece assaults on prepared defences. This was classic infantry action. Courbiere again: ‘After a short fight the bunker is reached by a sergeant and two men.

The enemy are smoked out by hand grenades; they are completely vanquished; they come out. Their faces reveal the psychological strain of this fighting. Close to each other they stand with their backs to their bunker and raise their hands.’ In the savage fighting, some of the French defenders in the bunkers were shot after they had surrendered. The panzergrenadiers cleared out bunker after bunker so there would be a foothold on the west bank sufficiently large for

Although the invasion of Poland saw the first use of motorised infantry, the 1940 French campaign showed

Panzergrenadiers were used war in the West, before examining the German blitzkrieg tactics throughout World War II, from the events on the Eastern Front in the next invasion of Poland in September 1939, chapter. With this in mind, this chapter to full effect. Conversely, by to the battle for Berlin in April 1945. As a will deal briefly with the invasion of 1944, the panzergrenadiers fighting elite accompanying the panzers Poland before examining two case into action, or as infantry fighting studies in which panzergrenadiers proved themselves highly stubborn rearguard actions, they were were heavily involved: firstly, the elite skilled at delaying the Allied typically engaged in the thickest fighting Grossdeutschland Regiment’s offensive advance through France and of the war. They fought in both offensive action in Operation Niwi and across the and defensive mode; as the war went river Meuse at the battle of Sedan in May the Low Countries. against Germany from 1942–43 it was 1940 during the Fall of France; secondly, increasingly in the latter role that they the defensive action of the 12th SS Hitler were deployed. Throughout the war, Jugend (Hitler Youth) Panzer Division some of the best units of the German armed forces fought in Normandy in 1944. Chapter Four will then cover the as panzergrenadiers. These included the Grossdeutschland panzergrenadiers’ war on the Eastern Front by examining Division, 1st SS Leibstandarte Adolf Hitler Division, 2nd three pertinent case studies: firstly, the German advance on SS Das Reich Division, 12th SS Hitler Jugend Division, the Moscow following Operation Barbarossa when it looked as Brandenburg Division and the Luftwaffe’s elite Hermann though Germany would capture Moscow and conquer the Göring Division. Although many of these panzergrenadier USSR; secondly, panzergrenadiers in action during the battle divisions were later reorganised as panzer divisions, even of Kursk in 1943, the biggest tank battle of the war, with with such reorganisation, all panzer divisions, including elite over 6000 tanks and self-propelled guns involved, where the formations such as the Wehrmacht’s Panzer Lehr Division, Soviets halted the German advance; finally, panzergrenadiers always had attached panzergrenadier regiments that would in a defensive role on the borders of Germany in 1944 as the go into battle with the armour.

Red Army steamrollered west into Poland and Germany.

To make sense of the widely spread theatres of war These case studies provide accounts of panzergrenadiers in which panzergrenadiers fought, the two chapters on in a variety of different theatres of war, and show how the the panzergrenadiers’ war record will focus firstly on the panzergrenadier performed in attack as well as defence. As will be seen, whether fighting in the woods of the Ardennes, the bocage of Normandy, or the steppes of the Soviet Union, Left: SS panzergrenadiers from Kampfgruppe Hansen smoking German panzergrenadiers invariably proved the maxim of captured American Camel cigarettes, somewhere in the Ardennes the German army commander of the 1920s, Hans von Seekt: during the Battle of the Bulge, 1944. Behind them is a knocked-out ‘Mehr seins als Schein’ (‘Be more than you appear to be’).

American M8 armoured car.

LOCATION OF KRIPO REGIONAL OFFICES

1. Served as an auxiliary force to the Feuerschutzpolizei 2. under Wehrmacht authority from 1935 3. Assisted the Gendarmerie 4. Assisted the Schutzpolizei 5. Responsible for cities and large towns

Another major organizational change in policing during the 1930s came with the formation of the Reichssicherheitshauptamt (Reich Main Security Office; RSHA), which was established in September 1939 as the supreme security office in the Third Reich. (The previous security office had been known as the Sicherheitshauptamt.) Headed

by Reinhard Heydrich until his assassination in 1942, the RSHA became the umbrella organization for suppressing ‘enemies of the state’.

3

Fighting Techniques of a Panzergrenadier 1941–45

n

Danzig

n

Königsberg

EAST PRuSSIA n n

Bremen n

n

Stettin

Berlin

n

Posen

n

Breslau

Hanover

POLAND n

n

Cologne

Dresden

GERMANY

n n

n n n

Nuremberg

CZEC

Stuttgart

Strasbourg n

Vienna

Munich n

Kattowice

Prague

HOSL

OVAK

IA

n

Salzburg

AuSTRIA

goes unnoticed. The enemy fire begins to slacken noticeably, but nevertheless the crossing of the first storm boats, the engineers, remains a hard task, a task from which many don’t come back. In impotent rage, the tank crews watch boats torn to pieces by direct hits.’

While the tanks remained static, the men of the Grossdeutschland (and 1st Motorised Rifle Regiment) attempted to consolidate the bridgehead. The panzergrenadiers operated within the German military tradition of auftragstaktik (mission-oriented tactics), which

37

combat engineers to build ferries and a bridge onto which the panzers could pass. All along the Meuse, the experience of the men of the Grossdeutschland was repeated as other Wehrmacht motorised infantry units paddled across the river in the face of fierce French fire. Casualties in such an assault were high and for men wounded on the west bank the delay in ferrying them back to regimental aid posts on the east bank often proved fatal. Another problem was the lack of water, and the Germans relied on captured bottles of water to keep them going.

Combat Engineers at the Crossing of the Meuse The Grossdeutschland was just one motorised infantry regiment crossing the Meuse. The experience of the other motorised infantry crossing the river was very similar to that of the Grossdeutschland. But it was an all-arms

Above: SS panzergrenadiers crossing a river. River crossings were extremely hazardous and costly operations, and required large amounts of courage, as those crossing the river were extremely exposed to any defensive enemy fire.

allowed junior officers and NCOs to react to the situation on the ground, and ignore orders if they thought their actions would help achieve the unit’s mission.

The Ju-87 Stuka dive-bomber was invaluable in providing mobile fire support for the attacking infantry at the Meuse.

A common blitzkrieg tactic: whilst the German tanks

Should the bridge be blown, tanks would again provide

fixed the bridge’s defenders with their support fire, the

supporting fire with the panzergrenadiers, while the pioneers

panzergrenadiers would outflank the position, and race

attempted to cross the river in rubber boats. Once across,

through the defences to capture the bridge intact.

they would seize a bridgehead, and build an assault bridge.

153

3

Fighting Techniques of a Japanese Infantryman 1941–45

How to Look After Your Horse PETER BROOKESMITH

How to Look After Your Horse covers all the practical details of horse ownership, as well as delving into the psyche of this most majestic of creatures. The book includes a guide to breeds, basic handling care and riding techniques, tips for feeding and grazing, and guidelines for understanding your horse’s character and history. There is invaluable advice on choosing a horse, stabling it in the most equine-friendly manner, feeding and grooming and riding your horse in a way that will give you and your mount the maximum satisfaction.

Leo J. Daugherty III

During World War II, the Japanese armed forces first captured then defended large swathes of the Pacific island groups and the Asian mainland. Fighting Techniques of a Japanese Infantryman is an in-depth analysis of the infantryman’s tactics, equipment and training, and how that translated into success (or failure) on the battlefield, where after 1943 the Japanese fought a skilful and brave defence against overwhelming odds.

72

Offensive and defensive TacTics, 1931–1945

Offensive and defensive TacTics, 1931–1945

defence would entail different requirements in order to repel or defeat an enemy landing operation.

Above: In order to counter a US Marine landing, the Japanese devised an elaborate system of beach defences. This ‘defender’s eye’ view shows the barbed wire defences, and beyond them the mined anti-landing craft defences intended to disrupt a landing.

Atoll Defences

Atolls were low-lying islets enclosed with a lagoon which ran anywhere from 3.2km to 105km (2–65 miles) in diameter. These islets extended from a few metres to a few kilometres in length to several kilometres in width. Total land area of a typical atoll in the Central Pacific area ranged from a few hundred square metres to 10km (6 miles) in length. They were rarely more than 7.6m (25ft) above sea

level, were covered by dense scrub brush and coconut or palm trees, and were bordered by salt marshes. The water table was normally only a few feet below the ground, thus negating the use of extensive trench or dug-in positions.

Here, the Japanese normally built pillboxes and fortified bunkers. Despite the limitations placed upon the digging

of extensive trench lines, Japanese soldiers constructed anti-tank ditches and slit trenches that permitted riflemen to position themselves in the defence.

Japanese defence structures followed no set pattern, but were made, in general, to conform to the surrounding terrain in order to meet the immediate tactical requirements. With only a few exceptions, most defensive structures were flat and extended no more than 1–1.5m (3–5ft) above ground level, or were irregularly shaped and built around a base of trees. Japanese manuals on field fortifications stated: ‘it was most important not to adhere blindly to set forms in construction work, but to adapt such work to fit the tactical situation’.

When the Japanese Army was forced to take up defensive positions, it adhered to the basic rule that construction of defensive positions involved a continual process of development. Starting out as a foxhole, fighting hole or slit trench, these were eventually linked to form a coordinated defence system. The third stage involved construction of strongpoints, bunker and pillbox types of earthworks, and log positions.

Japanese Defensive Positions

Japanese positions included bunkers, pillboxes, dugouts, shelters, blockhouses, rifle and machine-gun emplacements, foxholes, trenches and anti-aircraft emplacements, and revetments.

73

74

Fighting Techniques of a Japanese Infantryman 1941–45 285 x 213mm (11¼ x 8¼in) 96 pages 35,000 words 50 artworks, 40 photos ISBN: 978-1-78274-600-3 £14.99 Paperback

Offensive and defensive TacTics, 1931–1945

Offensive and defensive TacTics, 1931–1945

Key Machine gun Pillbox Medium aa gun coast defence gun Heavy aa gun anti-tank ditch Barbed wire concrete pyramides (Tetrahedrons) Log boat barricade Trenches Buildings Mine field

Warehouses

dispersal area

Hangers 0

305m (1000ft)

610m (2000ft)

Barracks

Above: Dead Japanese soldiers line a trench on Namur island, part of Kwajalein Atoll in the Marshall Islands. Few prisoners were

Lagoon Lagoon

taken here, as those who were not killed in battle took their own lives by committing hara-kiri.

Reef

Bunkers were normally found in those areas where high water-levels precluded the digging of deep trenches and in more or less open terrain, such as coconut tree groves or sugarcane fields, and on the edges of airfields. The finished interiors of bunkers varied from sizes of 1.2–1.8m (4–6ft) in height, 1.8–3m (6–10ft) in width, and 3.7–9.1m (12–30 feet) in length. Larger bunkers had two bays or compartments that were separated by a large, solid block of earth. Each bunker had one or more narrow firing slits for machine guns. As the Marines discovered on landing, the neutralisation of these bunkers proved difficult, as rifle fire often could not penetrate the narrow firing ports.

The Japanese covered these slits up with some form of camouflage when not in use.

As US and Australian soldiers likewise discovered on Buna in New Guinea, the bunkers and pillboxes (the latter referred to as small bunkers) were built around the same general lines. With a shallow trench as a foundation, log columns and beams were erected, log revetment walls constructed, and a ceiling made of several layers of logs, laid laterally to the trench. With the completion of this basic superstructure, the revetment walls were reinforced by such materials as sheets of iron, oil drums, ammunition Left: ‘The Price of Victory’. A member of the US Marine 4th Division lies dead on the sands of Iwo Jima after being shot in the head by intense Japanese sniper fire. Snipers were a constant and unwelcome threat to Allied landing forces.

boxes filled with sand, and additional piles of logs. The outside of the bunker was covered with dirt, rocks, coconuts and short pieces of logs. Camouflage of these bunkers consisted of a painted exterior with fast-growing vines and other types of vegetation.

The defence of a beach on an atoll was centred on the machine gun and a final protective line. The defence consisted of a shallow line of strongpoints with a secondary line of lesser density defences located slightly to the rear of the main defences. Because of the small size of atolls, the depth of the defence was limited. Strongpoints consisted of a group of bunkers and pillboxes, connected by communication trenches and in mutual support of each other. Each rifleman who was assigned to protect the pillbox or bunker had several alternative positions to carry out his mission. As the situation warranted, the Japanese infantryman ran from position to position. This often led to much confusion among Marine and US Army commanders and troops as to the actual strength of the defenders. In such positions, Japanese infantrymen made extensive use of hand-grenades particularly in the defence of small islands such as Tarawa and Makin in the Gilberts, and Kwajalein, Eniwetok and Roi-Namur in the Marshalls.

surface craft and landing vehicles.

As for the types and calibres of gun used, the Japanese normally employed 76mm (3in) to 203mm (8in) guns.

The 203mm guns were usually in turrets, while the 127mm (5in) and 152mm (6in) guns were separate field pieces protected by shields. All of these guns were placed in heavy revetments, with ammunition for the weapons being stored in covered emplacements near the guns.

Machine guns were situated so as to fire outwards around the perimeter. Most of these weapons were positioned for crossfire and covered the beaches with enfilading fire. A few were situated to fire to the rear of their positions in case the enemy had managed to achieve a breakthrough elsewhere and were encircling the guns. Some machine guns were situated in open emplacements, while others machine guns were set up in pillboxes.

Those located in the open pillboxes were generally dual purpose and had wide fields of fire, while those situated in enclosed pillboxes had a much narrower field of fire.

These latter machine-gun positions were situated to fire in only one direction. All emplacements were protected by riflemen positioned in foxholes and trenches around the fortifications. Some positions were defended by howitzers and trench mortars, although on Tarawa, because the Rikusentai had few of these weapons, they instead employed

How to Look After Your Horse 240 x 189mm (9½ x 7½”) Extent: 192pp Illustrations: 120 black & white artworks Text: 60,000 words ISBN: 978-1-78274-591-4 £19.99 Paperback

75

howitzers in the defence of such positions.

Field Fortifications

Japanese defence of the small islands or atolls was characterised by an extensive use of field fortifications, which in turn prompted a change in US Marine tactics and organisation in dealing with them. After Tarawa, US Marine units organised special assault teams of ‘bunkerbusters’ that employed the method called ‘Find’em, fix’em and blast’em’, which had the task of dealing specifically with Japanese bunkers. The machine guns were the centre of these bunker and pillbox defences.

These fortifications ranged from simple fortifications of palm logs and sand manned by two to three men, to the more extensive versions made of concrete and steel, and manned by a squad of soldiers. As the Japanese Army was forced increasingly onto the defensive, American forces encountered more of the latter heavily reinforced defences.

Built with concrete and steel, they were relatively safe from most smaller calibre shells and could only be destroyed Below: A Japanese pillbox reinforced with coconut logs and covered with sand on Tarawa in November 1943. Coconut logs were a common material featured in many Japanese bunkers in the Pacific.

Above: A typical Japanese-controlled atoll in the Pacific, showing the extensive and varied defensive preparations against any Allied landing. At the centre of the atoll is the all-important airfield which would make this an important target for the Allies.

Disrupting an Attack

Japanese defence of these small islands was based on the idea of breaking up an attack before it reached the shore, and all coast guns up to 203mm (8in) calibre were sited so that they could be employed against small boats, landing craft and any amphibian vehicles carrying assault troops.

Coastal and land batteries had local fire-director control, with two or three guns positioned with observation towards various gun positions to give mutual support. Flat trajectory weapons were used extensively by the Japanese, in contrast to indirect howitzer-type weapons which were rarely, if at all, used. The guns were placed well forwards on the beach where direct fire was then targeted against the approaching landing craft. Their grouping was shallow and all weapons were sited with the distinct mission of defeating the seaborne assault at the water’s edge. In this capacity, the Japanese also used anti-aircraft guns to repel

sports and pastimes

the nature of the horse

sports and pastimes

rod while remaining mounted, race to the bin and drop the carton into it, and charge back over the start line to pass the rod to the next rider. This is not as easy as it may seem. Some ponies really don’t like the sight or sound of the carton on the stick, flying hooves kick the bin and contents all over the place, and of course the cartons on the ground can be blown or scattered about.

Cartons can get trampled – so the rider has to dismount to put them back into shape, but she must be mounted again before she picks one up. Needless to say, the rider is not permitted to clutch the litter to the stick: she must use one hand on the rod only. Pray it’s not a windy day.

For this kind of thing you need a pony that can canter from a standing start and turn on the proverbial sixpence (or dime). Given the uproar from spectators and the possibility of mayhem occurring in most mounted games, this is not work for a highly strung animal. It’s important to have a pony that is unflappable and will concentrate on the job in hand. It is by no means impossible to

inculcate this kind of attitude, but that does take time, patience and skill. And if you’re going in for gymkhana, do remember, these are games. It helps to be a good loser, and to be tolerant of others’ mistakes too. Your good humour will also keep your horse in good heart.

Showjumping: the water jump water, which it sees only at the last moment.

It’s at such moments that the absolute trust that must be built up between steed and rider comes into its own.

Horses are generally wary of water, and one of the most challenging obstacles in showjumping is over water that’s usually hidden behind a hedge-like jump. The horse has to clear the

SHOWJUMPING

Hugely popular as a spectator sport, toplevel showjumping offers big prize money and is very demanding on horse and rider – but many people jump their horses just for fun, and not always competitively.

Rules for showjumping are very simple.

Depending on the level of competition, the course usually consists of eight to 20 obstacles of various heights, up to about 2.2m (7ft). Jumps may be simple vertical fences and gates (these are actually among the most difficult for the horse); ‘walls’ that look solid, but with the top row of blocks loose so that they will fall off easily if the horse knocks them with his hooves; ‘spreads’ with, for example, two or more parallel bars set one

the centre is a dump bin: riders carry a rod, use it to pick up a carton from the far end, and dash back to dump it in the bin.

behind the other, creating an extended jump with depth as well as height; the ‘triple bar’ (three bars set at graduated heights); a water jump; and a combination of two or three different jumps a short distance apart. All these have to be jumped in a set sequence, which can be quite labyrinthine. No two courses are the same: designers work with the abilities of the competing horses in mind, and vary colours and textures, types

20

But speak a language the horse understands and you shouldn’t have a problem. Slump your shoulders as you slowly but steadily approach. Lower your head. Keep your hands by your sides or behind your back.

Avoid eye contact and turn your head and shoulders slightly away from the horse. Talk soothingly, meanwhile. The rest of you, though, is speaking the body language of a submissive, cautious horse asking for acceptance. You should be allowed to come close enough to exchange greetings (hold out a free When you approach a horse that’s out on grass, go indirectly, hand for the horse to sniff, keep any headcollar out of sight, adopt a submissive posture, chat and give him some and avoid eye contact with the animal. He will read these signs strokes in return) and then as a message that you mean no harm, and want to cooperate . put the head collar on. Once you’ve done this, always show your appreciation, physically and verbally.

If this doesn’t work, and the horse scoots away (probably not more than a few metres), retreat quietly until you’re at least 6m (20ft) away, still retaining your submissive posture.

Wait for a few minutes, then advance again. Continue this advance and retreat, if need be, until the horse decides you aren’t, after all, a threat or a nuisance and lets you right up to him.

For really determinedly uncatchable horses, equestrian journalist Lesley Bayley suggests ‘walking down’. You will need to set aside plenty of time for this.

Just follow the horse around in his field, maintaining your non-aggressive stance, but staying close enough to keep him on the move. He

Putting on a head collar 1

2

Softly, softly

Mounted games: the litter race Reckoned the most challenging of mounted games, this is run as a relay race for teams (as shown here, with one rider ready at the start line) or as a straight race for individuals. At

the nature of the horse

come along with you. And all horses have a profoundly personal space extending roughly 1.5m (5ft) around them, plus a less intense one that starts about 6m (20ft) away. A horse that is feeling awkward will definitely take umbrage if you storm into this space, intent on making your presence felt, without giving a thought to the offence it might cause him.

of jump, complexity of the approaches and the level of difficulty accordingly.

The idea is to create a course that only half a dozen or so horses will complete without faults within the given time limit.

These are scored as follows: when any part of a fence is knocked down the pair receives four faults. If a horse steps on the edge of, or in, the water jump, the penalty is four faults.

A refusal at a fence receives three faults, and

21

3

4

2. Pass your right hand under your horses’ chin and put it palm down on the bridge of his nose, not so quickly that you make him start, but firmly enough so that you have his head under gentle control. Slide the head collar up over his nose so that the noseband is in place. Hold it there with the your left hand.

3. As you slide the head collar on, use your right hand to catch and bring the headband round behind his ears. Make all these movements smoothly so you don’t startle the horse, and talk to him all the time.

4. Do up the buckle (not too tight), take the lead rope in both hands, give a scratch or pat as thanks for the cooperation.

Approach the horse quietly and submissively if necessary, so that he can see you coming.

Talk as you walk. Exchange greetings. Make sure the lead rope is clipped to the head collar. Hold the loose end of the lead rope in the palm of your left hand. Hold the head collar by the noseband in the fingers of the same hand. Then: 1. Stand at the horse’s left shoulder, facing in the same direction as he is. Some people put the lead rope over the horse’s neck at this point, but it can distract the horse, or slip out of reach, down the side away from you. So this is by no means a golden rule. Just do what works best for you and the particular horse, but don’t let the rope dangle on the ground.

70

71

The Orient Express Anthony Burton

Having been launched in 1883, in its prime the Orient Express provided a stylish service that crossed borders, overcoming national interests and rivalries. The Orient Express traces the history of the service, from its glamorous beginnings, its popularity with European royalty and heads of state, on to its demise in the age of postwar austerity, the Cold War and cheaper air travel. Illustrated with outstanding, rarely seen photographs, this is a classic portrait of luxury train travel.

The early years

The early years

T

urmoil

and

C

MARCH 2018 Publication

Pawfect Friends

The Orient Express 297 x 227mm (11¾ x 9”) 112pp 35,000 words 90 b/w photos, 10 line artworks ISBN: 978-1-78274-602-7 £14.99 Paperback

hange

Turmoil

and

jack russell

Playing, protecting, keeping a sleepy eye out for each other – even putting up with each other’s eccentricities – the photographs in Pawfect Friends celebrate 90 of the cutest cat and dog pairs that you will ever see.

Pawfect Friends 153 x 153mm (6 x 6”) 96 pages 90 colour photographs ISBN: 978-1-78274-586-0 £6.99 Hardback

Change

Ottoman state and its hierarchies, and in its place a modern, independent, western-style state would be built. That man was Kemal Ataturk. The Great War was over: civil war in Turkey was about to begin. Germany was defeated, and was, for a time at least, to be a pariah rather than a partner in the new Europe that was being built on the ruins of the old. All these factors played an important, and in some cases a decisive, part in discussions on international rail travel.

Train de Luxe Militaire One thing was very clear: there was no way, at the end of 1918, that the Orient Express could simply be reinstated. The first move towards restoring railway normality came from the military, anxious to ensure that the victors would be unimpeded on their journeys across the continent. In February 1919, the French minister of war organised the Train de Luxe Militaire, strictly reserved for high-ranking officers and VIPs. It ran from Paris via Vienna, Warsaw and Prague to Bucharest. But there was an equally urgent need to restore something like

above A poster of 1905, showing a variety of compartment interiors and concentrating very much on the luxury on offer, from the dining car with its panoramic views to the richly carpeted salon. Private toilet facilities may not have been as romantic, but were still sufficiently novel to earn their place in the overall picture.

Another day of coach travel lay ahead, through spectacular mountain gorges, which offered some compensation for the filthy resting places along the way. The last stage, from Sofia onwards, was the most demanding of all, with rough tracks and extreme gradients that almost brought the horses to their knees.

At last, after a three-day journey, the weary travellers reached the railhead at Tatar-Bazardjik (Pazardzhik). As a place, it had as little to commend it as the squalid villages passed en route, but at least here the cramped diligence was left behind for the comforts of a railway carriage. The accommodation, though not on a par with that offered by the luxury wagons-lits, must have seemed heaven after what had gone before. And the company made the proud boast that they would now be whirling along at the dizzy speed of 26 mph (42 kph). The Sea of Marmara finally came into view, and, at six in the evening, after twelve hours on the rails, the train finally pulled into Sirkedji (now Sikerci) Station in Constantinople, splendidly sited between the quays of the Golden Horn and the great dome of Saint Sofia.

There was no getting away from the fact that, regardless of the official purple prose, this was a long and wearisome journey. It is not surprising to find that few passengers booked for the through trip: it is simply astonishing that any booked at all. Everyone was aware of the shortcomings, not least the railway engineers building the new lines. Nevertheless, they did their work well, blasting and hacking their way through the mountains with remarkable speed. Early in 1889, the work was complete. On 1 June of that year, a train, composed entirely of Wagons-Lits

Left A major improvement to the service in the 1880s came with the opening up of a rail link through Bulgaria, and to celebrate the event the Orient Express staff posed for this photograph at an unnamed Bulgarian station. The gentleman in the handsome, double-breasted uniform is the chef de train.

26

4

27

right The Simplon-Orient Express at Milan in the 1930s en route from Paris to Istanbul. The photograph gives some idea of the thousands of tons of steel used in the station’s construction.

Below The Wagons-Lits travel agency at Timisoara in Romania in 1925. As well as advertising the usual luxury trains, it also promotes the trains bleus.

normality to ordinary European relations, to provide lines of communication between capitals, to restore economic dialogue and, just as importantly, to ensure freedom of movement, which would send out a clear signal that the continent was, indeed, at peace again. It was time to restore the trains de luxe to the tracks.

A conference was held in Paris in March, 1919, organised by the French, but with the active encouragement of other governments, including the Swiss, Dutch, Italian and Yugoslav.

The aim was to establish the long-term future of international trains and their routes. At the heart of the proposals was the newly named Simplon-Orient Express. In general terms, the aim was to provide a link that would stretch from London, through Calais or Boulogne, to the Orient. There was no question of sending trains through Germany. As before the war, trains were to make their way south through France and Switzerland, via the Simplon tunnel and from Milan

68

Below A simple but effective luggage label, printed in red and green. With an increasing number of routes being run by Wagons-Lits, each named express was given its own distinctive

to Venice and Trieste. But this would no longer be the end of the line: the route would continue through the brand new kingdom of Yugoslavia to Laibach (now Ljubljana), Zagreb and on to Vincovce (now Vinkovci). Here, the train would divide, one part going to Bucharest and Constanta, the other to Athens via Thessalonika. And there was to be a new daily link, the BordeauxMilan Express, which would be mainly made up of Wagons-Lits cars, but with the addition of an ordinary first-class carriage.

Milan had suddenly acquired considerable importance in the European rail system, and plans were at once put in hand for a new station. The foundation stone was duly laid, but a decade was to pass before Milan Central, the biggest station in the world, covering 103 acres (42 hectares), was completed. It was a most remarkable building, of two seemingly unrelated parts. The main entrance, concourse and booking hall are grandiloquence taken to extremes, a riot of stained glass windows and marbled walls. It was aptly summed up by Jeffrey Richards

69

5

Fighting Techniques of a Japanese Infantryman 1941–45

How to Look After Your Horse PETER BROOKESMITH

How to Look After Your Horse covers all the practical details of horse ownership, as well as delving into the psyche of this most majestic of creatures. The book includes a guide to breeds, basic handling care and riding techniques, tips for feeding and grazing, and guidelines for understanding your horse’s character and history. There is invaluable advice on choosing a horse, stabling it in the most equine-friendly manner, feeding and grooming and riding your horse in a way that will give you and your mount the maximum satisfaction.

Leo J. Daugherty III

During World War II, the Japanese armed forces first captured then defended large swathes of the Pacific island groups and the Asian mainland. Fighting Techniques of a Japanese Infantryman is an in-depth analysis of the infantryman’s tactics, equipment and training, and how that translated into success (or failure) on the battlefield, where after 1943 the Japanese fought a skilful and brave defence against overwhelming odds.

72

Offensive and defensive TacTics, 1931–1945

Offensive and defensive TacTics, 1931–1945

defence would entail different requirements in order to repel or defeat an enemy landing operation.

Above: In order to counter a US Marine landing, the Japanese devised an elaborate system of beach defences. This ‘defender’s eye’ view shows the barbed wire defences, and beyond them the mined anti-landing craft defences intended to disrupt a landing.

Atoll Defences

Atolls were low-lying islets enclosed with a lagoon which ran anywhere from 3.2km to 105km (2–65 miles) in diameter. These islets extended from a few metres to a few kilometres in length to several kilometres in width. Total land area of a typical atoll in the Central Pacific area ranged from a few hundred square metres to 10km (6 miles) in length. They were rarely more than 7.6m (25ft) above sea

level, were covered by dense scrub brush and coconut or palm trees, and were bordered by salt marshes. The water table was normally only a few feet below the ground, thus negating the use of extensive trench or dug-in positions.

Here, the Japanese normally built pillboxes and fortified bunkers. Despite the limitations placed upon the digging

of extensive trench lines, Japanese soldiers constructed anti-tank ditches and slit trenches that permitted riflemen to position themselves in the defence.

Japanese defence structures followed no set pattern, but were made, in general, to conform to the surrounding terrain in order to meet the immediate tactical requirements. With only a few exceptions, most defensive structures were flat and extended no more than 1–1.5m (3–5ft) above ground level, or were irregularly shaped and built around a base of trees. Japanese manuals on field fortifications stated: ‘it was most important not to adhere blindly to set forms in construction work, but to adapt such work to fit the tactical situation’.

When the Japanese Army was forced to take up defensive positions, it adhered to the basic rule that construction of defensive positions involved a continual process of development. Starting out as a foxhole, fighting hole or slit trench, these were eventually linked to form a coordinated defence system. The third stage involved construction of strongpoints, bunker and pillbox types of earthworks, and log positions.

Japanese Defensive Positions

Japanese positions included bunkers, pillboxes, dugouts, shelters, blockhouses, rifle and machine-gun emplacements, foxholes, trenches and anti-aircraft emplacements, and revetments.

73

74

Fighting Techniques of a Japanese Infantryman 1941–45 285 x 213mm (11¼ x 8¼in) 96 pages 35,000 words 50 artworks, 40 photos ISBN: 978-1-78274-600-3 £14.99 Paperback

Offensive and defensive TacTics, 1931–1945

Offensive and defensive TacTics, 1931–1945

Key Machine gun Pillbox Medium aa gun coast defence gun Heavy aa gun anti-tank ditch Barbed wire concrete pyramides (Tetrahedrons) Log boat barricade Trenches Buildings Mine field

Warehouses

dispersal area

Hangers 0

305m (1000ft)

610m (2000ft)

Barracks

Above: Dead Japanese soldiers line a trench on Namur island, part of Kwajalein Atoll in the Marshall Islands. Few prisoners were

Lagoon Lagoon

taken here, as those who were not killed in battle took their own lives by committing hara-kiri.

Reef

Bunkers were normally found in those areas where high water-levels precluded the digging of deep trenches and in more or less open terrain, such as coconut tree groves or sugarcane fields, and on the edges of airfields. The finished interiors of bunkers varied from sizes of 1.2–1.8m (4–6ft) in height, 1.8–3m (6–10ft) in width, and 3.7–9.1m (12–30 feet) in length. Larger bunkers had two bays or compartments that were separated by a large, solid block of earth. Each bunker had one or more narrow firing slits for machine guns. As the Marines discovered on landing, the neutralisation of these bunkers proved difficult, as rifle fire often could not penetrate the narrow firing ports.

The Japanese covered these slits up with some form of camouflage when not in use.

As US and Australian soldiers likewise discovered on Buna in New Guinea, the bunkers and pillboxes (the latter referred to as small bunkers) were built around the same general lines. With a shallow trench as a foundation, log columns and beams were erected, log revetment walls constructed, and a ceiling made of several layers of logs, laid laterally to the trench. With the completion of this basic superstructure, the revetment walls were reinforced by such materials as sheets of iron, oil drums, ammunition Left: ‘The Price of Victory’. A member of the US Marine 4th Division lies dead on the sands of Iwo Jima after being shot in the head by intense Japanese sniper fire. Snipers were a constant and unwelcome threat to Allied landing forces.

boxes filled with sand, and additional piles of logs. The outside of the bunker was covered with dirt, rocks, coconuts and short pieces of logs. Camouflage of these bunkers consisted of a painted exterior with fast-growing vines and other types of vegetation.

The defence of a beach on an atoll was centred on the machine gun and a final protective line. The defence consisted of a shallow line of strongpoints with a secondary line of lesser density defences located slightly to the rear of the main defences. Because of the small size of atolls, the depth of the defence was limited. Strongpoints consisted of a group of bunkers and pillboxes, connected by communication trenches and in mutual support of each other. Each rifleman who was assigned to protect the pillbox or bunker had several alternative positions to carry out his mission. As the situation warranted, the Japanese infantryman ran from position to position. This often led to much confusion among Marine and US Army commanders and troops as to the actual strength of the defenders. In such positions, Japanese infantrymen made extensive use of hand-grenades particularly in the defence of small islands such as Tarawa and Makin in the Gilberts, and Kwajalein, Eniwetok and Roi-Namur in the Marshalls.

surface craft and landing vehicles.

As for the types and calibres of gun used, the Japanese normally employed 76mm (3in) to 203mm (8in) guns.

The 203mm guns were usually in turrets, while the 127mm (5in) and 152mm (6in) guns were separate field pieces protected by shields. All of these guns were placed in heavy revetments, with ammunition for the weapons being stored in covered emplacements near the guns.

Machine guns were situated so as to fire outwards around the perimeter. Most of these weapons were positioned for crossfire and covered the beaches with enfilading fire. A few were situated to fire to the rear of their positions in case the enemy had managed to achieve a breakthrough elsewhere and were encircling the guns. Some machine guns were situated in open emplacements, while others machine guns were set up in pillboxes.

Those located in the open pillboxes were generally dual purpose and had wide fields of fire, while those situated in enclosed pillboxes had a much narrower field of fire.

These latter machine-gun positions were situated to fire in only one direction. All emplacements were protected by riflemen positioned in foxholes and trenches around the fortifications. Some positions were defended by howitzers and trench mortars, although on Tarawa, because the Rikusentai had few of these weapons, they instead employed

How to Look After Your Horse 240 x 189mm (9½ x 7½”) Extent: 192pp Illustrations: 120 black & white artworks Text: 60,000 words ISBN: 978-1-78274-591-4 £19.99 Paperback

75

howitzers in the defence of such positions.

Field Fortifications

Japanese defence of the small islands or atolls was characterised by an extensive use of field fortifications, which in turn prompted a change in US Marine tactics and organisation in dealing with them. After Tarawa, US Marine units organised special assault teams of ‘bunkerbusters’ that employed the method called ‘Find’em, fix’em and blast’em’, which had the task of dealing specifically with Japanese bunkers. The machine guns were the centre of these bunker and pillbox defences.

These fortifications ranged from simple fortifications of palm logs and sand manned by two to three men, to the more extensive versions made of concrete and steel, and manned by a squad of soldiers. As the Japanese Army was forced increasingly onto the defensive, American forces encountered more of the latter heavily reinforced defences.

Built with concrete and steel, they were relatively safe from most smaller calibre shells and could only be destroyed Below: A Japanese pillbox reinforced with coconut logs and covered with sand on Tarawa in November 1943. Coconut logs were a common material featured in many Japanese bunkers in the Pacific.

Above: A typical Japanese-controlled atoll in the Pacific, showing the extensive and varied defensive preparations against any Allied landing. At the centre of the atoll is the all-important airfield which would make this an important target for the Allies.

Disrupting an Attack

Japanese defence of these small islands was based on the idea of breaking up an attack before it reached the shore, and all coast guns up to 203mm (8in) calibre were sited so that they could be employed against small boats, landing craft and any amphibian vehicles carrying assault troops.

Coastal and land batteries had local fire-director control, with two or three guns positioned with observation towards various gun positions to give mutual support. Flat trajectory weapons were used extensively by the Japanese, in contrast to indirect howitzer-type weapons which were rarely, if at all, used. The guns were placed well forwards on the beach where direct fire was then targeted against the approaching landing craft. Their grouping was shallow and all weapons were sited with the distinct mission of defeating the seaborne assault at the water’s edge. In this capacity, the Japanese also used anti-aircraft guns to repel

sports and pastimes

the nature of the horse

sports and pastimes

rod while remaining mounted, race to the bin and drop the carton into it, and charge back over the start line to pass the rod to the next rider. This is not as easy as it may seem. Some ponies really don’t like the sight or sound of the carton on the stick, flying hooves kick the bin and contents all over the place, and of course the cartons on the ground can be blown or scattered about.

Cartons can get trampled – so the rider has to dismount to put them back into shape, but she must be mounted again before she picks one up. Needless to say, the rider is not permitted to clutch the litter to the stick: she must use one hand on the rod only. Pray it’s not a windy day.

For this kind of thing you need a pony that can canter from a standing start and turn on the proverbial sixpence (or dime). Given the uproar from spectators and the possibility of mayhem occurring in most mounted games, this is not work for a highly strung animal. It’s important to have a pony that is unflappable and will concentrate on the job in hand. It is by no means impossible to

inculcate this kind of attitude, but that does take time, patience and skill. And if you’re going in for gymkhana, do remember, these are games. It helps to be a good loser, and to be tolerant of others’ mistakes too. Your good humour will also keep your horse in good heart.

Showjumping: the water jump water, which it sees only at the last moment.

It’s at such moments that the absolute trust that must be built up between steed and rider comes into its own.

Horses are generally wary of water, and one of the most challenging obstacles in showjumping is over water that’s usually hidden behind a hedge-like jump. The horse has to clear the

SHOWJUMPING

Hugely popular as a spectator sport, toplevel showjumping offers big prize money and is very demanding on horse and rider – but many people jump their horses just for fun, and not always competitively.

Rules for showjumping are very simple.

Depending on the level of competition, the course usually consists of eight to 20 obstacles of various heights, up to about 2.2m (7ft). Jumps may be simple vertical fences and gates (these are actually among the most difficult for the horse); ‘walls’ that look solid, but with the top row of blocks loose so that they will fall off easily if the horse knocks them with his hooves; ‘spreads’ with, for example, two or more parallel bars set one

the centre is a dump bin: riders carry a rod, use it to pick up a carton from the far end, and dash back to dump it in the bin.

behind the other, creating an extended jump with depth as well as height; the ‘triple bar’ (three bars set at graduated heights); a water jump; and a combination of two or three different jumps a short distance apart. All these have to be jumped in a set sequence, which can be quite labyrinthine. No two courses are the same: designers work with the abilities of the competing horses in mind, and vary colours and textures, types

20

But speak a language the horse understands and you shouldn’t have a problem. Slump your shoulders as you slowly but steadily approach. Lower your head. Keep your hands by your sides or behind your back.

Avoid eye contact and turn your head and shoulders slightly away from the horse. Talk soothingly, meanwhile. The rest of you, though, is speaking the body language of a submissive, cautious horse asking for acceptance. You should be allowed to come close enough to exchange greetings (hold out a free When you approach a horse that’s out on grass, go indirectly, hand for the horse to sniff, keep any headcollar out of sight, adopt a submissive posture, chat and give him some and avoid eye contact with the animal. He will read these signs strokes in return) and then as a message that you mean no harm, and want to cooperate . put the head collar on. Once you’ve done this, always show your appreciation, physically and verbally.

If this doesn’t work, and the horse scoots away (probably not more than a few metres), retreat quietly until you’re at least 6m (20ft) away, still retaining your submissive posture.

Wait for a few minutes, then advance again. Continue this advance and retreat, if need be, until the horse decides you aren’t, after all, a threat or a nuisance and lets you right up to him.

For really determinedly uncatchable horses, equestrian journalist Lesley Bayley suggests ‘walking down’. You will need to set aside plenty of time for this.

Just follow the horse around in his field, maintaining your non-aggressive stance, but staying close enough to keep him on the move. He

Putting on a head collar 1

2

Softly, softly

Mounted games: the litter race Reckoned the most challenging of mounted games, this is run as a relay race for teams (as shown here, with one rider ready at the start line) or as a straight race for individuals. At

the nature of the horse

come along with you. And all horses have a profoundly personal space extending roughly 1.5m (5ft) around them, plus a less intense one that starts about 6m (20ft) away. A horse that is feeling awkward will definitely take umbrage if you storm into this space, intent on making your presence felt, without giving a thought to the offence it might cause him.

of jump, complexity of the approaches and the level of difficulty accordingly.

The idea is to create a course that only half a dozen or so horses will complete without faults within the given time limit.

These are scored as follows: when any part of a fence is knocked down the pair receives four faults. If a horse steps on the edge of, or in, the water jump, the penalty is four faults.

A refusal at a fence receives three faults, and

21

3

4

2. Pass your right hand under your horses’ chin and put it palm down on the bridge of his nose, not so quickly that you make him start, but firmly enough so that you have his head under gentle control. Slide the head collar up over his nose so that the noseband is in place. Hold it there with the your left hand.

3. As you slide the head collar on, use your right hand to catch and bring the headband round behind his ears. Make all these movements smoothly so you don’t startle the horse, and talk to him all the time.

4. Do up the buckle (not too tight), take the lead rope in both hands, give a scratch or pat as thanks for the cooperation.

Approach the horse quietly and submissively if necessary, so that he can see you coming.

Talk as you walk. Exchange greetings. Make sure the lead rope is clipped to the head collar. Hold the loose end of the lead rope in the palm of your left hand. Hold the head collar by the noseband in the fingers of the same hand. Then: 1. Stand at the horse’s left shoulder, facing in the same direction as he is. Some people put the lead rope over the horse’s neck at this point, but it can distract the horse, or slip out of reach, down the side away from you. So this is by no means a golden rule. Just do what works best for you and the particular horse, but don’t let the rope dangle on the ground.

70

71

The Orient Express Anthony Burton

Having been launched in 1883, in its prime the Orient Express provided a stylish service that crossed borders, overcoming national interests and rivalries. The Orient Express traces the history of the service, from its glamorous beginnings, its popularity with European royalty and heads of state, on to its demise in the age of postwar austerity, the Cold War and cheaper air travel. Illustrated with outstanding, rarely seen photographs, this is a classic portrait of luxury train travel.

The early years

The early years

T

urmoil

and

C

MARCH 2018 Publication

Pawfect Friends

The Orient Express 297 x 227mm (11¾ x 9”) 112pp 35,000 words 90 b/w photos, 10 line artworks ISBN: 978-1-78274-602-7 £14.99 Paperback

hange

Turmoil

and

jack russell

Playing, protecting, keeping a sleepy eye out for each other – even putting up with each other’s eccentricities – the photographs in Pawfect Friends celebrate 90 of the cutest cat and dog pairs that you will ever see.

Pawfect Friends 153 x 153mm (6 x 6”) 96 pages 90 colour photographs ISBN: 978-1-78274-586-0 £6.99 Hardback

Change

Ottoman state and its hierarchies, and in its place a modern, independent, western-style state would be built. That man was Kemal Ataturk. The Great War was over: civil war in Turkey was about to begin. Germany was defeated, and was, for a time at least, to be a pariah rather than a partner in the new Europe that was being built on the ruins of the old. All these factors played an important, and in some cases a decisive, part in discussions on international rail travel.

Train de Luxe Militaire One thing was very clear: there was no way, at the end of 1918, that the Orient Express could simply be reinstated. The first move towards restoring railway normality came from the military, anxious to ensure that the victors would be unimpeded on their journeys across the continent. In February 1919, the French minister of war organised the Train de Luxe Militaire, strictly reserved for high-ranking officers and VIPs. It ran from Paris via Vienna, Warsaw and Prague to Bucharest. But there was an equally urgent need to restore something like

above A poster of 1905, showing a variety of compartment interiors and concentrating very much on the luxury on offer, from the dining car with its panoramic views to the richly carpeted salon. Private toilet facilities may not have been as romantic, but were still sufficiently novel to earn their place in the overall picture.

Another day of coach travel lay ahead, through spectacular mountain gorges, which offered some compensation for the filthy resting places along the way. The last stage, from Sofia onwards, was the most demanding of all, with rough tracks and extreme gradients that almost brought the horses to their knees.

At last, after a three-day journey, the weary travellers reached the railhead at Tatar-Bazardjik (Pazardzhik). As a place, it had as little to commend it as the squalid villages passed en route, but at least here the cramped diligence was left behind for the comforts of a railway carriage. The accommodation, though not on a par with that offered by the luxury wagons-lits, must have seemed heaven after what had gone before. And the company made the proud boast that they would now be whirling along at the dizzy speed of 26 mph (42 kph). The Sea of Marmara finally came into view, and, at six in the evening, after twelve hours on the rails, the train finally pulled into Sirkedji (now Sikerci) Station in Constantinople, splendidly sited between the quays of the Golden Horn and the great dome of Saint Sofia.

There was no getting away from the fact that, regardless of the official purple prose, this was a long and wearisome journey. It is not surprising to find that few passengers booked for the through trip: it is simply astonishing that any booked at all. Everyone was aware of the shortcomings, not least the railway engineers building the new lines. Nevertheless, they did their work well, blasting and hacking their way through the mountains with remarkable speed. Early in 1889, the work was complete. On 1 June of that year, a train, composed entirely of Wagons-Lits

Left A major improvement to the service in the 1880s came with the opening up of a rail link through Bulgaria, and to celebrate the event the Orient Express staff posed for this photograph at an unnamed Bulgarian station. The gentleman in the handsome, double-breasted uniform is the chef de train.

26

4

27

right The Simplon-Orient Express at Milan in the 1930s en route from Paris to Istanbul. The photograph gives some idea of the thousands of tons of steel used in the station’s construction.

Below The Wagons-Lits travel agency at Timisoara in Romania in 1925. As well as advertising the usual luxury trains, it also promotes the trains bleus.

normality to ordinary European relations, to provide lines of communication between capitals, to restore economic dialogue and, just as importantly, to ensure freedom of movement, which would send out a clear signal that the continent was, indeed, at peace again. It was time to restore the trains de luxe to the tracks.

A conference was held in Paris in March, 1919, organised by the French, but with the active encouragement of other governments, including the Swiss, Dutch, Italian and Yugoslav.

The aim was to establish the long-term future of international trains and their routes. At the heart of the proposals was the newly named Simplon-Orient Express. In general terms, the aim was to provide a link that would stretch from London, through Calais or Boulogne, to the Orient. There was no question of sending trains through Germany. As before the war, trains were to make their way south through France and Switzerland, via the Simplon tunnel and from Milan

68

Below A simple but effective luggage label, printed in red and green. With an increasing number of routes being run by Wagons-Lits, each named express was given its own distinctive

to Venice and Trieste. But this would no longer be the end of the line: the route would continue through the brand new kingdom of Yugoslavia to Laibach (now Ljubljana), Zagreb and on to Vincovce (now Vinkovci). Here, the train would divide, one part going to Bucharest and Constanta, the other to Athens via Thessalonika. And there was to be a new daily link, the BordeauxMilan Express, which would be mainly made up of Wagons-Lits cars, but with the addition of an ordinary first-class carriage.

Milan had suddenly acquired considerable importance in the European rail system, and plans were at once put in hand for a new station. The foundation stone was duly laid, but a decade was to pass before Milan Central, the biggest station in the world, covering 103 acres (42 hectares), was completed. It was a most remarkable building, of two seemingly unrelated parts. The main entrance, concourse and booking hall are grandiloquence taken to extremes, a riot of stained glass windows and marbled walls. It was aptly summed up by Jeffrey Richards

69

5

Ghost Towns

The Zeppelin

From Pripyat in Ukraine to Deception Island in Antarctica to thousands of empty apartments in Inner Mongolia, from Greek leper colonies to deserted Italian mountain villages, Ghost Towns is a brilliant pictorial work examining lost worlds. With reasons ranging from the collapse of local industry to natural disasters to chemical spills, the book explores, in 150 striking photographs, 100 desolate urban environments from around the globe.

From the first tentative steps at the end of the 19th century, through to important service during World War I, the golden age of airship travel in the 1920s and 1930s, and on to the Hindenburg disaster in 1937, this revealing book delves deep into the history and science of airship travel. Illustrated with many seldom archive photographs, The Zeppelin gives a unique insight into one of engineering’s most remarkable achievements.

chris mcnab

Christopher Chant

Ghost Towns 297 x 227mm (11¾ x 9”) 224pp 10,000 words 150 colour photographs ISBN: 978-1-78274-550-1 £19.99 Hardback

T

Dooley, Montana, USA This abandoned church is all the remains of the town of Dooley, in Sheridan County, Montana.

Dooley was founded in 1913, as a stop on the Soo Line Railroad branch line. A settlement grew there with shops, a post office, the Rocky Valley Lutheran Church (seen here) and three large grain elevators. Yet the town seemed to have persistent bad luck, with fires, tornados, pestilence and harsh winters taking their toll, and it was abandoned by 1957.

ravelling

in

S

T

Tyle

ravelling

in

S

Tyle

Tr

avelling

in

S

The Zeppelin 297 x 227mm (11¾ x 9”) 112pp 35,000 words 90 black-and-white photos and 10 line artworks ISBN: 978-1-78274-603-4 £14.99 Paperback

T

Tyle

r a v e l l i n g

i n

ST

y l e

above The two- and four-blade propeller units were identical in concept, although not in size, to those employed in heavier-thanair craft. above The luxury of Zeppelin airship travel, here on the LZ127, was emphasised by the use of monogrammed silver and porcelain.

right Landing was controlled by means of ropes pulled by the ground crew, and a large ‘bumper’ under the control gondola cushioned the impact with the ground.

Left The dining saloon of the LZ127 offered comfortable accommodation, full waiter service, a good selection of wines, and the choice of hot or cold food.

the LZ62 of 1916 with a greater beam/length ratio, the LZ104 of 1917 with a greater length/beam ratio, the LZ120 of 1919 with a shorter hull and greater beam/length ratio, and from the LZ126 of 1924 a longer hull of greater length/beam ratio.

opposite above: Pompeii, Campania, Italy One of the many cobbled streets lacing ancient Pompeii. The raised stone blocks are stepping stones, which allowed the citizens to cross the street when it was wet or dirty, but permitted cart wheels to pass through the gaps.

opposite below: Pompeii, Campania, Italy A narrow alleyway in one of Pompeii’s backstreets. Many of the more developed Roman towns and cities had their streets laid out in a grid pattern, much as we see today in modern town planning in countries such as the United States.

above:

Pompeii, Campania, Italy An interior passageway in Pompeii’s famous amphitheatre.

The building was constructed in 70 BCE, and like other Roman amphitheatres it hosted violent gladiatorial games. Despite the brutality of its events, the

116

166

amphitheatre was a work of superb architectural sophistication. It was buried in ash during the Mount Vesuvius eruption, but it actually survived the event with surprisingly little damage, hence historians have been able to study the building’s design and how it worked in exceptional detail.

structural coNsiDeratioNs Throughout this period the size of the Zeppelin airships, with the exception of the LZ120, increased steadily, for the greater the internal volume of the hull, the greater the volume of the gas cells that could be incorporated and thus the greater the lift that could be provided. Size, and the structural considerations that went along with it, was arguably the single most important consideration in the development of the Zeppelin airship for both civil and military applications, even though these demanded a number of different features: in civil airships, for example, maximisation of the payload/range parameter was all important whereas a very high speed and good altitude performance were only very secondary considerations, and in military airships a high payload was important but in fact came to be subordinated to the need for the good speed and altitude performance of the type that was basically irrelevant to the civil airship. The LZ5 (the Imperial German Army’s ZII of 1909) had a capacity of 530,000ft3 (15,000m3) and a length/beam ratio of 10.46/1 for its 446-ft (136-m) hull; the LZ18 (Imperial German Navy L2 of 1913) had a capacity of 953,500ft3 (27,000m3) and a length/ beam ratio of 9.52/1 for its 518-ft (158-m) hull; the LZ40 (and

naval L10 of 1915) had a capacity of 1,126,500ft3 (31,900 m3) and a length/beam ratio of 8.74/1 for its 536-ft (163-m) hull; the LZ62 (naval L30 of 1916) had a capacity of 1,949,000ft3 (55,200m3) and a length/beam ratio of 8.28/1 for its 649-ft (198-m) hull; and the LZ104 (naval L59 of 1917, and admittedly an ‘odd man out’ as it was built for a special purpose) had a capacity of 2,420,000ft3 (68,500m3) and a length/beam ratio of 9.48/1 for its 743-ft (226-m) hull. Then, after the end of the war the first new Zeppelin airship was the LZ120 Bodensee and this had a capacity of 785,750ft3 (22,250m3) and a length/beam

ratio of 6.46/1 for its 396-ft (120-m) hull. The implication of the LZ120’s design was that the emphasis was no longer being placed so much on altitude and outright payload-carrying capability but rather on safety, comfort and general performance.

However, the LZ126 built for the US Navy in 1924 had a capacity of 2,472,000ft3 (70,000m3) and a length/beam ratio of 6.27/1 for its 660-ft (200-m) hull; the LZ 127 Graf Zeppelin civil airship of 1928 had a capacity of 2,650,000ft3 (75,000m3) and a length/beam ratio of 7.76/1 for its 774-ft (236-m) hull; and the ultimate LZ129 Hindenburg civil airship of 1936 had

miles (1,700km), the military and naval airships provided greater lift and longer range, typically about 24,500lb (11,100kg) and 1,300 miles (2,100km) respectively. The demands of World War I then resulted in an enormous expansion of lift/ range capability, and while the LZ40 (naval L10 of 1915) had a lift of 35,000lb (15,900kg) and possessed a range of 2,600 miles (4,200km), the comparative data for the LZ62 (naval L30 of 1916) were 61,700lb (28,000kg) and 4,600 miles (7,400km) and those for the LZ61 (naval L21 of 1916) were 99,200lb (44,500kg) and 7,455 miles (12,000km).

Arranged chronologically, The Military Quiz Book contains 1,750 questions (and answers) ranging from the ancient world to the present day, from personalities and quotations to battles and campaigns, from weapons to uniforms. Written by a former instructor in war studies at Sandhurst, this is an excellent book for professional quizzes, challenging your friends, or just reading alone.

roy allen

Answers 2 a. Aetius. b. Three, c. Although the combat was to be on foot, at a vital moment one knight mounted his horse and charged into the English. d. So they would bend when they penetrated enemy shields, rendering the shields unusable, and also becoming useless themselves, e. A sling mounted on a staff for throwing large projectiles. f. Count Belisarius. g. The Due de Berri.

Answers 3 a. Mohammad II and Constantine XI. b. Alesia. c. Patay(l429). d. To assault a walled city: it was a solid formation where locked shields defended infantry against missiles from the sides and from the top. e. ‘Yeni ceri’ literally ‘new troops’. f. Sennacherib, King of Assyria. g. A jacket lined with iron scales.

Answers 57 a. Confederate General Albert Sidney Johnston, commander of the Army of Mississippi, killed at Shiloh (April 1862). b. In 1704, during the War of Spanish Succession. The acquisition was formalised in 1713 at the Treaty of Utrecht, c. Louis Riel’s Metis uprising in present-day Manitoba. d. The Mitrailleuse (early French machine gun). e. Captain of the I st Company of Louis XIV’s Mousquetaires de la Garde from 1667 until his death at the siege of Maastricht in 1673. f. Napoleon. g. Tigers’, because of the wild-cat skin worn around their headgear.

Answers 58 a. Wallenstein. b. Colonel Todleben. c. George II at Dettingen, 1743. d. 23. He owed his command first to his status as a bastard son of the Emperor Charles V and half-brother of Philip II of Spain and secondly to his successful campaign against the Spanish Moriscos (1569-70). e. The Duke of Wellington. f. Frederick the Great, Instruction to his Generals. g. In memory of his friend and comrade-in-arms, General James Wolfe, killed at Quebec in the same year.

Questions 58 a. Which 17th Century general held to the maxim that ‘war should feed war’? b. Which engineer improved Sevastopol’s defences during the Crimean War? c. Who was the last British monarch to accompany his men into battle? d How old was Don John of Austria when he won the Battle of Lepanto (1571)? d. Who said, ‘The whole art of war consists in getting at what lies on the other side of the hill, or, in other words, what we do not know from what we do know.’? e. Who said, ‘The success of my whole project is founded on the firmness of conduct of the officer who will command it.’? f. Why did the British Army’s Colonel Hale adopt the skull and crossbones and motto ‘or Glory’ for his newly raised regiment of Light Dragoons (later the 17th Lancers) in 1759?

Answers 59 a. The Duke of Cumberland, so nicknamed because of his activities after the Battle of Culloden(l746). b. Union General George Thomas, c. The War of Heavenly Peace. d. A light cannon used in the English Civil War. e. Navarino. f. Captain Jenkins, a merchant captain whose ear was allegedly cut off by Spanish forces that captured his vessel in the Caribbean. This incident sparked off popular fury in England and forced Prime Minister Walpole, unwillingly, to go to war with Spain in 1739. g. Louis XIV.

Questions 59 a. Who was ‘the bloody butcher’? b. Who was known as the ‘Rock of Chickamauga’? c. The bloody Taiping Rebellion (1851 -65) was also known by what name? d. What was a saker? e. Admiral Sir Edward Codrington versus Ibrahim Pasha. Which battle of 1827? f. Who was Jenkins of the War of Jenkins’ Ear? g. Who said, ‘If there is one area where severity is necessary for a sovereign, it is with regard to his soldiers.’?

8

235 x 153mm (9¼ x 6”) 128pp 45,000 words ISBN: 978-1-78274-605-8 £12.99 Paperback

Answers 56 a. Mexican President-General Antonio de Lopez Santa Anna. b. French General Bosquet. c. Edgehill (i642). d. Maoris. They are a type of club and long-shafted tomahawk. e. It is derived from a word meaning enemy. f. Frederick the Great. g. James Wolfe, in a letter of November 1757.

Questions 57 a. Who was the highest-ranking officer to be killed in the American Civil War? b. When was Gibraltar first taken by British forces? c. The Battle of Batoche (1885) ended which Rebellion? d. What type of weapon was manufactured by Chevalier et Grenier, Bollee and Gabert? e. Who was the real D’Artagnan? f. Who said, The Ancients had a great advantage over us in that their armies were not trailed by a second army of pen-pushers.’? g. What was the nickname of Rimington’s Scouts in the Second Anglo-Boer War?

The Pan Am Clipper: The History of Pan American’s Flying-Boats 1931 to 1946 covers one of aviation history’s most inspiring and magical periods.

One of the most romantic planes ever built, flying in a Clipper was intended to rival a great ocean liner.

Illustrated with more than 100 archive photographs, this impressive book is a tribute to a technical wonder that continues to fascinate many people today.

The Military Quiz Book

E A R LY M ODE R N 1 6 0 0 – 1 9 1 4 • A N S W E R S

E A R LY M ODE R N 1 6 0 0 – 1 9 1 4 • Q U E S T I ON S

Questions 56 a. Which self-styled ‘Napoleon of the West’ was also known as the ‘Immortal Three-Fourths’ and the ‘Hero of Tampico’? b. Who, on witnessing the Charge of the Light Brigade, exclaimed, ‘C’est magnifique, mais ce n’est pas la guerre.’ (‘It is magnificent, but it isn’t war.’)? c. At which English Civil War battle did Sir Jacob Ashley offer the prayer, ‘Lord, thou knowest how busy I am, or will be, this day; if I forget thee, do not thou forget me.

March on, boys.’? d. Who would be equipped with Patu Onewa and Toki Poto? e. What is the meaning of the name Apache? f. Who said to a captured deserter, ‘Come, come, let us fight another battle today: if I am beaten we will desert together tomorrow.’? g. Who said, ‘In war something must be allowed to chance and fortune seeing it is, in its nature, hazardous and an option of difficulties.’?

M ODE R N F ROM 1 9 1 4 • Q U E S T I ON S

D

own

T

o

T

he

From 1914

58

Se

D

a

own

To T

left PAA publicity map of the period showing the widening coverage of the Caribbean and South American services.

Questions I a. Where did ‘the Tiger’ beat ‘the Rabbit’? b. Which two countries fought the ‘Soccer War’? c. In which conflict did the first helicopter assault from the sea take place? d. What did the Butt Report of August 1941 prove? e. According to British Army legend, what is ‘the most dangerous thing in the world’? f. Where did the multi-national ‘Dunsterforce’ serve at the end of World War I? g. Which medal was known to its recipients as the ‘Order of the Frozen Meat’?

Questions 2 a. Which British naval officer commanded a squadron of armoured cars in Russian Galicia during the War of Intervention of 1917-19? b. Name the communications route that ran between Port Moresby and Buna in New Guinea in World War II. c. What was a ‘Big Wing’? d. What kind of warship is the Kiev?. e. What was renounced by countries signing the Briand-Kellogg Pact of 1927? f. Who described the Argentine invasion of the Falklands as, ‘a most ungentlemanly act’? g. Which famous child care specialist was prominent in the anti-Vietnam War movement?

Questions 3 a. Who was the first British Secretary of State for Defence? b. How many Indo-Pakistan Wars have been fought since the partition of 1947? c. What did the Soviets dub the ‘Circle of Death’? d. n World War I, how was the German Staaken R-VI aircraft better known? e. Which two Latin American countries contributed forces to Allied operations in World War II? f. Who said, in 1944, ‘The real trouble with the Yanks is that they are completely ignorant as to the rules of the game we are playing with the Germans. You play so much better when you know the rules.’? g. In which war did the Commonwealth Division fight?

above The interior of an S-38, illustrating the wonderful views that were enjoyed by passengers on these early flights.

57

53

The Pan Am Clipper

John Pimlott

A N C I E N T A N D M E DI E VA L TO 1 6 0 0 • A N S W E R S

Accommodation on the Zeppelin airships evolved from the very spartan open gondolas of the LZ1 to the luxurious fully enclosed spaces of the LZ127 and LZ129. The gondola of the LZ1 was large enough for the crew, engine and basic operational equipment. Over the following period there appeared three different types of gondola. The first of these, attached under the walkway, was a watertight assembly with a rounded front and a pointed rear. The second of these, which first made its appearance on the LZ36 (naval L9), was an enclosed control gondola about three times larger than it had been to provide

52

45

The Military Quiz Book

Answers I a. They commanded the French army’s ill-fated Genoese crossbowmen. b. Claudius. c. Richard I. d. A sharp, many-pointed device usually of metal, that when scattered could break up enemy cavalry or infantry attacks by piercing hooves or the soles of shoes. (In more modern parlance, a calthrop is a similar device used for stopping wheeled vehicles by piercing the tyres). e. An early form of handgun. f. Narses was a eunuch. g. Armour to protect the shoulder.

Between 1912 and 1914 the Viktoria Luise carried 9,738 service persons including crew and 2,995 fare-paying passengers, on 489 flights totalling 33,750 miles (54,310km) in 981 flying hours, while during the autumn of 1919 the Bodensee carried 4,050 persons including 2,253 fare-paying passengers on 103 trips totalling 31,851 miles (51,258km) in 532 flying hours.

The later commercial airships of course had longer ranges, and the LZ127 could cover 6,370 miles (10,250km) and the LZ129 8,390 miles (13,500km). The lift of the LZ127 and LZ129 were 66,140lb and 132,275lb (30,000kg and 60,000kg) respectively.

117

167

44

end, had been developed from nothing more than large fields to purposeful landing sites. These accommodated the military fighters and bombers and observation aircraft which carried on their destructive tasks over the 1914–18 period and which had been large fields and open areas for the original European aviation experiments.

The Wright Brothers had brought the aeroplane to Europe as a landplane and that was how it was viewed, with a few experimenters attempting flights from the rivers, such as the Seine.

There had been no such war and no such military aviation in the United States and consequently no purposely constructed landing grounds. Governments had put their money behind military aerodromes in Europe to provide for their new military craft (for which they had shown little or no interest prior to the war) and there was no such requirement in the United States. A number of enlightened towns or states had seen the potential for air services as a result of the US Post Office’s air services, but the sum total of designated aerodromes in the whole of the United States in the 1920s was just over 1000.

The situation was worse in Central America and the Caribbean, with proper landing grounds being virtually nonexistent. The practical necessities of a Caribbean service precluded the use of landplanes, as routes were either over water or across short stretches of land. In most of the countries of the Antilles, West Indies and Central America, landing grounds were mostly of the most primitive type or non-existent. In contrast, the building of harbours for flying-boats was relatively easy and both climate and water conditions were favourable. As Pan American’s route network lengthened, so did its requirement for landing sites. Accordingly Pan American decided to concentrate its

he

Se

a

added for both mail and passengers. The journey took seven hours and fifteen minutes and was the first trans-continental air route in South America. Mail contracts were obtained by NYRBA from the governments of Argentina, Chile and Uruguay.

In November of that year, authorisation was obtained from the Brazilian government to operate within that country; a week later a new route was opened from Buenos Aires to Asuncion, Paraguay. The former US Assistant Secretary of Commerce for Aeronautics, W. P. McCracken, became chairman of the board.

O’Neill bought Ford Tri-Motors for his services, three Sikorsky S-38 amphibians and six Commodore flying-boats from the Consolidated Aircraft Corporation, of which Reuben Fleet was the owner. While the Sikorsky S-38 was an adequate craft, seating eight passengers and offering the dual functions of land and seaplane at the handling point, the Commodore was an advanced new machine which would seat 22 passengers, and represented the first of a new breed of water-borne craft.

above A truly memorable sight for those fortunate enough to experience it – the view from an S-42, somewhere over the Caribbean.

enter tHe Flying-boat The Commodore was originally designed for naval patrol work

by Fleet’s company. It was a sizeable craft for its day, with a wingspan of 100ft (30m), a length of 68ft (21m) and overall height of 16ft (5m). It was powered by two Pratt & Whitney Hornet engines, each developing 575hp, and the gross weight of the aircraft was just under 18,000lb (8200kg). Its designed range was 1000 statute miles (1609km), and with a cruising speed of 100mph (161kmh) and a capability for carrying 22 passengers, the Commodore was, all-in-all, a fine craft. It was a product of the company founded by Reuben Fleet in May 1923, the Consolidated Aircraft Corporation.

Fleet was a self-made businessman with six years’ experience in the US Army Air Service. Later, when war added to the demands for aeroplanes, Consolidated Aircraft Corporation was to become one of the largest aircraft manufacturers in the United States. Like the Trippe family, Fleet’s forebears had their roots in England, and his father had reached the Pacific Northwest by way of Kansas City. After finishing school, Fleet entered the Culver Military Academy in Indiana, graduated in 1906, and for a brief period was a school teacher in Washington. He then started his own business and became a real estate dealer. With his first flight in 1914, he became an immediate convert to flying.

Fleet became a member of the Washington State Legislature and introduced a bill appropriating $250,000 for aviation training in the National Guard. The Bill died, but Fleet had attracted attention and was among 11 men to be chosen for pilot training in the scheme that had come from his Bill. He made his first flight from San Diego in 1917, and joined the military when the United States entered World War I in 1917. He left the Air Service in 1922, during which time he had made an

activities on the water-borne aircraft. The general view in the countries of the region was that if the United States wished to operate air services permission would be granted, but that was all that could be expected from local governments, many of which were generally impoverished and often corrupt.

Pan American’s actions in this area were furthered by a development among the airlines which led to an early takeover and the acquisition of a new fleet for Pan American. In March 1929, a new company was formed in New York called the New York, Rio and Buenos Aires Line, or NYRBA, and this represented a direct challenge to the Aviation Corporation of the Americas. The head of the company was Captain Ralph O’Neill, a former World War I fighter ace and later a Boeing salesman in South America. O’Neill had seen the enormous potential for air transport in that transport-starved continent and had gone to New York to look for backers for his proposed airline. He found them in the form of an impressive collection of industrialists, which included Reuben Fleet of the Consolidated Aircraft Corporation, F. C. Munson of the Munson Steamship Line, W. B. Mayo of the Ford Motor Company, J. E. Reynolds of International Founders and Lewis Pierson of the Irving Trust Company. Pierson brought in his son-in-law Richard Bevier as vice-president, together with J. K. Montgomery. These three had been partners in the original Pan American Airways and had left when Trippe and the AVCO organisation took over their company and began the first flights to Cuba.

In July 1929, a proving flight was made with a Ford TriMotor to Buenos Aires and the first NYRBA scheduled service opened on 21 August 1929 from the Argentine capital to Montevideo. In September, a Buenos Aires–Santiago route was

D

own

T

o

T

he

Se

a

The Pan Am Clipper 297 x 225mm (11¾ x 9”) 112pp 100 b/w photos & 10 line a/ws 35,000 words ISBN: 978-1-78274-604-1 £14.99 Paperback

D

o w n

T

o

T

h e

S

e a

impression on senior officers in the service.

He turned down jobs with aircraft makers William Boeing and Glenn Curtiss, and incorporated the Consolidated Aircraft Corporation in the State of Delaware on 29 May 1923. He gained a first order from the military for twenty TW-3 training aircraft, which on modification was renumbered the PT-1.

A further contract for the PT-1 was placed in 1924, for fifty aircraft, at which point Fleet moved the production facilities to Buffalo, New York, where he took over a former Curtiss factory.

Further orders followed for training aircraft, for the navy as well as army, and by 1927 Consolidated Aircraft was making money. Further military designs followed, including a new bomber, the Guardian, which was a joint venture between Consolidated and Sikorsky, produced when Fleet and Igor Sikorsky had agreed to collaborate on what had been a Sikorsky design. Significantly, Sikorsky, a former competitor of Consolidated, came to play a more significant role with Pan American than did Consolidated. Indeed, Trippe was already using a fleet of Sikorsky S-38s by the time of the NYRBA challenge.

NRYBA was gaining ground in an area which Trippe had already been working hard to call his own, and on 18 February 1930, O’Neill launched the first through service between Miami and Santiago, using the east coast route via Brazil. In a great flourish of publicity he gained the services of no less than Mrs Herbert Hoover, the President’s wife, to christen a Consolidated below In its airline form, the Commodore carried a total of 22 passengers and cruised at 100mph (160kmh). It was used in the Caribbean. above The S-42 was probably Sikorsky’s finest flying-boat. It seated up to 32 passengers and cruised at 150mph (240kmh).

This aircraft served with Pan Am until July 1946.

landing bases than from over-water crossings of great distance.

Trippe had strong political influence in the US Post Office Department, however, and conflict soon arose between NYRBA and Pan American. Pan American held the US mail contracts as far as Paramaribo, Dutch Guiana, and NYRBA found its path blocked for mail and passenger traffic across the gap from Port of Spain, Trinidad, along the chain of islands to Miami.

Relations became strained and conflict continued and reached a critical point. The US Post Master General took issue with NYRBA’s cut-price mail rates. The Post Master General made it clear that he would not award any US mail contract for an east-coast route to Buenos Aires to any other company than Pan American, and with so many countries in the region pledging exclusive allegiance to Pan American, NYRBA’s economic problems mounted. Despite a high standard of operations, NYRBA passenger figures were as limited as its mail traffic and it was actually losing money on its operations.

Pan American did not itself receive US mail rights for the

Commodore for this service. Having begun services with NYRBA in November 1929, the Commodores had already been successful enough for O’Neill to increase his original order for six to fourteen. It might be said that the US Navy’s loss was NYRBA’s gain, for while the navy had turned down the Commodore, Fleet found a ready buyer for a commercial version of the aircraft in NYRBA – the airline in which Fleet was a major investor.

Both Consolidated and NYRBA came out well from this deal: it had a beneficial effect for Consolidated, for it provided work on the 14 aircraft, and the deal gave O’Neill an excellent aircraft for the South American services. The Commodores (whose naval name had been Admiral) had the capability for long ranges which resulted more from the shortage of adequate

71 22

6

a capacity of 7,000,000ft3 (198,000m3) and a length/beam ratio of 5.95/1 for its 800-ft (245-m) hull. liFtiNg the airshiP The hydrogen gas that provided the Zeppelin airships’ lift was contained in the so-called Traggaszellen (‘gas cells’). In the early airships these were made of a heavy cotton fabric covered with a rubber coating. Experience revealed that this combination was too porous to prevent gas escaping from the cells and pooling under the upper part of the outer covering, so the company

accommodation, which now included a pilot’s compartment, the radio operator’s compartment, an officer’s compartment and a position for a defensive machine-gun. The third of the gondola types was of a shorter length and introduced on the LZ95 (naval L48). On the LZ120 Bodensee intended for civil use, the gondola was considerably lengthened to the rear and now included a pilot’s compartment and a passenger section with a lounge and other compartments.

Provision for the crew was altogether more austere, and comprised simple accommodation along the sides of the walkway inside the hull, where provision was made for hammocks to be slung. It was only with the advent of the ocean-crossing airships with their considerably longer endurance that more comfortable provision was made for the crew, who then enjoyed the benefits of sleeping cabins and common rooms.

Other features that came to be added to the standard equipment of Zeppelin airships included electric lighting by an engine-driven generator, and this first appeared in the LZ14 (naval L1) – earlier airships had relied on battery-powered lighting. Radio equipment was first used in the LZ6 (military ZIII), and the standard of flight and navigation equipment steadily improved, ranging from the compass and barometer of the LZ1 to the full suites of equipment typical of the LZ127 and LZ129.

23

24

25

7

Ghost Towns

The Zeppelin

From Pripyat in Ukraine to Deception Island in Antarctica to thousands of empty apartments in Inner Mongolia, from Greek leper colonies to deserted Italian mountain villages, Ghost Towns is a brilliant pictorial work examining lost worlds. With reasons ranging from the collapse of local industry to natural disasters to chemical spills, the book explores, in 150 striking photographs, 100 desolate urban environments from around the globe.

From the first tentative steps at the end of the 19th century, through to important service during World War I, the golden age of airship travel in the 1920s and 1930s, and on to the Hindenburg disaster in 1937, this revealing book delves deep into the history and science of airship travel. Illustrated with many seldom archive photographs, The Zeppelin gives a unique insight into one of engineering’s most remarkable achievements.

chris mcnab

Christopher Chant

Ghost Towns 297 x 227mm (11¾ x 9”) 224pp 10,000 words 150 colour photographs ISBN: 978-1-78274-550-1 £19.99 Hardback

T

Dooley, Montana, USA This abandoned church is all the remains of the town of Dooley, in Sheridan County, Montana.

Dooley was founded in 1913, as a stop on the Soo Line Railroad branch line. A settlement grew there with shops, a post office, the Rocky Valley Lutheran Church (seen here) and three large grain elevators. Yet the town seemed to have persistent bad luck, with fires, tornados, pestilence and harsh winters taking their toll, and it was abandoned by 1957.

ravelling

in

S

T

Tyle

ravelling

in

S

Tyle

Tr

avelling

in

S

The Zeppelin 297 x 227mm (11¾ x 9”) 112pp 35,000 words 90 black-and-white photos and 10 line artworks ISBN: 978-1-78274-603-4 £14.99 Paperback

T

Tyle

r a v e l l i n g

i n

ST

y l e

above The two- and four-blade propeller units were identical in concept, although not in size, to those employed in heavier-thanair craft. above The luxury of Zeppelin airship travel, here on the LZ127, was emphasised by the use of monogrammed silver and porcelain.

right Landing was controlled by means of ropes pulled by the ground crew, and a large ‘bumper’ under the control gondola cushioned the impact with the ground.

Left The dining saloon of the LZ127 offered comfortable accommodation, full waiter service, a good selection of wines, and the choice of hot or cold food.

the LZ62 of 1916 with a greater beam/length ratio, the LZ104 of 1917 with a greater length/beam ratio, the LZ120 of 1919 with a shorter hull and greater beam/length ratio, and from the LZ126 of 1924 a longer hull of greater length/beam ratio.

opposite above: Pompeii, Campania, Italy One of the many cobbled streets lacing ancient Pompeii. The raised stone blocks are stepping stones, which allowed the citizens to cross the street when it was wet or dirty, but permitted cart wheels to pass through the gaps.

opposite below: Pompeii, Campania, Italy A narrow alleyway in one of Pompeii’s backstreets. Many of the more developed Roman towns and cities had their streets laid out in a grid pattern, much as we see today in modern town planning in countries such as the United States.

above:

Pompeii, Campania, Italy An interior passageway in Pompeii’s famous amphitheatre.

The building was constructed in 70 BCE, and like other Roman amphitheatres it hosted violent gladiatorial games. Despite the brutality of its events, the

116

166

amphitheatre was a work of superb architectural sophistication. It was buried in ash during the Mount Vesuvius eruption, but it actually survived the event with surprisingly little damage, hence historians have been able to study the building’s design and how it worked in exceptional detail.

structural coNsiDeratioNs Throughout this period the size of the Zeppelin airships, with the exception of the LZ120, increased steadily, for the greater the internal volume of the hull, the greater the volume of the gas cells that could be incorporated and thus the greater the lift that could be provided. Size, and the structural considerations that went along with it, was arguably the single most important consideration in the development of the Zeppelin airship for both civil and military applications, even though these demanded a number of different features: in civil airships, for example, maximisation of the payload/range parameter was all important whereas a very high speed and good altitude performance were only very secondary considerations, and in military airships a high payload was important but in fact came to be subordinated to the need for the good speed and altitude performance of the type that was basically irrelevant to the civil airship. The LZ5 (the Imperial German Army’s ZII of 1909) had a capacity of 530,000ft3 (15,000m3) and a length/beam ratio of 10.46/1 for its 446-ft (136-m) hull; the LZ18 (Imperial German Navy L2 of 1913) had a capacity of 953,500ft3 (27,000m3) and a length/ beam ratio of 9.52/1 for its 518-ft (158-m) hull; the LZ40 (and

naval L10 of 1915) had a capacity of 1,126,500ft3 (31,900 m3) and a length/beam ratio of 8.74/1 for its 536-ft (163-m) hull; the LZ62 (naval L30 of 1916) had a capacity of 1,949,000ft3 (55,200m3) and a length/beam ratio of 8.28/1 for its 649-ft (198-m) hull; and the LZ104 (naval L59 of 1917, and admittedly an ‘odd man out’ as it was built for a special purpose) had a capacity of 2,420,000ft3 (68,500m3) and a length/beam ratio of 9.48/1 for its 743-ft (226-m) hull. Then, after the end of the war the first new Zeppelin airship was the LZ120 Bodensee and this had a capacity of 785,750ft3 (22,250m3) and a length/beam

ratio of 6.46/1 for its 396-ft (120-m) hull. The implication of the LZ120’s design was that the emphasis was no longer being placed so much on altitude and outright payload-carrying capability but rather on safety, comfort and general performance.

However, the LZ126 built for the US Navy in 1924 had a capacity of 2,472,000ft3 (70,000m3) and a length/beam ratio of 6.27/1 for its 660-ft (200-m) hull; the LZ 127 Graf Zeppelin civil airship of 1928 had a capacity of 2,650,000ft3 (75,000m3) and a length/beam ratio of 7.76/1 for its 774-ft (236-m) hull; and the ultimate LZ129 Hindenburg civil airship of 1936 had

miles (1,700km), the military and naval airships provided greater lift and longer range, typically about 24,500lb (11,100kg) and 1,300 miles (2,100km) respectively. The demands of World War I then resulted in an enormous expansion of lift/ range capability, and while the LZ40 (naval L10 of 1915) had a lift of 35,000lb (15,900kg) and possessed a range of 2,600 miles (4,200km), the comparative data for the LZ62 (naval L30 of 1916) were 61,700lb (28,000kg) and 4,600 miles (7,400km) and those for the LZ61 (naval L21 of 1916) were 99,200lb (44,500kg) and 7,455 miles (12,000km).

Arranged chronologically, The Military Quiz Book contains 1,750 questions (and answers) ranging from the ancient world to the present day, from personalities and quotations to battles and campaigns, from weapons to uniforms. Written by a former instructor in war studies at Sandhurst, this is an excellent book for professional quizzes, challenging your friends, or just reading alone.

roy allen

Answers 2 a. Aetius. b. Three, c. Although the combat was to be on foot, at a vital moment one knight mounted his horse and charged into the English. d. So they would bend when they penetrated enemy shields, rendering the shields unusable, and also becoming useless themselves, e. A sling mounted on a staff for throwing large projectiles. f. Count Belisarius. g. The Due de Berri.

Answers 3 a. Mohammad II and Constantine XI. b. Alesia. c. Patay(l429). d. To assault a walled city: it was a solid formation where locked shields defended infantry against missiles from the sides and from the top. e. ‘Yeni ceri’ literally ‘new troops’. f. Sennacherib, King of Assyria. g. A jacket lined with iron scales.

Answers 57 a. Confederate General Albert Sidney Johnston, commander of the Army of Mississippi, killed at Shiloh (April 1862). b. In 1704, during the War of Spanish Succession. The acquisition was formalised in 1713 at the Treaty of Utrecht, c. Louis Riel’s Metis uprising in present-day Manitoba. d. The Mitrailleuse (early French machine gun). e. Captain of the I st Company of Louis XIV’s Mousquetaires de la Garde from 1667 until his death at the siege of Maastricht in 1673. f. Napoleon. g. Tigers’, because of the wild-cat skin worn around their headgear.

Answers 58 a. Wallenstein. b. Colonel Todleben. c. George II at Dettingen, 1743. d. 23. He owed his command first to his status as a bastard son of the Emperor Charles V and half-brother of Philip II of Spain and secondly to his successful campaign against the Spanish Moriscos (1569-70). e. The Duke of Wellington. f. Frederick the Great, Instruction to his Generals. g. In memory of his friend and comrade-in-arms, General James Wolfe, killed at Quebec in the same year.

Questions 58 a. Which 17th Century general held to the maxim that ‘war should feed war’? b. Which engineer improved Sevastopol’s defences during the Crimean War? c. Who was the last British monarch to accompany his men into battle? d How old was Don John of Austria when he won the Battle of Lepanto (1571)? d. Who said, ‘The whole art of war consists in getting at what lies on the other side of the hill, or, in other words, what we do not know from what we do know.’? e. Who said, ‘The success of my whole project is founded on the firmness of conduct of the officer who will command it.’? f. Why did the British Army’s Colonel Hale adopt the skull and crossbones and motto ‘or Glory’ for his newly raised regiment of Light Dragoons (later the 17th Lancers) in 1759?

Answers 59 a. The Duke of Cumberland, so nicknamed because of his activities after the Battle of Culloden(l746). b. Union General George Thomas, c. The War of Heavenly Peace. d. A light cannon used in the English Civil War. e. Navarino. f. Captain Jenkins, a merchant captain whose ear was allegedly cut off by Spanish forces that captured his vessel in the Caribbean. This incident sparked off popular fury in England and forced Prime Minister Walpole, unwillingly, to go to war with Spain in 1739. g. Louis XIV.

Questions 59 a. Who was ‘the bloody butcher’? b. Who was known as the ‘Rock of Chickamauga’? c. The bloody Taiping Rebellion (1851 -65) was also known by what name? d. What was a saker? e. Admiral Sir Edward Codrington versus Ibrahim Pasha. Which battle of 1827? f. Who was Jenkins of the War of Jenkins’ Ear? g. Who said, ‘If there is one area where severity is necessary for a sovereign, it is with regard to his soldiers.’?

8

235 x 153mm (9¼ x 6”) 128pp 45,000 words ISBN: 978-1-78274-605-8 £12.99 Paperback

Answers 56 a. Mexican President-General Antonio de Lopez Santa Anna. b. French General Bosquet. c. Edgehill (i642). d. Maoris. They are a type of club and long-shafted tomahawk. e. It is derived from a word meaning enemy. f. Frederick the Great. g. James Wolfe, in a letter of November 1757.

Questions 57 a. Who was the highest-ranking officer to be killed in the American Civil War? b. When was Gibraltar first taken by British forces? c. The Battle of Batoche (1885) ended which Rebellion? d. What type of weapon was manufactured by Chevalier et Grenier, Bollee and Gabert? e. Who was the real D’Artagnan? f. Who said, The Ancients had a great advantage over us in that their armies were not trailed by a second army of pen-pushers.’? g. What was the nickname of Rimington’s Scouts in the Second Anglo-Boer War?

The Pan Am Clipper: The History of Pan American’s Flying-Boats 1931 to 1946 covers one of aviation history’s most inspiring and magical periods.

One of the most romantic planes ever built, flying in a Clipper was intended to rival a great ocean liner.

Illustrated with more than 100 archive photographs, this impressive book is a tribute to a technical wonder that continues to fascinate many people today.

The Military Quiz Book

E A R LY M ODE R N 1 6 0 0 – 1 9 1 4 • A N S W E R S

E A R LY M ODE R N 1 6 0 0 – 1 9 1 4 • Q U E S T I ON S

Questions 56 a. Which self-styled ‘Napoleon of the West’ was also known as the ‘Immortal Three-Fourths’ and the ‘Hero of Tampico’? b. Who, on witnessing the Charge of the Light Brigade, exclaimed, ‘C’est magnifique, mais ce n’est pas la guerre.’ (‘It is magnificent, but it isn’t war.’)? c. At which English Civil War battle did Sir Jacob Ashley offer the prayer, ‘Lord, thou knowest how busy I am, or will be, this day; if I forget thee, do not thou forget me.

March on, boys.’? d. Who would be equipped with Patu Onewa and Toki Poto? e. What is the meaning of the name Apache? f. Who said to a captured deserter, ‘Come, come, let us fight another battle today: if I am beaten we will desert together tomorrow.’? g. Who said, ‘In war something must be allowed to chance and fortune seeing it is, in its nature, hazardous and an option of difficulties.’?

M ODE R N F ROM 1 9 1 4 • Q U E S T I ON S

D

own

T

o

T

he

From 1914

58

Se

D

a

own

To T

left PAA publicity map of the period showing the widening coverage of the Caribbean and South American services.

Questions I a. Where did ‘the Tiger’ beat ‘the Rabbit’? b. Which two countries fought the ‘Soccer War’? c. In which conflict did the first helicopter assault from the sea take place? d. What did the Butt Report of August 1941 prove? e. According to British Army legend, what is ‘the most dangerous thing in the world’? f. Where did the multi-national ‘Dunsterforce’ serve at the end of World War I? g. Which medal was known to its recipients as the ‘Order of the Frozen Meat’?

Questions 2 a. Which British naval officer commanded a squadron of armoured cars in Russian Galicia during the War of Intervention of 1917-19? b. Name the communications route that ran between Port Moresby and Buna in New Guinea in World War II. c. What was a ‘Big Wing’? d. What kind of warship is the Kiev?. e. What was renounced by countries signing the Briand-Kellogg Pact of 1927? f. Who described the Argentine invasion of the Falklands as, ‘a most ungentlemanly act’? g. Which famous child care specialist was prominent in the anti-Vietnam War movement?

Questions 3 a. Who was the first British Secretary of State for Defence? b. How many Indo-Pakistan Wars have been fought since the partition of 1947? c. What did the Soviets dub the ‘Circle of Death’? d. n World War I, how was the German Staaken R-VI aircraft better known? e. Which two Latin American countries contributed forces to Allied operations in World War II? f. Who said, in 1944, ‘The real trouble with the Yanks is that they are completely ignorant as to the rules of the game we are playing with the Germans. You play so much better when you know the rules.’? g. In which war did the Commonwealth Division fight?

above The interior of an S-38, illustrating the wonderful views that were enjoyed by passengers on these early flights.

57

53

The Pan Am Clipper

John Pimlott

A N C I E N T A N D M E DI E VA L TO 1 6 0 0 • A N S W E R S

Accommodation on the Zeppelin airships evolved from the very spartan open gondolas of the LZ1 to the luxurious fully enclosed spaces of the LZ127 and LZ129. The gondola of the LZ1 was large enough for the crew, engine and basic operational equipment. Over the following period there appeared three different types of gondola. The first of these, attached under the walkway, was a watertight assembly with a rounded front and a pointed rear. The second of these, which first made its appearance on the LZ36 (naval L9), was an enclosed control gondola about three times larger than it had been to provide

52

45

The Military Quiz Book

Answers I a. They commanded the French army’s ill-fated Genoese crossbowmen. b. Claudius. c. Richard I. d. A sharp, many-pointed device usually of metal, that when scattered could break up enemy cavalry or infantry attacks by piercing hooves or the soles of shoes. (In more modern parlance, a calthrop is a similar device used for stopping wheeled vehicles by piercing the tyres). e. An early form of handgun. f. Narses was a eunuch. g. Armour to protect the shoulder.

Between 1912 and 1914 the Viktoria Luise carried 9,738 service persons including crew and 2,995 fare-paying passengers, on 489 flights totalling 33,750 miles (54,310km) in 981 flying hours, while during the autumn of 1919 the Bodensee carried 4,050 persons including 2,253 fare-paying passengers on 103 trips totalling 31,851 miles (51,258km) in 532 flying hours.

The later commercial airships of course had longer ranges, and the LZ127 could cover 6,370 miles (10,250km) and the LZ129 8,390 miles (13,500km). The lift of the LZ127 and LZ129 were 66,140lb and 132,275lb (30,000kg and 60,000kg) respectively.

117

167

44

end, had been developed from nothing more than large fields to purposeful landing sites. These accommodated the military fighters and bombers and observation aircraft which carried on their destructive tasks over the 1914–18 period and which had been large fields and open areas for the original European aviation experiments.

The Wright Brothers had brought the aeroplane to Europe as a landplane and that was how it was viewed, with a few experimenters attempting flights from the rivers, such as the Seine.

There had been no such war and no such military aviation in the United States and consequently no purposely constructed landing grounds. Governments had put their money behind military aerodromes in Europe to provide for their new military craft (for which they had shown little or no interest prior to the war) and there was no such requirement in the United States. A number of enlightened towns or states had seen the potential for air services as a result of the US Post Office’s air services, but the sum total of designated aerodromes in the whole of the United States in the 1920s was just over 1000.

The situation was worse in Central America and the Caribbean, with proper landing grounds being virtually nonexistent. The practical necessities of a Caribbean service precluded the use of landplanes, as routes were either over water or across short stretches of land. In most of the countries of the Antilles, West Indies and Central America, landing grounds were mostly of the most primitive type or non-existent. In contrast, the building of harbours for flying-boats was relatively easy and both climate and water conditions were favourable. As Pan American’s route network lengthened, so did its requirement for landing sites. Accordingly Pan American decided to concentrate its

he

Se

a

added for both mail and passengers. The journey took seven hours and fifteen minutes and was the first trans-continental air route in South America. Mail contracts were obtained by NYRBA from the governments of Argentina, Chile and Uruguay.

In November of that year, authorisation was obtained from the Brazilian government to operate within that country; a week later a new route was opened from Buenos Aires to Asuncion, Paraguay. The former US Assistant Secretary of Commerce for Aeronautics, W. P. McCracken, became chairman of the board.

O’Neill bought Ford Tri-Motors for his services, three Sikorsky S-38 amphibians and six Commodore flying-boats from the Consolidated Aircraft Corporation, of which Reuben Fleet was the owner. While the Sikorsky S-38 was an adequate craft, seating eight passengers and offering the dual functions of land and seaplane at the handling point, the Commodore was an advanced new machine which would seat 22 passengers, and represented the first of a new breed of water-borne craft.

above A truly memorable sight for those fortunate enough to experience it – the view from an S-42, somewhere over the Caribbean.

enter tHe Flying-boat The Commodore was originally designed for naval patrol work

by Fleet’s company. It was a sizeable craft for its day, with a wingspan of 100ft (30m), a length of 68ft (21m) and overall height of 16ft (5m). It was powered by two Pratt & Whitney Hornet engines, each developing 575hp, and the gross weight of the aircraft was just under 18,000lb (8200kg). Its designed range was 1000 statute miles (1609km), and with a cruising speed of 100mph (161kmh) and a capability for carrying 22 passengers, the Commodore was, all-in-all, a fine craft. It was a product of the company founded by Reuben Fleet in May 1923, the Consolidated Aircraft Corporation.

Fleet was a self-made businessman with six years’ experience in the US Army Air Service. Later, when war added to the demands for aeroplanes, Consolidated Aircraft Corporation was to become one of the largest aircraft manufacturers in the United States. Like the Trippe family, Fleet’s forebears had their roots in England, and his father had reached the Pacific Northwest by way of Kansas City. After finishing school, Fleet entered the Culver Military Academy in Indiana, graduated in 1906, and for a brief period was a school teacher in Washington. He then started his own business and became a real estate dealer. With his first flight in 1914, he became an immediate convert to flying.

Fleet became a member of the Washington State Legislature and introduced a bill appropriating $250,000 for aviation training in the National Guard. The Bill died, but Fleet had attracted attention and was among 11 men to be chosen for pilot training in the scheme that had come from his Bill. He made his first flight from San Diego in 1917, and joined the military when the United States entered World War I in 1917. He left the Air Service in 1922, during which time he had made an

activities on the water-borne aircraft. The general view in the countries of the region was that if the United States wished to operate air services permission would be granted, but that was all that could be expected from local governments, many of which were generally impoverished and often corrupt.

Pan American’s actions in this area were furthered by a development among the airlines which led to an early takeover and the acquisition of a new fleet for Pan American. In March 1929, a new company was formed in New York called the New York, Rio and Buenos Aires Line, or NYRBA, and this represented a direct challenge to the Aviation Corporation of the Americas. The head of the company was Captain Ralph O’Neill, a former World War I fighter ace and later a Boeing salesman in South America. O’Neill had seen the enormous potential for air transport in that transport-starved continent and had gone to New York to look for backers for his proposed airline. He found them in the form of an impressive collection of industrialists, which included Reuben Fleet of the Consolidated Aircraft Corporation, F. C. Munson of the Munson Steamship Line, W. B. Mayo of the Ford Motor Company, J. E. Reynolds of International Founders and Lewis Pierson of the Irving Trust Company. Pierson brought in his son-in-law Richard Bevier as vice-president, together with J. K. Montgomery. These three had been partners in the original Pan American Airways and had left when Trippe and the AVCO organisation took over their company and began the first flights to Cuba.

In July 1929, a proving flight was made with a Ford TriMotor to Buenos Aires and the first NYRBA scheduled service opened on 21 August 1929 from the Argentine capital to Montevideo. In September, a Buenos Aires–Santiago route was

D

own

T

o

T

he

Se

a

The Pan Am Clipper 297 x 225mm (11¾ x 9”) 112pp 100 b/w photos & 10 line a/ws 35,000 words ISBN: 978-1-78274-604-1 £14.99 Paperback

D

o w n

T

o

T

h e

S

e a

impression on senior officers in the service.

He turned down jobs with aircraft makers William Boeing and Glenn Curtiss, and incorporated the Consolidated Aircraft Corporation in the State of Delaware on 29 May 1923. He gained a first order from the military for twenty TW-3 training aircraft, which on modification was renumbered the PT-1.

A further contract for the PT-1 was placed in 1924, for fifty aircraft, at which point Fleet moved the production facilities to Buffalo, New York, where he took over a former Curtiss factory.

Further orders followed for training aircraft, for the navy as well as army, and by 1927 Consolidated Aircraft was making money. Further military designs followed, including a new bomber, the Guardian, which was a joint venture between Consolidated and Sikorsky, produced when Fleet and Igor Sikorsky had agreed to collaborate on what had been a Sikorsky design. Significantly, Sikorsky, a former competitor of Consolidated, came to play a more significant role with Pan American than did Consolidated. Indeed, Trippe was already using a fleet of Sikorsky S-38s by the time of the NYRBA challenge.

NRYBA was gaining ground in an area which Trippe had already been working hard to call his own, and on 18 February 1930, O’Neill launched the first through service between Miami and Santiago, using the east coast route via Brazil. In a great flourish of publicity he gained the services of no less than Mrs Herbert Hoover, the President’s wife, to christen a Consolidated below In its airline form, the Commodore carried a total of 22 passengers and cruised at 100mph (160kmh). It was used in the Caribbean. above The S-42 was probably Sikorsky’s finest flying-boat. It seated up to 32 passengers and cruised at 150mph (240kmh).

This aircraft served with Pan Am until July 1946.

landing bases than from over-water crossings of great distance.

Trippe had strong political influence in the US Post Office Department, however, and conflict soon arose between NYRBA and Pan American. Pan American held the US mail contracts as far as Paramaribo, Dutch Guiana, and NYRBA found its path blocked for mail and passenger traffic across the gap from Port of Spain, Trinidad, along the chain of islands to Miami.

Relations became strained and conflict continued and reached a critical point. The US Post Master General took issue with NYRBA’s cut-price mail rates. The Post Master General made it clear that he would not award any US mail contract for an east-coast route to Buenos Aires to any other company than Pan American, and with so many countries in the region pledging exclusive allegiance to Pan American, NYRBA’s economic problems mounted. Despite a high standard of operations, NYRBA passenger figures were as limited as its mail traffic and it was actually losing money on its operations.

Pan American did not itself receive US mail rights for the

Commodore for this service. Having begun services with NYRBA in November 1929, the Commodores had already been successful enough for O’Neill to increase his original order for six to fourteen. It might be said that the US Navy’s loss was NYRBA’s gain, for while the navy had turned down the Commodore, Fleet found a ready buyer for a commercial version of the aircraft in NYRBA – the airline in which Fleet was a major investor.

Both Consolidated and NYRBA came out well from this deal: it had a beneficial effect for Consolidated, for it provided work on the 14 aircraft, and the deal gave O’Neill an excellent aircraft for the South American services. The Commodores (whose naval name had been Admiral) had the capability for long ranges which resulted more from the shortage of adequate

71 22

6

a capacity of 7,000,000ft3 (198,000m3) and a length/beam ratio of 5.95/1 for its 800-ft (245-m) hull. liFtiNg the airshiP The hydrogen gas that provided the Zeppelin airships’ lift was contained in the so-called Traggaszellen (‘gas cells’). In the early airships these were made of a heavy cotton fabric covered with a rubber coating. Experience revealed that this combination was too porous to prevent gas escaping from the cells and pooling under the upper part of the outer covering, so the company

accommodation, which now included a pilot’s compartment, the radio operator’s compartment, an officer’s compartment and a position for a defensive machine-gun. The third of the gondola types was of a shorter length and introduced on the LZ95 (naval L48). On the LZ120 Bodensee intended for civil use, the gondola was considerably lengthened to the rear and now included a pilot’s compartment and a passenger section with a lounge and other compartments.

Provision for the crew was altogether more austere, and comprised simple accommodation along the sides of the walkway inside the hull, where provision was made for hammocks to be slung. It was only with the advent of the ocean-crossing airships with their considerably longer endurance that more comfortable provision was made for the crew, who then enjoyed the benefits of sleeping cabins and common rooms.

Other features that came to be added to the standard equipment of Zeppelin airships included electric lighting by an engine-driven generator, and this first appeared in the LZ14 (naval L1) – earlier airships had relied on battery-powered lighting. Radio equipment was first used in the LZ6 (military ZIII), and the standard of flight and navigation equipment steadily improved, ranging from the compass and barometer of the LZ1 to the full suites of equipment typical of the LZ127 and LZ129.

23

24

25

7

Fighting Techniques of a U.S. Marine 1941–1945

The Kriegsmarine david porter

The Kriegsmarine reveals the workings of the German Navy through its organization, command structure, economic resources, production figures, recruitment, training and philosophy. Broken down by campaigns and subject areas, the book includes reference tables, diagrams, maps and charts, presenting all the core data in easy-to-follow formats. This is an essential reference guide for anyone interested in the history and structure of Germany’s wartime navy.

Leo J. Daugherty III

Fighting Techniques of a US Marine 1941–1945 is a detailed examination of how the individual Marine operated during World War II, the organisation of Marine units, and the weapons and equipment used, illustrating why the Corps was such a powerful force in the Pacific. Detailed artworks show the uniforms and other equipment worn by Marines throughout the conflict.

Fighting Techniques of a U.S. Marine 1941–1945 285 x 213mm (11¼ x 8¼in) 96 pages 35,000 words 50 artworks, 40 photographs ISBN: 978-1-78274-601-0 £14.99 Paperback

su b m a rines o f th e Krieg sm a rine Marine Battlefield tactics and techniques, 1942–1945

that war, as found later in the US Army’s landmark 1923 FSRs and IDRs. As the nature of the fighting shifted from the jungles of the Solomon Islands to the coral atolls and volcanic islands of the Central Pacific, the fighting came to resemble more and more that endured by the Marines during World War I.

Jungle Fighting and Small unit OperatiOnS, 1942–1943

Japanese defences on part of the island of Tarawa as identified by the intelligence section of the 2nd Marine Division prior to the attack on 20 November 1943. Every inch of the beach was covered by sandbags and barricades.

Wire guns ine mach vy hea anD

forged an effective combined arms team which was capable of

guns

anti -boat

dealing with most Japanese threats.

(1.6 /bo to

ft

at

3in )

gu

ns

W

ns

bomb-proof barracks

D

he

av

y

mac

hi

ne

gu

e

ir

bomb-proof ammo storage

Drainage or

anti-tank

Ditch

an

ti

airstrip

ns

-ta

nk

at

machine gun 5in (127mm) naval turrets

bomb-proof ammo storage

machine

Wir

e

e guns

anti-boat guns anD heavy machine guns

anti-boat

gun

heavy machin guns anD

Versailles). The Type I later served as a basis for the development of other classes, primarily the Type VII and the Type IX. The two Type IA boats, U-25 and U-26, were commissioned in the spring of 1936, serving as training vessels. Despite their technical limitations, they were both brought

into operational use in 1939 due to the shortage of later submarines.

Both boats had short but successful combat careers. U-25 made five war patrols, sinking eight enemy ships. On 3 August 1940, while on a minelaying mission near Norway, U-25 struck a mine and sank with all hands.

U-26 carried out eight war patrols,

right to the front line by dropping them underneath the hull from inside the tank, as well as assisting in the evacuation of wounded Marines, placed aboard through the crew’s escape hatches in the bottom of the tank, or, less safely, strapped onto the outside of the tank.

Marine tanks played an important role in cracking the Japanese defensive line anchored on Kunishi Ridge through their elimination of Japanese General Ushijima’s veteran front-line troops that had manned these positions. Also supporting the Marines was the M-7 Priest self-propelled 105mm (4.1in) howitzer, that added more firepower to a Marine assault with its ability to ‘punch through’ the many steel and concrete bunkers and pillboxes along the Shuri Castle–Sugar Loaf Mountain areas. On Okinawa, tanks functioned as the supreme ‘direct-fire, close-in support weapon’ for the assaulting infantry. Tanks could go where artillery couldn’t, and destroy what the latter couldn’t see.

By the battle’s end, 51 Marine Shermans had been destroyed by Japanese artillery and anti-tank guns. Despite

the fact that the Sherman found itself outgunned in Europe, at least by the more powerful German Tiger and Panther tanks, Marines skillfully employed their tanks very effectively as infantry assault weapons. Furthermore, for those tanks disabled though not destroyed, Marine maintenance crews worked round the clock and restored practically every one of them, and, as a result of their ingenuity, ‘the assault infantry battalions never lacked for armored firepower, mobility, and shock action. The concept of Marine combined-arms task forces was now well underway.’

240 x 189mm (9½ x 7½”) 192pp 50,000 words 150 photos, diagrams and maps ISBN: 978-1-78274-596-9 £19.99 Paperback

u - b o a t o pera tio ns

u-boat ope rat ions

Type II U-boats The principal characteristic of the

unsuccessful. They underwent a severe test during their first operation, but despite negligible successes, the operations were of the greatest value.

‘All the defects which might never have been discovered in the Baltic showed up under the severe conditions in the Hoofden and can thus be corrected.… They

Type II was its tiny size. Known as the Einbaum (Dugout Canoe), it had some advantages over larger boats, as it could operate more safely in shallow water, dive more quickly, and was difficult to spot when surfaced due to the low conning tower. However, it had a shallower maximum diving depth,

Type IIA speed: 12.8km/h (6.9 knots) Type IIB speed: 13km/h (7 knots) Type IID speed: 13.7km/h (7.4 knots) Type I speed: 15.4km/h (8.3 knots)

5m

0m

10m

20m

30m

40m

50m

60m

70m

80m

90m

0m

0m

10m

20m

30m

40m

50m

60m

70m

80m

90m

100m

15m 10m Type IIB length: 42.7m (140ft 1in)

24 5m 24

Type IID

0m Torpedoes Type I Type IIA Type IIB Type IID

10m

20m

30m

40m

10m 2

50m

60m

70m

80m

90m

100m

60m

70m

80m

90m

100m

15m

Completed Type I Type IIA Type IIB Type IID

0m

20m

14

5 5 5

Type IID length: 44m (144ft)

5m

6

20 16

14 16

March 9

April 4

May

12

June

14

July

17

0m

0m

10m

20m

30m

40m

50m

32

8 4

October

5 11

December

U-BOAT SUCCESS IN TONNES (1944)

As early as February 1944, 10 new Type VIIC U-boats earmarked for operations in the Atlantic were diverted to Norwegian bases in response to Allied deception measures that hinted at dual assaults against France and occupied Scandinavia. These formed Gruppe Mitte, which was reinforced by a further 12 boats in March. Also in March, Gruppe Landwirt with 15 Type VIIC boats was formed at Brest to provide a striking force to counter the anticipated crossChannel invasion. The Gruppe was steadily reinforced over the next few months, totalling 36 boats immediately before D-Day. Including boats at sea, a total of 73 U-boats were within range of the massive Allied invasion fleet on 6 June 1944, but crucially only 25 of these were fitted with Schnorchel.

Dönitz was on leave when news of the Normandy landings came through

20m

Type IIB

11

January February

November

100m

Type IIA length: 40.9m (134ft 2in)

5m

46

U-BOAT SUCCESSES (1944)

September

As Dönitz impatiently awaited the re-equipment of all front-line U-boats with the Schnorchel, increasing evidence of the build-up of Allied invasion forces put paid to his hopes of renewing the battle against the Atlantic convoys.

Type IA length: 72.5m (237ft 10in)

10m

24

expected to score considerable successes.’ The reality was very different – in the entire period from 1 January 1945 to the war’s end, manned torpedoes and midget submarines made 254 sorties from their Dutch bases. They lost 102 of their number and sank just 15 merchant vessels totalling 18,078 tonnes (17,792 tons).

August

10m

15m

Complement Type I

have been found to be relatively immune to depth charges because, due to their shape, they offer so little resistance. They are tossed aside like a cork instead of being damaged.… The crews have gained considerable confidence in their equipment and future mass operations of Seehunde under favourable weather conditions are

Final Operations, 1944–45

15m

20m

Submerged SpeedSubmerged Speed

Type IID speed: 23.5km/h (12.7 knots) Type IIA speed: 24km/h (13 knots) Type IIB speed: 24km/h (13 knots)

Type IIA

‘Find’em, Fix’em, and BlaSt’em’ taCtiCS, 1943–1945 In order to counter the overwhelming fire superiority of the Americans, the Japanese, starting on Guadalcanal, as 1stLt Herb Merillat recounted above, retreated to fixed positions and fortifications. This then involved both Marines and soldiers in a costly war of attrition that did not let up until the war’s conclusion in August 1945. In fact, this strategy of attrition became evident as the earlier Japanese tactics of contesting the Marine’s landings gave way to a defencein-depth, with a series of interlocking fortifications and pillboxes built into a solid defensive network. This first

sinking 11 Allied vessels and damaging two others. It was scuttled on 1 July 1940 after sustaining severe damage from attacks by the Flowerclass corvette HMS Gladiolus and an RAAF Sunderland flying boat.

20m

0m

m

ra

an

The submarine was based on the Finnish Vetehinen class and the Spanish Type E-1, both of which were designed by Ingenieurskantoor voor Scheepsbouw (the Dutch dummy company set up by the Reichsmarineamt in 1922 to develop U-boat technology and to circumvent the limitations set by the Treaty of

Surface Speed

mid-1943. Close cooperation between the tanks and Marines

rc

stores

gu

Type IA U-boats The Type I U-boat was the outcome of the first attempt to produce an ocean-going submarine for the Kriegsmarine. Only two, designated Type IA, were completed, as service trials revealed poor seaworthiness and an inability to dive quickly, coupled with mechanical unreliability.

Above: A Marine tank–infantry team in action on Bougainville in

40 ant to i-ai 75 m

i-bo

Guadalcanal Tactically, the Guadalcanal campaign vindicated Marine training, which focused on small unit operations with the emphasis being on initiative and tactical flexibility. Thus, the tactics employed by Marines were primarily lineal in nature due to the defensive nature of the campaign.

According to Sergeant George MacGillivray, who served on a 37mm (1.45in) gun crew, the nature of the fighting usually involved units no larger than companies and as small as squads. In fact, for the Marines who fought there

observation

ns

Marine Corps, however, and with the issuance of the E-Tables of Organization, the Marine rifle team went from four to six men, with the average Marine squad being twelve Marines: squad leader, six riflemen, and two BAR and two assistant BAR men, all armed with M-1 Garands or BARs. All Marine formations had been organized on the triangular organization of three squads per platoon, three platoons per company, three companies per battalion, and three battalions per regiment, and finally three regiments plus supporting arms per division.

Conventional U-boats came close to winning the Battle of the Atlantic in 1940–43 but were defeated by increasingly effective Allied counter-measures. In an attempt to regain the initiative, German naval yards produced highly sophisticated vessels, which were to influence submarine design for the next 50 years.

Type I speed: 34.4km/h (18.6 knots)

to

moved to open coral atolls such as Tarawa.

(3.2 gu ft m 5m ra 10 airc i-

were common in the early part of the war, before the fighting

against sudden Japanese banzai attacks or artillery fire.

The foxholes were intended to protect most of a Marine’s

U-boats

part of the island, where the Japanese were dug in along the Shuri Castle line, its open-country terrain permitted a greater use of all three arms – tanks, artillery or mortars, and infantry.

Supported by an attached Army 4.2in (107mm) mortar unit, which provided highly-effective suppressive firepower, the tanks of the 1st Marine Division and its supporting infantry were able to close in at greater quarters with the Japanese, and prevented them from using their suicide squads against the Marine tanks. In fact, working with Lieutenant Colonel ‘Jeb’ Stuart’s 1st Tank Battalion, the Marines ‘developed a new method of protecting tanks and reducing vulnerability to the infantry in the assault’. This method, according to Marine Colonel Wilburt S. Brown, ‘placed an artillery observer in one of the tanks with a radio to one of the 155mm [6.1in] howitzer battalions. We’d also had an aerial observer overhead. We used 75mm [2.95in] pack [howitzers] and LVT-A’s [armed with 75mm howitzers] that had an air burst capability. If any Jap [suicider] showed anywhere we opened fire with an air burst and kept a pattern of shell fragments patterning down around the tanks.’ Marine tanks likewise shuttled fresh troops

to

One- or two-man foxholes gave Marines protection

two decades later, Guadalcanal closely resembled Vietnam, which was also a war waged by small units. Marines, armed with rifles, bayonets, hand grenades, mortars, machine guns, and 37mm anti-tank guns – used primarily as antipersonnel weapons and normally against bunkers – fought off daily Japanese banzai attacks or sought out the elusive Japanese snipers, and engaged in constant patrolling.

From the start, Marine infantry and artillery commanders effectively used the terrain on Guadalcanal to their advantage in order to maximize the effectiveness of their weapons. Thus, Marine positions were usually dug in and anchored along the rivers and ravines that bisected the main line of resistance located at Henderson Airfield, and allowed the leathernecks to effectively employ all of their firepower.

Marines on Guadalcanal and on Tulagi likewise developed countermeasures to deal with Japanese positions carved into the sides of ridge lines and in caves. As would be the case later in the war on Peleliu, Iwo Jima, and Okinawa, Marines belonging to the 1st Raider Battalion, commanded

by Colonel Merritt A. Edson, spent the majority of the fighting on Guadalcanal and Tulagi destroying Japanese machine guns that had been built inside the mouths of caves, blasting them with satchel charges of dynamite and explosives or canisters of gasoline with grenades attached.

Marine First Lieutenant Herbert L. Merillat provided an

su b m a rines o f th e Krieg sm a rine

The Kriegsmarine

75

Marine Battlefield tactics and techniques, 1942–1945

80 ) ant in

Above: A Marine rifle squad fords a stream on Guadalcanal in

Two-man foxhole

Marine Battlefield tactics and techniques, 1942–1945

Okinawa It was on Okinawa, in fact, that Marines refined their tank– infantry tactics, and successfully employed two techniques that further enhanced the striking power of both these Marine arms. As the Marines pushed toward the southern

For Marines, Guadalcanal was a war of small unit operations.

Indeed, many of the tactical innovations used by the Marines had been used by their predecessors in France, in Central America, primarily in Nicaragua, and on the islands of Haiti and the Dominican Republic during the interwar era. Even with the deployment to China in the 1920s and 1930s, as Marines guarded the US legation’s compound, the leathernecks developed the basic tactical formation of a rifle company comprised of three rifle platoons composed of six fighting teams of four Marines each. Each fire team was led by a senior private or junior non-commissioned officer, and due to its tactical flexibility could be employed in an independent action. Upon the expansion of the

body whilst allowing him to aim and fire his weapon easily.

74

front of a critical area or, as was the case on Okinawa, could assist in the exploitation of a wavering enemy line of defence, and thus allow the Marines to follow through quickly with an attack. During the Okinawa campaign Private Jack Wiggins, who served with the 29th Marines during the fighting on the Oroku Peninsula and rode into battle atop a Sherman tank, stated: ‘Once dismounted, we could then direct and exploit their firepower to the utmost against the Japs.’

mid-August 1942. For the Marines, jungle conditions such as this

One-man foxhole

67

4.1

War I proved anything, the battlefield had been dominated by the artillery and machine gun, and in assault after assault, ‘Again, was decisively shown the great importance of artillery to infantry. Infantry alone without material, makes little progress. If the enemy combines personnel and material, we must do the same or lose the game.’ In a direct parallel to the fighting on Tarawa (1943) and later during the savage fighting on Saipan and Peleliu in 1944, and on Iwo Jima and Okinawa in 1945, the Marine Brigade lost 112 officers and 4598 men in one month’s fighting in Belleau Wood. With such losses, and with the nature of the open warfare fighting that General John J. Pershing and other American commanders insisted upon, Marine officers concluded at the war’s end that the battles they participated in during the fighting offered many lessons for the operational and tactical nature of future wars. In fact, the US Army later incorporated many of these same lessons in its 1923 Field Service Regulations (FSRs) and Infantry Drill Regulations (IDRs) that Marines studied and trained by during the interwar era. Thus when the US Marines Corps entered World War II, many of its senior officers had either seen combat in France during the last war, or had been well-grounded in the tactical and doctrinal lessons of

Marine Battlefield tactics and techniques, 1942–1945

ant

66

WORLD WAR II GERMANY:

33

but immediately returned to his HQ, ‘Koralle’, near Berlin, ordering 17 of Gruppe Landwirt’s boats to attack invasion shipping whilst the remainder patrolled the Bay of Biscay to guard against further possible landings on the French Atlantic coast.

He also issued a typically forthright order to their commanders: ‘Every enemy vessel supporting the landing, even though it may be carrying only 50 men or a tank, is a target. Press home your attack, even at the cost of your boat. Should it be necessary to close with the enemy landing fleet, pay no regard to the danger of shallow water, mines or other hazards. Each soldier and each weapon destroyed before reaching the beachhead diminishes the enemy’s chance of victory. A U-Boat which inflicts losses on the invasion forces fulfils her highest mission and justifies her existence, even though she herself may be destroyed.’

A losing battle All Dönitz’s rhetoric could not alter the impossible odds that the U-boats faced – by early July, 10 U-boats had been sunk whilst attempting to attack the stream of supply traffic to the Normandy beachheads, and virtually all the survivors had been damaged. They had sunk two frigates, four freighters and one tank landing ship, besides damaging a frigate and a freighter – a tiny fraction of the Allied shipping supporting the invasion forces.

Overwhelming Allied air and sea power had secured the crossChannel sea lanes, and on 5 July Allied forces in Normandy passed the one million mark.

The Allied breakout from the Normandy beachhead in August forced most of Gruppe Landwirt‘s boats to evacuate the Biscay bases and head for the relative security of Norway. Seven Schnorchel-equipped

100,000

96,241 (94,721 tons) 76,017 (74,816 tons)

92,922 (91,454 tons)

67,103 (66,043 tons)

62,380 58,327 (61,395 tons) (57,406 tons)

63,146 (62,149 tons)

50,000

54,123 (53,268 tons)

51,605 (50,790 tons)

24,815 (24,423 tons)

25,597 (25,193 tons) 1685 (1659 tons)

0 January

February

March

April

May

June

July

August

Admiralty report: ‘By mid-December the U-boat campaign had gradually changed since August 1944 into a condition of stalemate in the inshore operational areas. Both sides had made technical advances which tended to cancel each other out. The U-boats had adopted the snorkel and possessed an efficient search receiver which together nullified the improved airborne radar … and the increased concentration on flying A/S patrols.… U-boats had, by the end of 1944, become almost immune from detection or attack while on passage to and from the British Isles.

boats sortied from Norwegian bases to cover the withdrawal, only one of which, U-482, achieved any success, sinking four merchant vessels and a corvette. Its achievement prompted Dönitz to adopt the strategy of the ‘inshore campaign’ for the rest of the war – an offensive against the mass of shipping in British coastal waters.

This was feasible only for Schnorchelequipped boats which, to everyone’s surprise, proved they could operate in such a heavily defended area without suffering crippling losses.

The situation at the end of the year was summed up by a post-war

September

October

November

December

When they reached their inshore operating areas, they could exist for lengthy periods without molestation as long as they committed no hostile act. It was only when they attacked and hit a target that surface craft were provided with a datum point for an immediate retributive hunt and counter-attack.’

Tables turned The point that the U-boats’ relatively immunity was dependent upon their not attacking was the main factor in limiting losses to Allied shipping during this period. Between August

100

101

The Luftwaffe S. Mike Pavelec

The Italian Front

The Luftwaffe reveals the workings of the German Air Force through its command structure, economic resources, production figures, recruitment, training and philosophy.

Broken down by campaigns and subject areas, the book includes reference tables and maps, presenting all the core data in easy-to-follow formats. The Luftwaffe is an essential reference guide for anyone interested in the history and structure of Germany’s wartime air force.

michael e. haskew

The Italian Front is a superbly illustrated history of the original ‘second front’ in Europe, including artworks of key materiel and uniforms, and campaign maps showing the movement of troops in the theatre.

With detailed appendices containing orders of battle, losses and equipment, The Italian Front builds into a comprehensive account of the 194445 campaign in Western Europe.

Campaigns of World War II:

The Italian Front

297 x 227mm (11¾ x 9in) 256 pages 70,000 words 45 artworks, 230 b/w photos, 10 colour maps ISBN: 978-1-78274-606-5 £22.99 Paperback

INVa SIO N O F pO LaND tO th e FaLL O F Fra Nce

INVa SIO N O F pO LaND tO th e FaLL O F Fra Nce

Invasion of Poland, September 1939 On the morning of 1 September 1939, German tanks rolled across the Polish border and Luftwaffe planes flew attack missions into Poland. Two weeks later, the Soviets attacked Poland from the other side; Poland was doomed.

122 / Anzio and Monte Cassino

Anzio and Monte Cassino / 123

Chapter six

they were confronted only by the 94th Division, which was thinly stretched from the river to the town of Terracina 48km (30 miles) to the north and had yet to experience combat. In planning their defences the German commanders had hoped that the natural barrier of the river itself and 24,000 thickly sown mines might provide enough assistance to stymie a crossing. The attack commenced at 9 p.m. and combat engineers worked to clear the mines and mark exits on the far bank while German artillery came

Anzio and Monte Cassino The attempt to outflank the Germans at Cassino by landing at Anzio ended in failure as the Allies became bogged down in the beachhead.

down steadily. It was virtually impossible to construct bridges during the first 24 hours.

Nevertheless, 10 full battalions of infantry crossed the Garigliano and Senger soon began to realize the gravity of the situation. Bypassing Vietinghoff in the chain of command, Senger telephoned Kesselring, who realized a British breakthrough to the Liri Valley would outflank the defences of Monte Cassino, unhinge the Gustav Line and force a retreat of the entire XIV Panzer Corps toward Rome.

which had been the tactic of World War I, the Germans reconceived warfare, incorporating the latest technology. Air units coordinated by radio combined with fast-moving mechanized ground units (armoured and motorized) to penetrate deep into enemy territory, avoiding pockets of resistance and cutting off front-line troops from supply and command. This ‘lightning war’, defined by surprise, manoeuvre and coordination, worked best against an acquiescent adversary, and came to define the German way of war in subsequent years. Also known as Combined Arms Warfare, these methods aimed at attacking enemy weak points with overwhelming force and exploiting gains quickly. The combined attacks on Poland, with

The Luftwaffe began the campaign with an assortment of aircraft: strategic bombers, air-superiority fighters and dive-bombers. The collection totalled 4000 aircraft: 1200 fighters – Messerschmitt Bf 109s and 110s; 1200 medium bombers – Heinkel He 111s and Dornier Do 17s; about 400 Junkers Ju 87 divebombers; and around 1200 transport, reconnaissance, liaison and obsolete types, the last-mentioned of which were being phased out but were still useful against the outclassed Polish air effort.

Lightning war The new German battle doctrine of Blitzkrieg was put to the test. Instead of sending massive numbers of men into the attack across a wide front,

Panzers (tanks) spearheading the attack and supported from the air, were incredibly successful against the Polish forces, who were simply unprepared for the German onslaught.

In the opening phases of the battle for Poland, German Panzer units supported by Luftwaffe bombers and dive-bombers drove deep behind Polish forces, cutting n Number of Luftwaffe squadrons

prepared for operations September 1939. At this early stage of the war, the number of observation and bombing squadrons were higher than fighter squadrons; German

them off. Further German infantry then moved in to clean up the rear areas, gathering prisoners. If the Germans encountered strongholds, the Luftwaffe targeted them with bombers. This method of warfare proved extremely successful.

Luftflotten 1 and 4 were the two main commands in the Polish campaign. Twenty Kampfgeschwader (bomber groups) of He 111 and Do 17 aircraft faced Poland, ready to bomb it into submission. There were also five Stukageschwader (Stuka groups), flying Ju 87s at the point of the Blitzkrieg spear. Polish forces facing them were primarily unmechanized ground troops.

Without a viable air weapon, and with few anti-tank weapons, the Poles were outmatched in the sky

and on the ground. With the Germans attacking out of Germany, occupied Czechoslovakia and East Prussia, Poland faced a triple threat.

Type

INVa SIO N O F pO LaND tO th e FaLL O F Fra Nce

S

ergeant Ross Carter, a veteran of the arduous campaign in Italy, observed Christmas Day 1944 amid the misery of battle-scarred Monte Sammucro. Below, the town of San Pietro lay in ruins, its destruction so thorough that the surviving civilians did not bother to salvage much of anything. They rebuilt their town some distance away, leaving the heaps of rubble and jumbled remains of their former homes as mute testimony to the ravages of war.

‘For 17 days, we had existed on the peak,’ wrote Carter, ‘in freezing weather, constant rain, icy winds and inconceivable danger. In all that time we had never washed our hands or shaved, and had managed to get our boots off three times. Lice were eating the hide off our bodies and desperation was eating out our hearts.’

The desperation in the Allied ranks was, to a degree, being felt on a strategic scale as the frustrating advance toward Rome proceeded at a snail’s pace. Progress had been slow, even at times non-existent. The prospects for immediate forward movement seemed to be fleeting at best as the bulk of Allied resources were funnelled to England in preparation for the Normandy invasion. For all intents and purposes the Italian campaign had reached a stalemate. By mid-December the Fifth Army offensive had ground to a halt, while the

8

Marked with the distinctive black cross, the German SdKfz Marder II selfpropelled assault weapon was armed with a 75mm (2.95in) cannon and a light machine gun. This version remained in production until 1944.

Eighth Army remained before the Gustav Line defences north of the Sangro River around Ortona.

Although it had appeared that an amphibious operation intended to outflank the Gustav Line defences and facilitate the drive for Rome had been cancelled for good, the stillborn Operation Shingle was rapidly revived as a result of two events, the restructuring of command in the Mediterranean with a distinctive British perspective and the illness of Prime Minister Winston Churchill. The Italian campaign had long been Churchill’s favourite, and the Mediterranean Theatre was of particular interest to him. Well aware that the window of opportunity for a notable success in Italy was rapidly closing, Churchill departed the conferences at Cairo and Teheran decidedly pessimistic about the prosecution of the war there.

Churchill in turmoil Physically exhausted, the Prime Minister was diagnosed with pneumonia while in Tunis to visit General Eisenhower’s headquarters on 11 December. During a week in bed he was consumed with worry and finally decided that something must be done to rejuvenate the campaign in Italy. The solution, he reasoned, was the amphibious operation. His sights set

opposite

An American infantryman takes up a position in the ruins of a house at Monte Cassino. The Allies attempted four times to take the heights and the Benedictine abbey which crowned it.

undefended Cedro Hill after failing to capture it four days earlier, and two tough days of fighting by the 168th Infantry, 34th Division secured Cervaro after a lengthy artillery bombardment and air strikes. Now, Clark’s army was drawn up to the banks of the Rapido, facing the heart of the Gustav Line defences, which were located beyond the opposite bank of the stream. Approximately 90,000 troops of the German XIV Panzer Corps were entrenched in the positions around Cassino, along the river and in the vicinity of Sant’ Ambrogio.

2564

airfields were quickly destroyed, and the few fighters they had, were shot down. In the first few days of the war, the Polish Air Force ceased to exist. Over 800 aircraft (of which no more than 400 were modern types for combat operations) were either shot down or destroyed on the ground.

In ground combat, the Blitzkrieg tactics were also successful. The Poles had little defence against either the German dive-bombers or

0m

4m

8m

10m

12m

14m

16m

18m

20m

0m

0m

2m

4m

6m

8m

10m

12m

14m

16m

18m

with a wary eye.

Dornier Do 17Z length: 15.79m (51ft 9in)

0m

2m

4m

6m

8m

10m

12m

14m

16m

18m

20m

Polish PZL P.11 length: 7.55m (24ft 9in)

366

Combat record The record of the Luftwaffe in the Polish campaign was instructive; many lessons emerged. Strategic bombing of Polish cities had been successful in terms of the

had been victorious, the Germans had learned valuable lessons about attrition, tactics and the need for increased production.

n Poland lost 335 aircraft in the

campaign – most of its air force. The Germans lost 281 aircraft shot down, and another 263 or 273 (depending on source) damaged, only 70 of which could be repaired.

POLISH AnD GErMAn AIrCrAFT LOSSES COMPArED POLAnD

400 0m

20

destruction caused but had brought with it a cost. In addition, the highintensity combat of Blitzkrieg, as well as air combat with the Polish Air Force, indicated the high attrition rate of modern warfare. Even flying against the Poles, with their inferior anti-aircraft weapons and obsolete aircraft, the Germans incurred high losses. Over the course of the fourweek campaign, the Germans lost 281 aircraft of all types in combat while accounting for the destruction of 335 Polish planes. While they

20m

4m

0m

He 111E

0m Wing Span

2m

4m

6m

8m

Ju 87

Do 17E

16.3m (53ft 4in)

212 18m (59ft)

Do 17Z 119 18

40 P.11

40

Germans, the latter turning their 43

12m

14m 16m Maximum Speed

18m

20m

13.8m (45ft 3in)

Bf 110C

Do 17M Ju 88 Hs 123

10m

335

GErMAny recce

63

Bf 109

349

38

Do 17Z

40 27

204

command for the Polish campaign.

Above are the numbers and types of aircraft ready for operations against the Poles in September 1939.

4m

He 111P

90

65

254

n Luftflotte 2 was the organizational Messerschmitt Bf 110C length: 12.3m (40ft 6in)

Ju 87

blitzkrieg combined arms attacks.

27

Fighter squadrons

42

6m

2m

bayonets and grenades While the fighting heated up in the east, the Eighth Army sector on the Adriatic remained quiet, and it was conceivable that if Clark’s offensive succeeded reinforcements could be forthcoming from the area of inactivity.

On 12 January the 2nd Moroccan and 3rd Algerian divisions were launched against the mountains north of Cassino.

Under French command, these units gained 6.4km (4 miles) in four days, often fighting hand-to-hand with the Germans. Bayonets and grenades were frequently employed at close distances. Vietinghoff decided to abandon nearby Mount Trocchio without a fight so that Senger would have adequate forces to contest a river crossing and defend the entrance to the Liri Valley.

When the British 5th and 56th divisions launched an assault by boat and amphibious DUKWs across the Garigliano on 17 January

2m

2m

13

Pursuit-interceptor squadrons Ground-attack squadrons 3 Weather recce squadrons 1 naval aviation squadrons

0m

4m

2m

Dive-bomber squadrons

45

13

Bf 109

He 111

55

Bomber squadrons

Hs 126 He 45 Do 17

Junkers Ju 87 length: 11m (36ft)

2m

twin-engine bombers were effective as the front line of attack in German

reconnaissance squadrons Staff units

LUFTFLOTTE 2 AIrCrAFT STrEnGTH (SEPTEMBEr 1939)

4m

302 2370

Operational combat aircraft

LUFTWAFFE BOMBEr, DIvE-BOMBEr & GrOUnD-ATTACk AIrCrAFT STrEnGTH (SEPTEMBEr 1939)

He 111H

reported missing and more than 500 were lost to exposure to the elements and such maladies as trench foot. Most of the missing armoured infantrymen eventually turned up, but among the dead was a heroic combat engineer sergeant, Joe C. Specker.

Advancing along the slope of Mount Porchia under cover of darkness, Specker had been sent forward by his company commander on a reconnaissance of enemy positions in his unit’s path. When he returned Specker reported that a German machine gun nest and several snipers were located directly in the path of his company. He volunteered to take a machine gun forward to place fire on the German positions and set out alone with the weapon and a box of ammunition.

The sergeant’s Medal of Honour citation reads: ‘He was observed by the enemy as he walked along and was severely wounded by the deadly fire directed at him. Though so seriously wounded that he was unable to walk, he continued to drag himself over the jagged edges of rock and rough terrain until he reached the position at which he desired to set up his machine gun. He set up the gun so well and fired so accurately that the enemy machine gun nest was silenced and the remainder of the snipers forced to retire, enabling his platoon to obtain their objective.

SGT Specker was found dead at his gun.

His personal bravery, self sacrifice, and determination were an inspiration to his officers and fellow soldiers.’

British troops subsequently occupied an

INVaSION OF pOLaND t O t he FaLL OF FraNce

Total

ready crews

LUFTWAFFE SqUADrOn STrEnGTH (AUGUST 1939) above

240 x 189mm (9½ x 7½”) 192pp 50,000 words 150 photos, diagrams and maps ISBN: 978-1-78274-597-6 £19.99 Paperback

POLISH CAMPAIGn AIrCrAFT COMPArED

LUFTWAFFE STrEnGTH (SEPTEMBEr 1939) Staffeln

Airfields bombed The Luftwaffe’s primary targets were Polish airfields. For the Luftwaffe to gain (and maintain) air supremacy, the Polish Air Force would have to be destroyed. Fighters covered the bombers as the Polish airfields were targeted. Many Polish planes were caught on the ground on the opening day, and as the conflagration opened, the Polish Air Force was destroyed. Its PZL aircraft were hopelessly outclassed by the German Bf 109 fighters, but a few were able to harass the German bombers.

Unfortunately for the Poles, their

WORLD WAR II GERMANY:

The Luftwaffe

46

10.72m (35ft 2in)

attentions westwards while the

Ju 87 speed: 390km/h (242mph) P.11 speed: 390km/h (242mph) Do 17Z speed: 425km/h (263mph) Bf 110C speed: 560km/h (348mph)

Bf 110 Do 17 He 111 Ju 87 Hs 123 Transport naval Damaged

67

12

12

30 14

17

44

22

70/263

former watched German intentions 47

leFt

The devastation of war is apparent in this view of the shattered wreckage of an Italian village. Only the bell tower of a church remains standing, and the ruins still smoulder.

9

Fighting Techniques of a U.S. Marine 1941–1945

The Kriegsmarine david porter

The Kriegsmarine reveals the workings of the German Navy through its organization, command structure, economic resources, production figures, recruitment, training and philosophy. Broken down by campaigns and subject areas, the book includes reference tables, diagrams, maps and charts, presenting all the core data in easy-to-follow formats. This is an essential reference guide for anyone interested in the history and structure of Germany’s wartime navy.

Leo J. Daugherty III

Fighting Techniques of a US Marine 1941–1945 is a detailed examination of how the individual Marine operated during World War II, the organisation of Marine units, and the weapons and equipment used, illustrating why the Corps was such a powerful force in the Pacific. Detailed artworks show the uniforms and other equipment worn by Marines throughout the conflict.

Fighting Techniques of a U.S. Marine 1941–1945 285 x 213mm (11¼ x 8¼in) 96 pages 35,000 words 50 artworks, 40 photographs ISBN: 978-1-78274-601-0 £14.99 Paperback

su b m a rines o f th e Krieg sm a rine Marine Battlefield tactics and techniques, 1942–1945

that war, as found later in the US Army’s landmark 1923 FSRs and IDRs. As the nature of the fighting shifted from the jungles of the Solomon Islands to the coral atolls and volcanic islands of the Central Pacific, the fighting came to resemble more and more that endured by the Marines during World War I.

Jungle Fighting and Small unit OperatiOnS, 1942–1943

Japanese defences on part of the island of Tarawa as identified by the intelligence section of the 2nd Marine Division prior to the attack on 20 November 1943. Every inch of the beach was covered by sandbags and barricades.

Wire guns ine mach vy hea anD

forged an effective combined arms team which was capable of

guns

anti -boat

dealing with most Japanese threats.

(1.6 /bo to

ft

at

3in )

gu

ns

W

ns

bomb-proof barracks

D

he

av

y

mac

hi

ne

gu

e

ir

bomb-proof ammo storage

Drainage or

anti-tank

Ditch

an

ti

airstrip

ns

-ta

nk

at

machine gun 5in (127mm) naval turrets

bomb-proof ammo storage

machine

Wir

e

e guns

anti-boat guns anD heavy machine guns

anti-boat

gun

heavy machin guns anD

Versailles). The Type I later served as a basis for the development of other classes, primarily the Type VII and the Type IX. The two Type IA boats, U-25 and U-26, were commissioned in the spring of 1936, serving as training vessels. Despite their technical limitations, they were both brought

into operational use in 1939 due to the shortage of later submarines.

Both boats had short but successful combat careers. U-25 made five war patrols, sinking eight enemy ships. On 3 August 1940, while on a minelaying mission near Norway, U-25 struck a mine and sank with all hands.

U-26 carried out eight war patrols,

right to the front line by dropping them underneath the hull from inside the tank, as well as assisting in the evacuation of wounded Marines, placed aboard through the crew’s escape hatches in the bottom of the tank, or, less safely, strapped onto the outside of the tank.

Marine tanks played an important role in cracking the Japanese defensive line anchored on Kunishi Ridge through their elimination of Japanese General Ushijima’s veteran front-line troops that had manned these positions. Also supporting the Marines was the M-7 Priest self-propelled 105mm (4.1in) howitzer, that added more firepower to a Marine assault with its ability to ‘punch through’ the many steel and concrete bunkers and pillboxes along the Shuri Castle–Sugar Loaf Mountain areas. On Okinawa, tanks functioned as the supreme ‘direct-fire, close-in support weapon’ for the assaulting infantry. Tanks could go where artillery couldn’t, and destroy what the latter couldn’t see.

By the battle’s end, 51 Marine Shermans had been destroyed by Japanese artillery and anti-tank guns. Despite

the fact that the Sherman found itself outgunned in Europe, at least by the more powerful German Tiger and Panther tanks, Marines skillfully employed their tanks very effectively as infantry assault weapons. Furthermore, for those tanks disabled though not destroyed, Marine maintenance crews worked round the clock and restored practically every one of them, and, as a result of their ingenuity, ‘the assault infantry battalions never lacked for armored firepower, mobility, and shock action. The concept of Marine combined-arms task forces was now well underway.’

240 x 189mm (9½ x 7½”) 192pp 50,000 words 150 photos, diagrams and maps ISBN: 978-1-78274-596-9 £19.99 Paperback

u - b o a t o pera tio ns

u-boat ope rat ions

Type II U-boats The principal characteristic of the

unsuccessful. They underwent a severe test during their first operation, but despite negligible successes, the operations were of the greatest value.

‘All the defects which might never have been discovered in the Baltic showed up under the severe conditions in the Hoofden and can thus be corrected.… They

Type II was its tiny size. Known as the Einbaum (Dugout Canoe), it had some advantages over larger boats, as it could operate more safely in shallow water, dive more quickly, and was difficult to spot when surfaced due to the low conning tower. However, it had a shallower maximum diving depth,

Type IIA speed: 12.8km/h (6.9 knots) Type IIB speed: 13km/h (7 knots) Type IID speed: 13.7km/h (7.4 knots) Type I speed: 15.4km/h (8.3 knots)

5m

0m

10m

20m

30m

40m

50m

60m

70m

80m

90m

0m

0m

10m

20m

30m

40m

50m

60m

70m

80m

90m

100m

15m 10m Type IIB length: 42.7m (140ft 1in)

24 5m 24

Type IID

0m Torpedoes Type I Type IIA Type IIB Type IID

10m

20m

30m

40m

10m 2

50m

60m

70m

80m

90m

100m

60m

70m

80m

90m

100m

15m

Completed Type I Type IIA Type IIB Type IID

0m

20m

14

5 5 5

Type IID length: 44m (144ft)

5m

6

20 16

14 16

March 9

April 4

May

12

June

14

July

17

0m

0m

10m

20m

30m

40m

50m

32

8 4

October

5 11

December

U-BOAT SUCCESS IN TONNES (1944)

As early as February 1944, 10 new Type VIIC U-boats earmarked for operations in the Atlantic were diverted to Norwegian bases in response to Allied deception measures that hinted at dual assaults against France and occupied Scandinavia. These formed Gruppe Mitte, which was reinforced by a further 12 boats in March. Also in March, Gruppe Landwirt with 15 Type VIIC boats was formed at Brest to provide a striking force to counter the anticipated crossChannel invasion. The Gruppe was steadily reinforced over the next few months, totalling 36 boats immediately before D-Day. Including boats at sea, a total of 73 U-boats were within range of the massive Allied invasion fleet on 6 June 1944, but crucially only 25 of these were fitted with Schnorchel.

Dönitz was on leave when news of the Normandy landings came through

20m

Type IIB

11

January February

November

100m

Type IIA length: 40.9m (134ft 2in)

5m

46

U-BOAT SUCCESSES (1944)

September

As Dönitz impatiently awaited the re-equipment of all front-line U-boats with the Schnorchel, increasing evidence of the build-up of Allied invasion forces put paid to his hopes of renewing the battle against the Atlantic convoys.

Type IA length: 72.5m (237ft 10in)

10m

24

expected to score considerable successes.’ The reality was very different – in the entire period from 1 January 1945 to the war’s end, manned torpedoes and midget submarines made 254 sorties from their Dutch bases. They lost 102 of their number and sank just 15 merchant vessels totalling 18,078 tonnes (17,792 tons).

August

10m

15m

Complement Type I

have been found to be relatively immune to depth charges because, due to their shape, they offer so little resistance. They are tossed aside like a cork instead of being damaged.… The crews have gained considerable confidence in their equipment and future mass operations of Seehunde under favourable weather conditions are

Final Operations, 1944–45

15m

20m

Submerged SpeedSubmerged Speed

Type IID speed: 23.5km/h (12.7 knots) Type IIA speed: 24km/h (13 knots) Type IIB speed: 24km/h (13 knots)

Type IIA

‘Find’em, Fix’em, and BlaSt’em’ taCtiCS, 1943–1945 In order to counter the overwhelming fire superiority of the Americans, the Japanese, starting on Guadalcanal, as 1stLt Herb Merillat recounted above, retreated to fixed positions and fortifications. This then involved both Marines and soldiers in a costly war of attrition that did not let up until the war’s conclusion in August 1945. In fact, this strategy of attrition became evident as the earlier Japanese tactics of contesting the Marine’s landings gave way to a defencein-depth, with a series of interlocking fortifications and pillboxes built into a solid defensive network. This first

sinking 11 Allied vessels and damaging two others. It was scuttled on 1 July 1940 after sustaining severe damage from attacks by the Flowerclass corvette HMS Gladiolus and an RAAF Sunderland flying boat.

20m

0m

m

ra

an

The submarine was based on the Finnish Vetehinen class and the Spanish Type E-1, both of which were designed by Ingenieurskantoor voor Scheepsbouw (the Dutch dummy company set up by the Reichsmarineamt in 1922 to develop U-boat technology and to circumvent the limitations set by the Treaty of

Surface Speed

mid-1943. Close cooperation between the tanks and Marines

rc

stores

gu

Type IA U-boats The Type I U-boat was the outcome of the first attempt to produce an ocean-going submarine for the Kriegsmarine. Only two, designated Type IA, were completed, as service trials revealed poor seaworthiness and an inability to dive quickly, coupled with mechanical unreliability.

Above: A Marine tank–infantry team in action on Bougainville in

40 ant to i-ai 75 m

i-bo

Guadalcanal Tactically, the Guadalcanal campaign vindicated Marine training, which focused on small unit operations with the emphasis being on initiative and tactical flexibility. Thus, the tactics employed by Marines were primarily lineal in nature due to the defensive nature of the campaign.

According to Sergeant George MacGillivray, who served on a 37mm (1.45in) gun crew, the nature of the fighting usually involved units no larger than companies and as small as squads. In fact, for the Marines who fought there

observation

ns

Marine Corps, however, and with the issuance of the E-Tables of Organization, the Marine rifle team went from four to six men, with the average Marine squad being twelve Marines: squad leader, six riflemen, and two BAR and two assistant BAR men, all armed with M-1 Garands or BARs. All Marine formations had been organized on the triangular organization of three squads per platoon, three platoons per company, three companies per battalion, and three battalions per regiment, and finally three regiments plus supporting arms per division.

Conventional U-boats came close to winning the Battle of the Atlantic in 1940–43 but were defeated by increasingly effective Allied counter-measures. In an attempt to regain the initiative, German naval yards produced highly sophisticated vessels, which were to influence submarine design for the next 50 years.

Type I speed: 34.4km/h (18.6 knots)

to

moved to open coral atolls such as Tarawa.

(3.2 gu ft m 5m ra 10 airc i-

were common in the early part of the war, before the fighting

against sudden Japanese banzai attacks or artillery fire.

The foxholes were intended to protect most of a Marine’s

U-boats

part of the island, where the Japanese were dug in along the Shuri Castle line, its open-country terrain permitted a greater use of all three arms – tanks, artillery or mortars, and infantry.

Supported by an attached Army 4.2in (107mm) mortar unit, which provided highly-effective suppressive firepower, the tanks of the 1st Marine Division and its supporting infantry were able to close in at greater quarters with the Japanese, and prevented them from using their suicide squads against the Marine tanks. In fact, working with Lieutenant Colonel ‘Jeb’ Stuart’s 1st Tank Battalion, the Marines ‘developed a new method of protecting tanks and reducing vulnerability to the infantry in the assault’. This method, according to Marine Colonel Wilburt S. Brown, ‘placed an artillery observer in one of the tanks with a radio to one of the 155mm [6.1in] howitzer battalions. We’d also had an aerial observer overhead. We used 75mm [2.95in] pack [howitzers] and LVT-A’s [armed with 75mm howitzers] that had an air burst capability. If any Jap [suicider] showed anywhere we opened fire with an air burst and kept a pattern of shell fragments patterning down around the tanks.’ Marine tanks likewise shuttled fresh troops

to

One- or two-man foxholes gave Marines protection

two decades later, Guadalcanal closely resembled Vietnam, which was also a war waged by small units. Marines, armed with rifles, bayonets, hand grenades, mortars, machine guns, and 37mm anti-tank guns – used primarily as antipersonnel weapons and normally against bunkers – fought off daily Japanese banzai attacks or sought out the elusive Japanese snipers, and engaged in constant patrolling.

From the start, Marine infantry and artillery commanders effectively used the terrain on Guadalcanal to their advantage in order to maximize the effectiveness of their weapons. Thus, Marine positions were usually dug in and anchored along the rivers and ravines that bisected the main line of resistance located at Henderson Airfield, and allowed the leathernecks to effectively employ all of their firepower.

Marines on Guadalcanal and on Tulagi likewise developed countermeasures to deal with Japanese positions carved into the sides of ridge lines and in caves. As would be the case later in the war on Peleliu, Iwo Jima, and Okinawa, Marines belonging to the 1st Raider Battalion, commanded

by Colonel Merritt A. Edson, spent the majority of the fighting on Guadalcanal and Tulagi destroying Japanese machine guns that had been built inside the mouths of caves, blasting them with satchel charges of dynamite and explosives or canisters of gasoline with grenades attached.

Marine First Lieutenant Herbert L. Merillat provided an

su b m a rines o f th e Krieg sm a rine

The Kriegsmarine

75

Marine Battlefield tactics and techniques, 1942–1945

80 ) ant in

Above: A Marine rifle squad fords a stream on Guadalcanal in

Two-man foxhole

Marine Battlefield tactics and techniques, 1942–1945

Okinawa It was on Okinawa, in fact, that Marines refined their tank– infantry tactics, and successfully employed two techniques that further enhanced the striking power of both these Marine arms. As the Marines pushed toward the southern

For Marines, Guadalcanal was a war of small unit operations.

Indeed, many of the tactical innovations used by the Marines had been used by their predecessors in France, in Central America, primarily in Nicaragua, and on the islands of Haiti and the Dominican Republic during the interwar era. Even with the deployment to China in the 1920s and 1930s, as Marines guarded the US legation’s compound, the leathernecks developed the basic tactical formation of a rifle company comprised of three rifle platoons composed of six fighting teams of four Marines each. Each fire team was led by a senior private or junior non-commissioned officer, and due to its tactical flexibility could be employed in an independent action. Upon the expansion of the

body whilst allowing him to aim and fire his weapon easily.

74

front of a critical area or, as was the case on Okinawa, could assist in the exploitation of a wavering enemy line of defence, and thus allow the Marines to follow through quickly with an attack. During the Okinawa campaign Private Jack Wiggins, who served with the 29th Marines during the fighting on the Oroku Peninsula and rode into battle atop a Sherman tank, stated: ‘Once dismounted, we could then direct and exploit their firepower to the utmost against the Japs.’

mid-August 1942. For the Marines, jungle conditions such as this

One-man foxhole

67

4.1

War I proved anything, the battlefield had been dominated by the artillery and machine gun, and in assault after assault, ‘Again, was decisively shown the great importance of artillery to infantry. Infantry alone without material, makes little progress. If the enemy combines personnel and material, we must do the same or lose the game.’ In a direct parallel to the fighting on Tarawa (1943) and later during the savage fighting on Saipan and Peleliu in 1944, and on Iwo Jima and Okinawa in 1945, the Marine Brigade lost 112 officers and 4598 men in one month’s fighting in Belleau Wood. With such losses, and with the nature of the open warfare fighting that General John J. Pershing and other American commanders insisted upon, Marine officers concluded at the war’s end that the battles they participated in during the fighting offered many lessons for the operational and tactical nature of future wars. In fact, the US Army later incorporated many of these same lessons in its 1923 Field Service Regulations (FSRs) and Infantry Drill Regulations (IDRs) that Marines studied and trained by during the interwar era. Thus when the US Marines Corps entered World War II, many of its senior officers had either seen combat in France during the last war, or had been well-grounded in the tactical and doctrinal lessons of

Marine Battlefield tactics and techniques, 1942–1945

ant

66

WORLD WAR II GERMANY:

33

but immediately returned to his HQ, ‘Koralle’, near Berlin, ordering 17 of Gruppe Landwirt’s boats to attack invasion shipping whilst the remainder patrolled the Bay of Biscay to guard against further possible landings on the French Atlantic coast.

He also issued a typically forthright order to their commanders: ‘Every enemy vessel supporting the landing, even though it may be carrying only 50 men or a tank, is a target. Press home your attack, even at the cost of your boat. Should it be necessary to close with the enemy landing fleet, pay no regard to the danger of shallow water, mines or other hazards. Each soldier and each weapon destroyed before reaching the beachhead diminishes the enemy’s chance of victory. A U-Boat which inflicts losses on the invasion forces fulfils her highest mission and justifies her existence, even though she herself may be destroyed.’

A losing battle All Dönitz’s rhetoric could not alter the impossible odds that the U-boats faced – by early July, 10 U-boats had been sunk whilst attempting to attack the stream of supply traffic to the Normandy beachheads, and virtually all the survivors had been damaged. They had sunk two frigates, four freighters and one tank landing ship, besides damaging a frigate and a freighter – a tiny fraction of the Allied shipping supporting the invasion forces.

Overwhelming Allied air and sea power had secured the crossChannel sea lanes, and on 5 July Allied forces in Normandy passed the one million mark.

The Allied breakout from the Normandy beachhead in August forced most of Gruppe Landwirt‘s boats to evacuate the Biscay bases and head for the relative security of Norway. Seven Schnorchel-equipped

100,000

96,241 (94,721 tons) 76,017 (74,816 tons)

92,922 (91,454 tons)

67,103 (66,043 tons)

62,380 58,327 (61,395 tons) (57,406 tons)

63,146 (62,149 tons)

50,000

54,123 (53,268 tons)

51,605 (50,790 tons)

24,815 (24,423 tons)

25,597 (25,193 tons) 1685 (1659 tons)

0 January

February

March

April

May

June

July

August

Admiralty report: ‘By mid-December the U-boat campaign had gradually changed since August 1944 into a condition of stalemate in the inshore operational areas. Both sides had made technical advances which tended to cancel each other out. The U-boats had adopted the snorkel and possessed an efficient search receiver which together nullified the improved airborne radar … and the increased concentration on flying A/S patrols.… U-boats had, by the end of 1944, become almost immune from detection or attack while on passage to and from the British Isles.

boats sortied from Norwegian bases to cover the withdrawal, only one of which, U-482, achieved any success, sinking four merchant vessels and a corvette. Its achievement prompted Dönitz to adopt the strategy of the ‘inshore campaign’ for the rest of the war – an offensive against the mass of shipping in British coastal waters.

This was feasible only for Schnorchelequipped boats which, to everyone’s surprise, proved they could operate in such a heavily defended area without suffering crippling losses.

The situation at the end of the year was summed up by a post-war

September

October

November

December

When they reached their inshore operating areas, they could exist for lengthy periods without molestation as long as they committed no hostile act. It was only when they attacked and hit a target that surface craft were provided with a datum point for an immediate retributive hunt and counter-attack.’

Tables turned The point that the U-boats’ relatively immunity was dependent upon their not attacking was the main factor in limiting losses to Allied shipping during this period. Between August

100

101

The Luftwaffe S. Mike Pavelec

The Italian Front

The Luftwaffe reveals the workings of the German Air Force through its command structure, economic resources, production figures, recruitment, training and philosophy.

Broken down by campaigns and subject areas, the book includes reference tables and maps, presenting all the core data in easy-to-follow formats. The Luftwaffe is an essential reference guide for anyone interested in the history and structure of Germany’s wartime air force.

michael e. haskew

The Italian Front is a superbly illustrated history of the original ‘second front’ in Europe, including artworks of key materiel and uniforms, and campaign maps showing the movement of troops in the theatre.

With detailed appendices containing orders of battle, losses and equipment, The Italian Front builds into a comprehensive account of the 194445 campaign in Western Europe.

Campaigns of World War II:

The Italian Front

297 x 227mm (11¾ x 9in) 256 pages 70,000 words 45 artworks, 230 b/w photos, 10 colour maps ISBN: 978-1-78274-606-5 £22.99 Paperback

INVa SIO N O F pO LaND tO th e FaLL O F Fra Nce

INVa SIO N O F pO LaND tO th e FaLL O F Fra Nce

Invasion of Poland, September 1939 On the morning of 1 September 1939, German tanks rolled across the Polish border and Luftwaffe planes flew attack missions into Poland. Two weeks later, the Soviets attacked Poland from the other side; Poland was doomed.

122 / Anzio and Monte Cassino

Anzio and Monte Cassino / 123

Chapter six

they were confronted only by the 94th Division, which was thinly stretched from the river to the town of Terracina 48km (30 miles) to the north and had yet to experience combat. In planning their defences the German commanders had hoped that the natural barrier of the river itself and 24,000 thickly sown mines might provide enough assistance to stymie a crossing. The attack commenced at 9 p.m. and combat engineers worked to clear the mines and mark exits on the far bank while German artillery came

Anzio and Monte Cassino The attempt to outflank the Germans at Cassino by landing at Anzio ended in failure as the Allies became bogged down in the beachhead.

down steadily. It was virtually impossible to construct bridges during the first 24 hours.

Nevertheless, 10 full battalions of infantry crossed the Garigliano and Senger soon began to realize the gravity of the situation. Bypassing Vietinghoff in the chain of command, Senger telephoned Kesselring, who realized a British breakthrough to the Liri Valley would outflank the defences of Monte Cassino, unhinge the Gustav Line and force a retreat of the entire XIV Panzer Corps toward Rome.

which had been the tactic of World War I, the Germans reconceived warfare, incorporating the latest technology. Air units coordinated by radio combined with fast-moving mechanized ground units (armoured and motorized) to penetrate deep into enemy territory, avoiding pockets of resistance and cutting off front-line troops from supply and command. This ‘lightning war’, defined by surprise, manoeuvre and coordination, worked best against an acquiescent adversary, and came to define the German way of war in subsequent years. Also known as Combined Arms Warfare, these methods aimed at attacking enemy weak points with overwhelming force and exploiting gains quickly. The combined attacks on Poland, with

The Luftwaffe began the campaign with an assortment of aircraft: strategic bombers, air-superiority fighters and dive-bombers. The collection totalled 4000 aircraft: 1200 fighters – Messerschmitt Bf 109s and 110s; 1200 medium bombers – Heinkel He 111s and Dornier Do 17s; about 400 Junkers Ju 87 divebombers; and around 1200 transport, reconnaissance, liaison and obsolete types, the last-mentioned of which were being phased out but were still useful against the outclassed Polish air effort.

Lightning war The new German battle doctrine of Blitzkrieg was put to the test. Instead of sending massive numbers of men into the attack across a wide front,

Panzers (tanks) spearheading the attack and supported from the air, were incredibly successful against the Polish forces, who were simply unprepared for the German onslaught.

In the opening phases of the battle for Poland, German Panzer units supported by Luftwaffe bombers and dive-bombers drove deep behind Polish forces, cutting n Number of Luftwaffe squadrons

prepared for operations September 1939. At this early stage of the war, the number of observation and bombing squadrons were higher than fighter squadrons; German

them off. Further German infantry then moved in to clean up the rear areas, gathering prisoners. If the Germans encountered strongholds, the Luftwaffe targeted them with bombers. This method of warfare proved extremely successful.

Luftflotten 1 and 4 were the two main commands in the Polish campaign. Twenty Kampfgeschwader (bomber groups) of He 111 and Do 17 aircraft faced Poland, ready to bomb it into submission. There were also five Stukageschwader (Stuka groups), flying Ju 87s at the point of the Blitzkrieg spear. Polish forces facing them were primarily unmechanized ground troops.

Without a viable air weapon, and with few anti-tank weapons, the Poles were outmatched in the sky

and on the ground. With the Germans attacking out of Germany, occupied Czechoslovakia and East Prussia, Poland faced a triple threat.

Type

INVa SIO N O F pO LaND tO th e FaLL O F Fra Nce

S

ergeant Ross Carter, a veteran of the arduous campaign in Italy, observed Christmas Day 1944 amid the misery of battle-scarred Monte Sammucro. Below, the town of San Pietro lay in ruins, its destruction so thorough that the surviving civilians did not bother to salvage much of anything. They rebuilt their town some distance away, leaving the heaps of rubble and jumbled remains of their former homes as mute testimony to the ravages of war.

‘For 17 days, we had existed on the peak,’ wrote Carter, ‘in freezing weather, constant rain, icy winds and inconceivable danger. In all that time we had never washed our hands or shaved, and had managed to get our boots off three times. Lice were eating the hide off our bodies and desperation was eating out our hearts.’

The desperation in the Allied ranks was, to a degree, being felt on a strategic scale as the frustrating advance toward Rome proceeded at a snail’s pace. Progress had been slow, even at times non-existent. The prospects for immediate forward movement seemed to be fleeting at best as the bulk of Allied resources were funnelled to England in preparation for the Normandy invasion. For all intents and purposes the Italian campaign had reached a stalemate. By mid-December the Fifth Army offensive had ground to a halt, while the

8

Marked with the distinctive black cross, the German SdKfz Marder II selfpropelled assault weapon was armed with a 75mm (2.95in) cannon and a light machine gun. This version remained in production until 1944.

Eighth Army remained before the Gustav Line defences north of the Sangro River around Ortona.

Although it had appeared that an amphibious operation intended to outflank the Gustav Line defences and facilitate the drive for Rome had been cancelled for good, the stillborn Operation Shingle was rapidly revived as a result of two events, the restructuring of command in the Mediterranean with a distinctive British perspective and the illness of Prime Minister Winston Churchill. The Italian campaign had long been Churchill’s favourite, and the Mediterranean Theatre was of particular interest to him. Well aware that the window of opportunity for a notable success in Italy was rapidly closing, Churchill departed the conferences at Cairo and Teheran decidedly pessimistic about the prosecution of the war there.

Churchill in turmoil Physically exhausted, the Prime Minister was diagnosed with pneumonia while in Tunis to visit General Eisenhower’s headquarters on 11 December. During a week in bed he was consumed with worry and finally decided that something must be done to rejuvenate the campaign in Italy. The solution, he reasoned, was the amphibious operation. His sights set

opposite

An American infantryman takes up a position in the ruins of a house at Monte Cassino. The Allies attempted four times to take the heights and the Benedictine abbey which crowned it.

undefended Cedro Hill after failing to capture it four days earlier, and two tough days of fighting by the 168th Infantry, 34th Division secured Cervaro after a lengthy artillery bombardment and air strikes. Now, Clark’s army was drawn up to the banks of the Rapido, facing the heart of the Gustav Line defences, which were located beyond the opposite bank of the stream. Approximately 90,000 troops of the German XIV Panzer Corps were entrenched in the positions around Cassino, along the river and in the vicinity of Sant’ Ambrogio.

2564

airfields were quickly destroyed, and the few fighters they had, were shot down. In the first few days of the war, the Polish Air Force ceased to exist. Over 800 aircraft (of which no more than 400 were modern types for combat operations) were either shot down or destroyed on the ground.

In ground combat, the Blitzkrieg tactics were also successful. The Poles had little defence against either the German dive-bombers or

0m

4m

8m

10m

12m

14m

16m

18m

20m

0m

0m

2m

4m

6m

8m

10m

12m

14m

16m

18m

with a wary eye.

Dornier Do 17Z length: 15.79m (51ft 9in)

0m

2m

4m

6m

8m

10m

12m

14m

16m

18m

20m

Polish PZL P.11 length: 7.55m (24ft 9in)

366

Combat record The record of the Luftwaffe in the Polish campaign was instructive; many lessons emerged. Strategic bombing of Polish cities had been successful in terms of the

had been victorious, the Germans had learned valuable lessons about attrition, tactics and the need for increased production.

n Poland lost 335 aircraft in the

campaign – most of its air force. The Germans lost 281 aircraft shot down, and another 263 or 273 (depending on source) damaged, only 70 of which could be repaired.

POLISH AnD GErMAn AIrCrAFT LOSSES COMPArED POLAnD

400 0m

20

destruction caused but had brought with it a cost. In addition, the highintensity combat of Blitzkrieg, as well as air combat with the Polish Air Force, indicated the high attrition rate of modern warfare. Even flying against the Poles, with their inferior anti-aircraft weapons and obsolete aircraft, the Germans incurred high losses. Over the course of the fourweek campaign, the Germans lost 281 aircraft of all types in combat while accounting for the destruction of 335 Polish planes. While they

20m

4m

0m

He 111E

0m Wing Span

2m

4m

6m

8m

Ju 87

Do 17E

16.3m (53ft 4in)

212 18m (59ft)

Do 17Z 119 18

40 P.11

40

Germans, the latter turning their 43

12m

14m 16m Maximum Speed

18m

20m

13.8m (45ft 3in)

Bf 110C

Do 17M Ju 88 Hs 123

10m

335

GErMAny recce

63

Bf 109

349

38

Do 17Z

40 27

204

command for the Polish campaign.

Above are the numbers and types of aircraft ready for operations against the Poles in September 1939.

4m

He 111P

90

65

254

n Luftflotte 2 was the organizational Messerschmitt Bf 110C length: 12.3m (40ft 6in)

Ju 87

blitzkrieg combined arms attacks.

27

Fighter squadrons

42

6m

2m

bayonets and grenades While the fighting heated up in the east, the Eighth Army sector on the Adriatic remained quiet, and it was conceivable that if Clark’s offensive succeeded reinforcements could be forthcoming from the area of inactivity.

On 12 January the 2nd Moroccan and 3rd Algerian divisions were launched against the mountains north of Cassino.

Under French command, these units gained 6.4km (4 miles) in four days, often fighting hand-to-hand with the Germans. Bayonets and grenades were frequently employed at close distances. Vietinghoff decided to abandon nearby Mount Trocchio without a fight so that Senger would have adequate forces to contest a river crossing and defend the entrance to the Liri Valley.

When the British 5th and 56th divisions launched an assault by boat and amphibious DUKWs across the Garigliano on 17 January

2m

2m

13

Pursuit-interceptor squadrons Ground-attack squadrons 3 Weather recce squadrons 1 naval aviation squadrons

0m

4m

2m

Dive-bomber squadrons

45

13

Bf 109

He 111

55

Bomber squadrons

Hs 126 He 45 Do 17

Junkers Ju 87 length: 11m (36ft)

2m

twin-engine bombers were effective as the front line of attack in German

reconnaissance squadrons Staff units

LUFTFLOTTE 2 AIrCrAFT STrEnGTH (SEPTEMBEr 1939)

4m

302 2370

Operational combat aircraft

LUFTWAFFE BOMBEr, DIvE-BOMBEr & GrOUnD-ATTACk AIrCrAFT STrEnGTH (SEPTEMBEr 1939)

He 111H

reported missing and more than 500 were lost to exposure to the elements and such maladies as trench foot. Most of the missing armoured infantrymen eventually turned up, but among the dead was a heroic combat engineer sergeant, Joe C. Specker.

Advancing along the slope of Mount Porchia under cover of darkness, Specker had been sent forward by his company commander on a reconnaissance of enemy positions in his unit’s path. When he returned Specker reported that a German machine gun nest and several snipers were located directly in the path of his company. He volunteered to take a machine gun forward to place fire on the German positions and set out alone with the weapon and a box of ammunition.

The sergeant’s Medal of Honour citation reads: ‘He was observed by the enemy as he walked along and was severely wounded by the deadly fire directed at him. Though so seriously wounded that he was unable to walk, he continued to drag himself over the jagged edges of rock and rough terrain until he reached the position at which he desired to set up his machine gun. He set up the gun so well and fired so accurately that the enemy machine gun nest was silenced and the remainder of the snipers forced to retire, enabling his platoon to obtain their objective.

SGT Specker was found dead at his gun.

His personal bravery, self sacrifice, and determination were an inspiration to his officers and fellow soldiers.’

British troops subsequently occupied an

INVaSION OF pOLaND t O t he FaLL OF FraNce

Total

ready crews

LUFTWAFFE SqUADrOn STrEnGTH (AUGUST 1939) above

240 x 189mm (9½ x 7½”) 192pp 50,000 words 150 photos, diagrams and maps ISBN: 978-1-78274-597-6 £19.99 Paperback

POLISH CAMPAIGn AIrCrAFT COMPArED

LUFTWAFFE STrEnGTH (SEPTEMBEr 1939) Staffeln

Airfields bombed The Luftwaffe’s primary targets were Polish airfields. For the Luftwaffe to gain (and maintain) air supremacy, the Polish Air Force would have to be destroyed. Fighters covered the bombers as the Polish airfields were targeted. Many Polish planes were caught on the ground on the opening day, and as the conflagration opened, the Polish Air Force was destroyed. Its PZL aircraft were hopelessly outclassed by the German Bf 109 fighters, but a few were able to harass the German bombers.

Unfortunately for the Poles, their

WORLD WAR II GERMANY:

The Luftwaffe

46

10.72m (35ft 2in)

attentions westwards while the

Ju 87 speed: 390km/h (242mph) P.11 speed: 390km/h (242mph) Do 17Z speed: 425km/h (263mph) Bf 110C speed: 560km/h (348mph)

Bf 110 Do 17 He 111 Ju 87 Hs 123 Transport naval Damaged

67

12

12

30 14

17

44

22

70/263

former watched German intentions 47

leFt

The devastation of war is apparent in this view of the shattered wreckage of an Italian village. Only the bell tower of a church remains standing, and the ruins still smoulder.

9

The Pacific War

APRIL 2018 Publication

ANDREW WIEST AND GREGORY L. MATTSON

The Third Reich

From the attack on Pearl Harbor in 1941 to the bombing of Nagasaki in 1945, The Pacific War examines in depth the whirlwind Japanese victories of 1941-42, and how the Allies organised a counterattack, gradually forcing the Japanese on to the defensive. The authoritative text is complemented by full-colour maps and artworks of the uniforms, armoured fighting vehicles, aircraft and ships – with specification tables – that took part in the campaign.

chris mcnab

The Third Reich covers the geography, economy, political structures, legal framework, military organization, social policies and ideology of Hitler’s Germany. Maps range from pre-war annexations to the location of concentration camps, while charts offer information as diverse as industrial output and verdicts at the Nuremberg trials.

Packed with hundreds of maps and graphs, this book offers wide-ranging data on one of the twentieth century’s most complex regimes.

WORLD WAR II GERMANY:

The Third Reich

240 x 189mm (9½ x 7½”) 192pp 50,000 words 150 photographs, diagrams and maps ISBN: 978-1-78274-598-3 £19.99 Paperback

Campaigns of World War II:

The Pacific War

297 x 227mm (11¾ x 9”) 256 pages 70,000 words 65 maps and artworks, 210 b/w photos ISBN: 978-1-78274-607-2 £22.99 Paperback

122 / Anzio and Monte Cassino

Anzio and Monte Cassino / 123

Chapter six

they were confronted only by the 94th Division, which was thinly stretched from the river to the town of Terracina 48km (30 miles) to the north and had yet to experience combat. In planning their defences the German commanders had hoped that the natural barrier of the river itself and 24,000 thickly sown mines might provide enough assistance to stymie a crossing. The attack commenced at 9 p.m. and combat engineers worked to clear the mines and mark exits on the far bank while German artillery came

Anzio and Monte Cassino The attempt to outflank the Germans at Cassino by landing at Anzio ended in failure as the Allies became bogged down in the beachhead.

above

S

ergeant Ross Carter, a veteran of the arduous campaign in Italy, observed Christmas Day 1944 amid the misery of battle-scarred Monte Sammucro. Below, the town of San Pietro lay in ruins, its destruction so thorough that the surviving civilians did not bother to salvage much of anything. They rebuilt their town some distance away, leaving the heaps of rubble and jumbled remains of their former homes as mute testimony to the ravages of war.

‘For 17 days, we had existed on the peak,’ wrote Carter, ‘in freezing weather, constant rain, icy winds and inconceivable danger. In all that time we had never washed our hands or shaved, and had managed to get our boots off three times. Lice were eating the hide off our bodies and desperation was eating out our hearts.’

The desperation in the Allied ranks was, to a degree, being felt on a strategic scale as the frustrating advance toward Rome proceeded at a snail’s pace. Progress had been slow, even at times non-existent. The prospects for immediate forward movement seemed to be fleeting at best as the bulk of Allied resources were funnelled to England in preparation for the Normandy invasion. For all intents and purposes the Italian campaign had reached a stalemate. By mid-December the Fifth Army offensive had ground to a halt, while the

What would Europe have looked like if Nazi Germany had been victorious in World War II? What were the unrealized plans for a Europe dominated by the Third Reich?

Arranged in chapters covering topics such as leadership, war, physical infrastructure, empire building, race, culture and weaponry, Hitler’s Masterplan reveals the true scale of Hitler’s vision for a Greater Germany and a world dominated by Nazi ideology.

WORLD WAR II GERMANY:

Hitler’s Masterplan

240 x 189mm (9½ x 7½”) 192pp 50,000 words 150 photographs, diagrams and maps ISBN: 9781782745945 £19.99 Paperback

116

this state organization eventually came to manage the affairs of 20 million workers. Ostensibly it was

AVeRAGe WORkING HOuRS FOR GeRMAN WORkeRS, 1929–44 50 49.1

49.1 49 48.7 48

48.3

47.6 47.6

47

46

46.5 46.0

45

44

44.4

43 42.9 42

41

40 1929

1933

1935

1938

1939

1940

1941

1942

1943

1944

there to promote workers’ rights, including improving workplace conditions, stabilizing wages across key industries and providing worker education. Although it did achieve some elements of these goals, at its heart the DAF was committed simply to exploiting the German workforce for maximum profit and productivity.

Wages did increase in small annual increments, but these increases were often offset by a leap in working hours – by 1939 many workers in key industries were putting in working weeks of 70-plus hours, with few outlets to redress grievances.

Furthermore, wage deductions to compulsory state schemes (including membership of the DAF) also reduced salaries further, the total deductions by 1939 averaging about 18 per cent.

As we can see, Germany’s ‘economic miracle’ was bought at a cost to workers’ rights. Germany’s foreign currency exchange situation, plus its needs for raw materials, meant that the economic rise could not be sustained indefinitely. For Hitler, however, such considerations did not affect his plans to create the physical structure of a ‘ThousandYear Reich’.

eMPLOYMeNT BY OCCuPATIONAL TYPe, 1933 unskilled workers Skilled workers Professional /white collar Master craftsmen Farmers Merchants Civil servants Managers /owners

90

10.1 million 4.5 million 4.1 million 2.6 million 2.1 million 1.6 million 1.5 million 234,000

State Architecture

the physical reich

n ReIch chaNcelleRy

The Reichskanzlei (Reich chancellery) was hitler’s seat of power in Berlin.

It was a vast complex, designed to overawe visitors with its grandeur.

The plan of the chancellery here shows the building after its extensive reconstruction by albert Speer, a redevelopment that cemented Speer’s influence within the Third Reich. hitler was extremely interested in every aspect of its design, as he felt it had to express National Socialist ideology – he once stated that ‘Berlin must change its face to adapt to its new mission’.

The chancellery was eventually demolished by Soviet occupiers.

1 22

24

N

Bahnhof Dutzendteich

2

26

Bestehende Gebüade

10

9

14 15

6

17

16 1 2

21

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11

Mittelbau mit Marmorgalerie (Mittelbau Marble Gallery) eingang zur Reichskanzlei (entrance to the Reich Chancellery) eingang zur Präsidialkanzlei (entrance to the Office of the Reich President) kasernenbauten (Barracks Buildings) Hebebühne zu den katakomben (Lift to the Catacombs) Gartenportal zu Hitlers Arbeitszimmer (Garden portal to Hitler’s Office) Bauzufahrt zum Führerbunker (entranceway to the Führer Bunker) Zufahrt – Tiefgarage und Führerbunker (Access: underground Parking and Führer Bunker) einfahrt – Tiefgarage und Feuerwehr (entrance – Parking and Fire Brigade) Zufahrt – Führerbunker (Access – Führer Bunker) Haus kempka (kempka House)

13

5

25

3

20

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

Kdf-Stadt

18

19

Gewächshaus (Greenhouse) ehrenhof (Courtyard of Honour) Festsaal mit Wintergarten (Ballroom and Conservatory) Alte Reichskanzlei (Old Reich Chancellery) Speisesaal (Dining Hall) Propagandaministerium (Ministry of Propaganda) erweiterungsbau zur Reichskanzlei (Reich Chancellery extension) u-Bahn-eingang Wilhelmsplatz (Wilhelmsplatz Subway entrance) kaufhaus Wertheim (Wertheim Department Store) Leipziger Platz (Leipziger Plaza) Ministergärten (Ministry Garden) Tiergarten (Animal Garden – Zoo) Hermann-Göring-Straße (Herman Göring Street) Voßstraße (Voss Street) Wilhelmstraße (Wilhelm Street)

91

1

Luitpoldarena

2

Gefallenendenkmal

3

Rednerkanzel

4

Luitpoldhalle

5

kongresshalle

6

Grosse Strasse

7

Deutches Stasion

8

Märzfeld

9

ehrentribune des Märzfeldes

10 Städisches Stadion 11 Zeppelinfeld 12 Huaptribune des Zeppelinfeldes 13 Trafostation 14 Stadionbad

Großer Dutzendteich

11

Kleiner Dutzendteich

12

13

10 6

14

2061_156-163_GREY.qxd

Page 116

2061_112-117_GREY.qxd

high, similar in style to the Arc de Triomphe in Paris. The north-south avenue – known as the ‘Avenue of Victory’ – ran through the arch, and would be five kilometres (three miles) in length. At the northern end was to be a huge open forum, the Großer Platz (Great Square), dominated by the vast, domed Volkshalle (People’s Hall). Sketched out by Hitler himself

(although given to Speer to realize), this building was much inspired by the Pantheon of Rome, but was on an even greater scale. The height at the summit of the dome was to be 290m (950ft) from the street, while the dome’s diameter would measure 250m (820ft). Inside, three tiers of seating would have enclosed an echoing, lofty space – the building

bayonets and grenades While the fighting heated up in the east, the Eighth Army sector on the Adriatic remained quiet, and it was conceivable that if Clark’s offensive succeeded reinforcements could be forthcoming from the area of inactivity.

On 12 January the 2nd Moroccan and 3rd Algerian divisions were launched against the mountains north of Cassino.

Under French command, these units gained 6.4km (4 miles) in four days, often fighting hand-to-hand with the Germans. Bayonets and grenades were frequently employed at close distances. Vietinghoff decided to abandon nearby Mount Trocchio without a fight so that Senger would have adequate forces to contest a river crossing and defend the entrance to the Liri Valley.

When the British 5th and 56th divisions launched an assault by boat and amphibious DUKWs across the Garigliano on 17 January

leFt

The devastation of war is apparent in this view of the shattered wreckage of an Italian village. Only the bell tower of a church remains standing, and the ruins still smoulder.

FühReRhauPTquaRTIeR Führer’s Headquarters

October 23, 1976

n Vierjahresplan (Four-Year Plan) & Rüstungsministerium (Defence Ministry)

158

|

117

made their arrest—a fact that seemed to amuse Berkowitz.

JUDGED TO BE SANE The subsequent trial of David Berkowitz rested largely upon evaluations of his mental health—he quickly confessed to the shootings, so responsibility was not in question. Most of the evidence seemed to point to Berkowitz being a sufferer of paranoid schizophrenia. His apartment, for example, was scrawled with messages such as “I kill for my master.” Yet other psychiatrists believed that the apparent madness was a pretence, and pushed that he be found sane as well as guilty. This viewpoint prevailed, and on June 12, 1978 he was sentenced to 365 years in prison for six murders. He is in prison to this day.

VICTIM

AGE

D E TA I L S

Donna Lauria

18

Both Lauria and Valenti are shot outside Donna’s home in

Jody Valenti

19

Pelham Bay. Lauria is killed and Valenti injured.

Rosemary Keenan

18

Rosemary Keenan and her boyfriend Carl Denaro are shot in

Carl Denaro

25

Forest Hills Gardens, Queens. Both are injured in the attack.

Donna DeMasi

16

Joanne Lomino

18

Christine Freund

26

Christine Freund and John Diel are shot in their car outside a

John Diel

30

movie theater in Queens. Diel suffers superficial injuries, but

n Reichswerke Hermann Göring

9

HP Zollhaus Bahnhof Märzfeld 16

16 Zeltlager der Wehrmacht

n Montan- und Rüstungsgesellschaften (Mining and Defence Companies)

n Waffen- und Maschinenblock (Weapons and Machines Section)

n Schiffahtsblock (Shipping Section)

n Berg- und Hüttenwerksgesellschaften Ost (Mining and Metallurgical Companies East)

n Sonstige Monopolgesellschaften (Other Monopolies)

n Spinnstoff- und Fasergesellschaft (Textile and Fibre Company)

n Chemie-Ost (Chemistry East)

n Superphosphat Ost (Superphosphate East)

n Konstinental Öl AG (Konstinental Oil AG)

n Betriebliche Ostwirtschaft (Eastern Economy Operations)

n Betriebliche Wirtschaft Serbiens (Economic Operations Serbia)

n NuReMBeRG Rally GRouND

n Betriebliche Wirtschaft Rumäniens (Economic Operations Romania)

The Nuremberg rallies, also called the parteitage (Party Days), were spectacular political/ceremonial events in the Nazi calendar. The rally ground was never quite developed to the full extent of hitler’s ambitions, but it was an imposing

n Gesamte Kohlewirtschaft (Total Coal Production)

n Treuhänder gesamter Erzbergbau (Trustee Ore Mining)

space nevertheless. The main road that ran down the central axis of the ground measured more than 2km (1.2 miles) in length and was 40m (132ft) wide. Towers, temple-like structures, stadia and public address platforms, plus the theatrical lighting additions of albert Speer, made the Nuremberg venue a place of great visual power.

n Sonstige Treuhandsch. HGW mit SS-Betrieb (Other Trusts – HGW with SS-Operations)

n Militärgouverneue, zivile Parteverwaltg. im Osten (New Military Governments, Civilian in the East)

October 26, 1976

Donna DeMasi and Joanne Lomino are shot while chatting outside Lomino’s home. Both are wounded; Joanne is paralyzed.

January 30, 1977

Freund dies later of her wounds.

March 8, 1977

Virginia Voskerichian

19

Shot as she walks home from Columbia University. She is killed at the scene by a head shot.

97

Westchester County Deputy Sheriff Craig Glassman, who lived near Berkowitz, shows two threatening letters he received. The letters had a similar style of handwriting to those written by the “Son of Sam.”

the young couple escaped with minor injuries, but the second shooting resulted in one young woman dead and her boyfriend blinded. Yet from this last shooting came a solid lead for the police.

SER P112-117_5-116.pgs 28.05.2010 11:04

April 17, 1977

Alexander Esau

20

Valentina Suriani

18

Alexander Esau and Valentina Suriani are both shot and killed at close quarters, the shooting occurring only a few blocks from the Voskerichian shooting.

Rival Colour Ltd TEXT BLACK

28/5/10

11:55

Tracking a Serial Killer 240 x 189mm (9½ x 7½”) 192pp 50,000 words 100 b/w photographs ISBN: 978-1-78274-613-3 £16.99 Hardback

2061_156-163_GREY.qxd

Page 158

18/6/10

12:35

Page 159

Page 117

Timeline of a Murderer—Berkowitz’s Shootings D AT E July 29, 1976

8

11:42

DAVID BERKOWITZ

STRuCTuRe OF THe ReICHSWeRke HeRMANN GöRING, 1945

u

18/6/10

A witness near the scene of the shooting reported a car speeding away with a parking ticket on its windshield. Police checked both the parking tickets issued that day and cross-referenced them to the description of the vehicle. The information pointed to a vehicle registered by one David Berkowitz of 35 Pine Street, Yonkers. Further details about Berkowitz provided by Sam Carr led police to be confident that they had their man.

The police quickly swooped on Berkowitz’s address. They spotted his car, in which the police found a duffel bag holding ammunition and a rifle on the back seat, plus a letter written in the handwriting and style of the Son of Sam. They put the car under observation, and eventually Berkowitz emerged from his apartment block and climbed into the vehicle. The police rushed in and

BLACK TEXT BLACK

10

10:46

7

15 SS-kaserne

96

28/5/10

Although Hitler oversaw huge public works during his time in power, he envisioned an even greater future for Germany and its architecture. Berlin, in particular, was to have become Welthauptstadt Germania (World Capital Germania) – quite literally, the centre of the world.

To demonstrate this status, it would have to be transformed into a place of transcendent grandeur, the perfect vision of a thousand-year empire.

The guiding lines of Welthauptstadt Germania were to be provided by two huge avenues, forming a crossroads at their meeting point.

At the intersection was to be a huge triumphal arch more than 100m (328ft)

5

15 12

4 11

1000m

3 4

8 7

3000ft

0 0

THe ReICHSkANZLeI (ReICH CHANCeLLeRY)

An American infantryman takes up a position in the ruins of a house at Monte Cassino. The Allies attempted four times to take the heights and the Benedictine abbey which crowned it.

CHAPTER THREE: PREDATORS

Imperial Plans

NuReMBeRG RALLY GROuND, 1940

23

|

the physical reich

One of the most visible reminders of the new National Socialist regime was its state and party buildings.

During the 1920s and early 1930s, there had been much debate amongst architects, and interested party members, about the appropriate architectural style to manifest National Socialist ideology ‘in stone’. One of the most influential voices to emerge from the chatter was Paul Schultze-Naumburg, an ardent nationalist who struck a chord with Hitler.

Schultze-Naumburg condemned the industrial starkness of modernist architecture, and instead wanted a return to traditional German forms of design, plus the orderly beauty and authoritarianism of classical Roman and Greek edifices.

Hence the defining quality of Nazi architecture was to be Ordnung

opposite

This gripping, fully-illustrated true crime book explores a range of serial murderers in an innovative format, using timelines both of the murderers’ lives but also precise hour-by-hour timelines of the crimes. Featuring 25 killers from the 19th century to the present day, the book enables the reader to understand some of the thinking of men such as Ted Bundy, Andrei Chikatilo and Volker Eckert.

2061_112-117_GREY.qxd

Deutsche Arbeitsfront (DAF; German Labour Front). Created on 10 May 1933, and headed by Dr Robert Ley,

Physically exhausted, the Prime Minister was diagnosed with pneumonia while in Tunis to visit General Eisenhower’s headquarters on 11 December. During a week in bed he was consumed with worry and finally decided that something must be done to rejuvenate the campaign in Italy. The solution, he reasoned, was the amphibious operation. His sights set

undefended Cedro Hill after failing to capture it four days earlier, and two tough days of fighting by the 168th Infantry, 34th Division secured Cervaro after a lengthy artillery bombardment and air strikes. Now, Clark’s army was drawn up to the banks of the Rapido, facing the heart of the Gustav Line defences, which were located beyond the opposite bank of the stream. Approximately 90,000 troops of the German XIV Panzer Corps were entrenched in the positions around Cassino, along the river and in the vicinity of Sant’ Ambrogio.

chris mcnab

Chris mcnab

t h e p h y s ic a l reich

Churchill in turmoil

reported missing and more than 500 were lost to exposure to the elements and such maladies as trench foot. Most of the missing armoured infantrymen eventually turned up, but among the dead was a heroic combat engineer sergeant, Joe C. Specker.

Advancing along the slope of Mount Porchia under cover of darkness, Specker had been sent forward by his company commander on a reconnaissance of enemy positions in his unit’s path. When he returned Specker reported that a German machine gun nest and several snipers were located directly in the path of his company. He volunteered to take a machine gun forward to place fire on the German positions and set out alone with the weapon and a box of ammunition.

The sergeant’s Medal of Honour citation reads: ‘He was observed by the enemy as he walked along and was severely wounded by the deadly fire directed at him. Though so seriously wounded that he was unable to walk, he continued to drag himself over the jagged edges of rock and rough terrain until he reached the position at which he desired to set up his machine gun. He set up the gun so well and fired so accurately that the enemy machine gun nest was silenced and the remainder of the snipers forced to retire, enabling his platoon to obtain their objective.

SGT Specker was found dead at his gun.

His personal bravery, self sacrifice, and determination were an inspiration to his officers and fellow soldiers.’

British troops subsequently occupied an

Tracking a Serial Killer

Hitler’s Masterplan

t he p h y s i c al r eic h

Marked with the distinctive black cross, the German SdKfz Marder II selfpropelled assault weapon was armed with a 75mm (2.95in) cannon and a light machine gun. This version remained in production until 1944.

Eighth Army remained before the Gustav Line defences north of the Sangro River around Ortona.

Although it had appeared that an amphibious operation intended to outflank the Gustav Line defences and facilitate the drive for Rome had been cancelled for good, the stillborn Operation Shingle was rapidly revived as a result of two events, the restructuring of command in the Mediterranean with a distinctive British perspective and the illness of Prime Minister Winston Churchill. The Italian campaign had long been Churchill’s favourite, and the Mediterranean Theatre was of particular interest to him. Well aware that the window of opportunity for a notable success in Italy was rapidly closing, Churchill departed the conferences at Cairo and Teheran decidedly pessimistic about the prosecution of the war there.

down steadily. It was virtually impossible to construct bridges during the first 24 hours.

Nevertheless, 10 full battalions of infantry crossed the Garigliano and Senger soon began to realize the gravity of the situation. Bypassing Vietinghoff in the chain of command, Senger telephoned Kesselring, who realized a British breakthrough to the Liri Valley would outflank the defences of Monte Cassino, unhinge the Gustav Line and force a retreat of the entire XIV Panzer Corps toward Rome.

SER P117.pgs 18.06.2010 12:02

Rival Colour Ltd

|

AILEEN WUORNOS

CHAPTER FOUR: FEMALE MURDERERS

paranoid schizophrenic, Dale would end up incarcerated in mental institutions following convictions for child abuse. Although it was a blessing that Aileen would grow up free from his influence, there remains the question of what genetic legacy Dale left his unwanted daughter.

(Dale hanged himself in 1969.)

Diane finally had enough of her responsibilities when Aileen was four years old, and abandoned her and her brother. The duty of raising them passed to their Finnish grandparents, Lauri and Britta Wuornos, who lived in Troy, Michigan. The move did not bring the security nor love the children desperately needed in these formative years. Later Aileen alleged that she was sexually abused by her grandfather and beaten regularly by both grandparents. Whatever the reality of these claims, it is true that she grew into a disruptive and aggressive adolescent. She was sexually promiscuous by the time she was 12 years old, and had her first child at the age of 15—it went straight to adoption.

Shortly afterward, her grandmother died, and both children became wards of court.

From then on it was downhill fast for the young girl. By the time she was in her late teens, she was working as a prostitute between intermittent deadend jobs, and getting in regular trouble with the law, not only for prostitution but also on charges such as drunk driving and disorderly conduct. She also appeared to be developing an early love affair with firearms—on one occasion she was arrested and charged for having fired a gun from a moving vehicle—and in her early 20s had also been charged with assault.

As Aileen drifted across America, there were a couple of potential bright spots. In Florida, she met a wealthy 69-year-old yacht club president, Lewis Fell, and struck up an unlikely relationship. They were married in March 1976, but within a few months the marriage was annulled—Fell discovered that Aileen’s tendency to fight in bars spilled over into the home, when Aileen beat her aging husband with his own cane. Shortly afterward, Aileen shot herself in the stomach in a botched suicide attempt.

Also in 1976, Aileen inherited $10,000 when Keith died from throat cancer in July. In now characteristic style, she took all the money and blew it within two months on drink, drugs, and a car (which she crashed and destroyed). At this point it

BLACK TEXT BLACK

was hard to see how the life of Aileen Wuornos could get much lower.

DESCENT The 1980s marked a new, and appalling, era in the life of Aileen Wuornos. Having squandered an opportunistic marriage and a sudden inheritance, she embraced crime as her principal means of The Last Resort Bar in Port Orange, Florida, the scene of Wuornos’ arrest for an outstanding warrant (not a murder charge). Only when she was in custody did police begin to connect her with the murders.

SER P156-163_3-158.pgs 28.05.2010 12:15

|

159

Timeline of a Murder 1: May 19, 1990. David Spears of Bradenton, Florida, informs his boss (Spears is a heavy equipment operator) that he is going to be heading up to Orlando, to visit his ex-wife. He sets off that day from his workplace in Sarasota.

2: While traveling through Citrus County, he picks up Aileen Wuornos. It is likely that they had sex, as a used condom was later found near his naked (apart from a baseball cap) body.

Rival Colour Ltd BLACK TEXT BLACK

3: Having had sex, Wuornos produces the .22 handgun she carried with her. She shoots Spears a total of six times, killing him at the scene.

4: Wuornos dumps Spears’ body along Interstate 75 in Citrus County. She has removed the license plate and leaves the doors to the vehicle unlocked.

5: Later, at Ormand Beach, Wuornos pawns a set of machine tools that match the description of those taken from Spears’ truck.

SER P159.pgs 18.06.2010 12:55

Rival Colour Ltd

11

The Pacific War

APRIL 2018 Publication

ANDREW WIEST AND GREGORY L. MATTSON

The Third Reich

From the attack on Pearl Harbor in 1941 to the bombing of Nagasaki in 1945, The Pacific War examines in depth the whirlwind Japanese victories of 1941-42, and how the Allies organised a counterattack, gradually forcing the Japanese on to the defensive. The authoritative text is complemented by full-colour maps and artworks of the uniforms, armoured fighting vehicles, aircraft and ships – with specification tables – that took part in the campaign.

chris mcnab

The Third Reich covers the geography, economy, political structures, legal framework, military organization, social policies and ideology of Hitler’s Germany. Maps range from pre-war annexations to the location of concentration camps, while charts offer information as diverse as industrial output and verdicts at the Nuremberg trials.

Packed with hundreds of maps and graphs, this book offers wide-ranging data on one of the twentieth century’s most complex regimes.

WORLD WAR II GERMANY:

The Third Reich

240 x 189mm (9½ x 7½”) 192pp 50,000 words 150 photographs, diagrams and maps ISBN: 978-1-78274-598-3 £19.99 Paperback

Campaigns of World War II:

The Pacific War

297 x 227mm (11¾ x 9”) 256 pages 70,000 words 65 maps and artworks, 210 b/w photos ISBN: 978-1-78274-607-2 £22.99 Paperback

122 / Anzio and Monte Cassino

Anzio and Monte Cassino / 123

Chapter six

they were confronted only by the 94th Division, which was thinly stretched from the river to the town of Terracina 48km (30 miles) to the north and had yet to experience combat. In planning their defences the German commanders had hoped that the natural barrier of the river itself and 24,000 thickly sown mines might provide enough assistance to stymie a crossing. The attack commenced at 9 p.m. and combat engineers worked to clear the mines and mark exits on the far bank while German artillery came

Anzio and Monte Cassino The attempt to outflank the Germans at Cassino by landing at Anzio ended in failure as the Allies became bogged down in the beachhead.

above

S

ergeant Ross Carter, a veteran of the arduous campaign in Italy, observed Christmas Day 1944 amid the misery of battle-scarred Monte Sammucro. Below, the town of San Pietro lay in ruins, its destruction so thorough that the surviving civilians did not bother to salvage much of anything. They rebuilt their town some distance away, leaving the heaps of rubble and jumbled remains of their former homes as mute testimony to the ravages of war.

‘For 17 days, we had existed on the peak,’ wrote Carter, ‘in freezing weather, constant rain, icy winds and inconceivable danger. In all that time we had never washed our hands or shaved, and had managed to get our boots off three times. Lice were eating the hide off our bodies and desperation was eating out our hearts.’

The desperation in the Allied ranks was, to a degree, being felt on a strategic scale as the frustrating advance toward Rome proceeded at a snail’s pace. Progress had been slow, even at times non-existent. The prospects for immediate forward movement seemed to be fleeting at best as the bulk of Allied resources were funnelled to England in preparation for the Normandy invasion. For all intents and purposes the Italian campaign had reached a stalemate. By mid-December the Fifth Army offensive had ground to a halt, while the

What would Europe have looked like if Nazi Germany had been victorious in World War II? What were the unrealized plans for a Europe dominated by the Third Reich?

Arranged in chapters covering topics such as leadership, war, physical infrastructure, empire building, race, culture and weaponry, Hitler’s Masterplan reveals the true scale of Hitler’s vision for a Greater Germany and a world dominated by Nazi ideology.

WORLD WAR II GERMANY:

Hitler’s Masterplan

240 x 189mm (9½ x 7½”) 192pp 50,000 words 150 photographs, diagrams and maps ISBN: 9781782745945 £19.99 Paperback

116

this state organization eventually came to manage the affairs of 20 million workers. Ostensibly it was

AVeRAGe WORkING HOuRS FOR GeRMAN WORkeRS, 1929–44 50 49.1

49.1 49 48.7 48

48.3

47.6 47.6

47

46

46.5 46.0

45

44

44.4

43 42.9 42

41

40 1929

1933

1935

1938

1939

1940

1941

1942

1943

1944

there to promote workers’ rights, including improving workplace conditions, stabilizing wages across key industries and providing worker education. Although it did achieve some elements of these goals, at its heart the DAF was committed simply to exploiting the German workforce for maximum profit and productivity.

Wages did increase in small annual increments, but these increases were often offset by a leap in working hours – by 1939 many workers in key industries were putting in working weeks of 70-plus hours, with few outlets to redress grievances.

Furthermore, wage deductions to compulsory state schemes (including membership of the DAF) also reduced salaries further, the total deductions by 1939 averaging about 18 per cent.

As we can see, Germany’s ‘economic miracle’ was bought at a cost to workers’ rights. Germany’s foreign currency exchange situation, plus its needs for raw materials, meant that the economic rise could not be sustained indefinitely. For Hitler, however, such considerations did not affect his plans to create the physical structure of a ‘ThousandYear Reich’.

eMPLOYMeNT BY OCCuPATIONAL TYPe, 1933 unskilled workers Skilled workers Professional /white collar Master craftsmen Farmers Merchants Civil servants Managers /owners

90

10.1 million 4.5 million 4.1 million 2.6 million 2.1 million 1.6 million 1.5 million 234,000

State Architecture

the physical reich

n ReIch chaNcelleRy

The Reichskanzlei (Reich chancellery) was hitler’s seat of power in Berlin.

It was a vast complex, designed to overawe visitors with its grandeur.

The plan of the chancellery here shows the building after its extensive reconstruction by albert Speer, a redevelopment that cemented Speer’s influence within the Third Reich. hitler was extremely interested in every aspect of its design, as he felt it had to express National Socialist ideology – he once stated that ‘Berlin must change its face to adapt to its new mission’.

The chancellery was eventually demolished by Soviet occupiers.

1 22

24

N

Bahnhof Dutzendteich

2

26

Bestehende Gebüade

10

9

14 15

6

17

16 1 2

21

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11

Mittelbau mit Marmorgalerie (Mittelbau Marble Gallery) eingang zur Reichskanzlei (entrance to the Reich Chancellery) eingang zur Präsidialkanzlei (entrance to the Office of the Reich President) kasernenbauten (Barracks Buildings) Hebebühne zu den katakomben (Lift to the Catacombs) Gartenportal zu Hitlers Arbeitszimmer (Garden portal to Hitler’s Office) Bauzufahrt zum Führerbunker (entranceway to the Führer Bunker) Zufahrt – Tiefgarage und Führerbunker (Access: underground Parking and Führer Bunker) einfahrt – Tiefgarage und Feuerwehr (entrance – Parking and Fire Brigade) Zufahrt – Führerbunker (Access – Führer Bunker) Haus kempka (kempka House)

13

5

25

3

20

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

Kdf-Stadt

18

19

Gewächshaus (Greenhouse) ehrenhof (Courtyard of Honour) Festsaal mit Wintergarten (Ballroom and Conservatory) Alte Reichskanzlei (Old Reich Chancellery) Speisesaal (Dining Hall) Propagandaministerium (Ministry of Propaganda) erweiterungsbau zur Reichskanzlei (Reich Chancellery extension) u-Bahn-eingang Wilhelmsplatz (Wilhelmsplatz Subway entrance) kaufhaus Wertheim (Wertheim Department Store) Leipziger Platz (Leipziger Plaza) Ministergärten (Ministry Garden) Tiergarten (Animal Garden – Zoo) Hermann-Göring-Straße (Herman Göring Street) Voßstraße (Voss Street) Wilhelmstraße (Wilhelm Street)

91

1

Luitpoldarena

2

Gefallenendenkmal

3

Rednerkanzel

4

Luitpoldhalle

5

kongresshalle

6

Grosse Strasse

7

Deutches Stasion

8

Märzfeld

9

ehrentribune des Märzfeldes

10 Städisches Stadion 11 Zeppelinfeld 12 Huaptribune des Zeppelinfeldes 13 Trafostation 14 Stadionbad

Großer Dutzendteich

11

Kleiner Dutzendteich

12

13

10 6

14

2061_156-163_GREY.qxd

Page 116

2061_112-117_GREY.qxd

high, similar in style to the Arc de Triomphe in Paris. The north-south avenue – known as the ‘Avenue of Victory’ – ran through the arch, and would be five kilometres (three miles) in length. At the northern end was to be a huge open forum, the Großer Platz (Great Square), dominated by the vast, domed Volkshalle (People’s Hall). Sketched out by Hitler himself

(although given to Speer to realize), this building was much inspired by the Pantheon of Rome, but was on an even greater scale. The height at the summit of the dome was to be 290m (950ft) from the street, while the dome’s diameter would measure 250m (820ft). Inside, three tiers of seating would have enclosed an echoing, lofty space – the building

bayonets and grenades While the fighting heated up in the east, the Eighth Army sector on the Adriatic remained quiet, and it was conceivable that if Clark’s offensive succeeded reinforcements could be forthcoming from the area of inactivity.

On 12 January the 2nd Moroccan and 3rd Algerian divisions were launched against the mountains north of Cassino.

Under French command, these units gained 6.4km (4 miles) in four days, often fighting hand-to-hand with the Germans. Bayonets and grenades were frequently employed at close distances. Vietinghoff decided to abandon nearby Mount Trocchio without a fight so that Senger would have adequate forces to contest a river crossing and defend the entrance to the Liri Valley.

When the British 5th and 56th divisions launched an assault by boat and amphibious DUKWs across the Garigliano on 17 January

leFt

The devastation of war is apparent in this view of the shattered wreckage of an Italian village. Only the bell tower of a church remains standing, and the ruins still smoulder.

FühReRhauPTquaRTIeR Führer’s Headquarters

October 23, 1976

n Vierjahresplan (Four-Year Plan) & Rüstungsministerium (Defence Ministry)

158

|

117

made their arrest—a fact that seemed to amuse Berkowitz.

JUDGED TO BE SANE The subsequent trial of David Berkowitz rested largely upon evaluations of his mental health—he quickly confessed to the shootings, so responsibility was not in question. Most of the evidence seemed to point to Berkowitz being a sufferer of paranoid schizophrenia. His apartment, for example, was scrawled with messages such as “I kill for my master.” Yet other psychiatrists believed that the apparent madness was a pretence, and pushed that he be found sane as well as guilty. This viewpoint prevailed, and on June 12, 1978 he was sentenced to 365 years in prison for six murders. He is in prison to this day.

VICTIM

AGE

D E TA I L S

Donna Lauria

18

Both Lauria and Valenti are shot outside Donna’s home in

Jody Valenti

19

Pelham Bay. Lauria is killed and Valenti injured.

Rosemary Keenan

18

Rosemary Keenan and her boyfriend Carl Denaro are shot in

Carl Denaro

25

Forest Hills Gardens, Queens. Both are injured in the attack.

Donna DeMasi

16

Joanne Lomino

18

Christine Freund

26

Christine Freund and John Diel are shot in their car outside a

John Diel

30

movie theater in Queens. Diel suffers superficial injuries, but

n Reichswerke Hermann Göring

9

HP Zollhaus Bahnhof Märzfeld 16

16 Zeltlager der Wehrmacht

n Montan- und Rüstungsgesellschaften (Mining and Defence Companies)

n Waffen- und Maschinenblock (Weapons and Machines Section)

n Schiffahtsblock (Shipping Section)

n Berg- und Hüttenwerksgesellschaften Ost (Mining and Metallurgical Companies East)

n Sonstige Monopolgesellschaften (Other Monopolies)

n Spinnstoff- und Fasergesellschaft (Textile and Fibre Company)

n Chemie-Ost (Chemistry East)

n Superphosphat Ost (Superphosphate East)

n Konstinental Öl AG (Konstinental Oil AG)

n Betriebliche Ostwirtschaft (Eastern Economy Operations)

n Betriebliche Wirtschaft Serbiens (Economic Operations Serbia)

n NuReMBeRG Rally GRouND

n Betriebliche Wirtschaft Rumäniens (Economic Operations Romania)

The Nuremberg rallies, also called the parteitage (Party Days), were spectacular political/ceremonial events in the Nazi calendar. The rally ground was never quite developed to the full extent of hitler’s ambitions, but it was an imposing

n Gesamte Kohlewirtschaft (Total Coal Production)

n Treuhänder gesamter Erzbergbau (Trustee Ore Mining)

space nevertheless. The main road that ran down the central axis of the ground measured more than 2km (1.2 miles) in length and was 40m (132ft) wide. Towers, temple-like structures, stadia and public address platforms, plus the theatrical lighting additions of albert Speer, made the Nuremberg venue a place of great visual power.

n Sonstige Treuhandsch. HGW mit SS-Betrieb (Other Trusts – HGW with SS-Operations)

n Militärgouverneue, zivile Parteverwaltg. im Osten (New Military Governments, Civilian in the East)

October 26, 1976

Donna DeMasi and Joanne Lomino are shot while chatting outside Lomino’s home. Both are wounded; Joanne is paralyzed.

January 30, 1977

Freund dies later of her wounds.

March 8, 1977

Virginia Voskerichian

19

Shot as she walks home from Columbia University. She is killed at the scene by a head shot.

97

Westchester County Deputy Sheriff Craig Glassman, who lived near Berkowitz, shows two threatening letters he received. The letters had a similar style of handwriting to those written by the “Son of Sam.”

the young couple escaped with minor injuries, but the second shooting resulted in one young woman dead and her boyfriend blinded. Yet from this last shooting came a solid lead for the police.

SER P112-117_5-116.pgs 28.05.2010 11:04

April 17, 1977

Alexander Esau

20

Valentina Suriani

18

Alexander Esau and Valentina Suriani are both shot and killed at close quarters, the shooting occurring only a few blocks from the Voskerichian shooting.

Rival Colour Ltd TEXT BLACK

28/5/10

11:55

Tracking a Serial Killer 240 x 189mm (9½ x 7½”) 192pp 50,000 words 100 b/w photographs ISBN: 978-1-78274-613-3 £16.99 Hardback

2061_156-163_GREY.qxd

Page 158

18/6/10

12:35

Page 159

Page 117

Timeline of a Murderer—Berkowitz’s Shootings D AT E July 29, 1976

8

11:42

DAVID BERKOWITZ

STRuCTuRe OF THe ReICHSWeRke HeRMANN GöRING, 1945

u

18/6/10

A witness near the scene of the shooting reported a car speeding away with a parking ticket on its windshield. Police checked both the parking tickets issued that day and cross-referenced them to the description of the vehicle. The information pointed to a vehicle registered by one David Berkowitz of 35 Pine Street, Yonkers. Further details about Berkowitz provided by Sam Carr led police to be confident that they had their man.

The police quickly swooped on Berkowitz’s address. They spotted his car, in which the police found a duffel bag holding ammunition and a rifle on the back seat, plus a letter written in the handwriting and style of the Son of Sam. They put the car under observation, and eventually Berkowitz emerged from his apartment block and climbed into the vehicle. The police rushed in and

BLACK TEXT BLACK

10

10:46

7

15 SS-kaserne

96

28/5/10

Although Hitler oversaw huge public works during his time in power, he envisioned an even greater future for Germany and its architecture. Berlin, in particular, was to have become Welthauptstadt Germania (World Capital Germania) – quite literally, the centre of the world.

To demonstrate this status, it would have to be transformed into a place of transcendent grandeur, the perfect vision of a thousand-year empire.

The guiding lines of Welthauptstadt Germania were to be provided by two huge avenues, forming a crossroads at their meeting point.

At the intersection was to be a huge triumphal arch more than 100m (328ft)

5

15 12

4 11

1000m

3 4

8 7

3000ft

0 0

THe ReICHSkANZLeI (ReICH CHANCeLLeRY)

An American infantryman takes up a position in the ruins of a house at Monte Cassino. The Allies attempted four times to take the heights and the Benedictine abbey which crowned it.

CHAPTER THREE: PREDATORS

Imperial Plans

NuReMBeRG RALLY GROuND, 1940

23

|

the physical reich

One of the most visible reminders of the new National Socialist regime was its state and party buildings.

During the 1920s and early 1930s, there had been much debate amongst architects, and interested party members, about the appropriate architectural style to manifest National Socialist ideology ‘in stone’. One of the most influential voices to emerge from the chatter was Paul Schultze-Naumburg, an ardent nationalist who struck a chord with Hitler.

Schultze-Naumburg condemned the industrial starkness of modernist architecture, and instead wanted a return to traditional German forms of design, plus the orderly beauty and authoritarianism of classical Roman and Greek edifices.

Hence the defining quality of Nazi architecture was to be Ordnung

opposite

This gripping, fully-illustrated true crime book explores a range of serial murderers in an innovative format, using timelines both of the murderers’ lives but also precise hour-by-hour timelines of the crimes. Featuring 25 killers from the 19th century to the present day, the book enables the reader to understand some of the thinking of men such as Ted Bundy, Andrei Chikatilo and Volker Eckert.

2061_112-117_GREY.qxd

Deutsche Arbeitsfront (DAF; German Labour Front). Created on 10 May 1933, and headed by Dr Robert Ley,

Physically exhausted, the Prime Minister was diagnosed with pneumonia while in Tunis to visit General Eisenhower’s headquarters on 11 December. During a week in bed he was consumed with worry and finally decided that something must be done to rejuvenate the campaign in Italy. The solution, he reasoned, was the amphibious operation. His sights set

undefended Cedro Hill after failing to capture it four days earlier, and two tough days of fighting by the 168th Infantry, 34th Division secured Cervaro after a lengthy artillery bombardment and air strikes. Now, Clark’s army was drawn up to the banks of the Rapido, facing the heart of the Gustav Line defences, which were located beyond the opposite bank of the stream. Approximately 90,000 troops of the German XIV Panzer Corps were entrenched in the positions around Cassino, along the river and in the vicinity of Sant’ Ambrogio.

chris mcnab

Chris mcnab

t h e p h y s ic a l reich

Churchill in turmoil

reported missing and more than 500 were lost to exposure to the elements and such maladies as trench foot. Most of the missing armoured infantrymen eventually turned up, but among the dead was a heroic combat engineer sergeant, Joe C. Specker.

Advancing along the slope of Mount Porchia under cover of darkness, Specker had been sent forward by his company commander on a reconnaissance of enemy positions in his unit’s path. When he returned Specker reported that a German machine gun nest and several snipers were located directly in the path of his company. He volunteered to take a machine gun forward to place fire on the German positions and set out alone with the weapon and a box of ammunition.

The sergeant’s Medal of Honour citation reads: ‘He was observed by the enemy as he walked along and was severely wounded by the deadly fire directed at him. Though so seriously wounded that he was unable to walk, he continued to drag himself over the jagged edges of rock and rough terrain until he reached the position at which he desired to set up his machine gun. He set up the gun so well and fired so accurately that the enemy machine gun nest was silenced and the remainder of the snipers forced to retire, enabling his platoon to obtain their objective.

SGT Specker was found dead at his gun.

His personal bravery, self sacrifice, and determination were an inspiration to his officers and fellow soldiers.’

British troops subsequently occupied an

Tracking a Serial Killer

Hitler’s Masterplan

t he p h y s i c al r eic h

Marked with the distinctive black cross, the German SdKfz Marder II selfpropelled assault weapon was armed with a 75mm (2.95in) cannon and a light machine gun. This version remained in production until 1944.

Eighth Army remained before the Gustav Line defences north of the Sangro River around Ortona.

Although it had appeared that an amphibious operation intended to outflank the Gustav Line defences and facilitate the drive for Rome had been cancelled for good, the stillborn Operation Shingle was rapidly revived as a result of two events, the restructuring of command in the Mediterranean with a distinctive British perspective and the illness of Prime Minister Winston Churchill. The Italian campaign had long been Churchill’s favourite, and the Mediterranean Theatre was of particular interest to him. Well aware that the window of opportunity for a notable success in Italy was rapidly closing, Churchill departed the conferences at Cairo and Teheran decidedly pessimistic about the prosecution of the war there.

down steadily. It was virtually impossible to construct bridges during the first 24 hours.

Nevertheless, 10 full battalions of infantry crossed the Garigliano and Senger soon began to realize the gravity of the situation. Bypassing Vietinghoff in the chain of command, Senger telephoned Kesselring, who realized a British breakthrough to the Liri Valley would outflank the defences of Monte Cassino, unhinge the Gustav Line and force a retreat of the entire XIV Panzer Corps toward Rome.

SER P117.pgs 18.06.2010 12:02

Rival Colour Ltd

|

AILEEN WUORNOS

CHAPTER FOUR: FEMALE MURDERERS

paranoid schizophrenic, Dale would end up incarcerated in mental institutions following convictions for child abuse. Although it was a blessing that Aileen would grow up free from his influence, there remains the question of what genetic legacy Dale left his unwanted daughter.

(Dale hanged himself in 1969.)

Diane finally had enough of her responsibilities when Aileen was four years old, and abandoned her and her brother. The duty of raising them passed to their Finnish grandparents, Lauri and Britta Wuornos, who lived in Troy, Michigan. The move did not bring the security nor love the children desperately needed in these formative years. Later Aileen alleged that she was sexually abused by her grandfather and beaten regularly by both grandparents. Whatever the reality of these claims, it is true that she grew into a disruptive and aggressive adolescent. She was sexually promiscuous by the time she was 12 years old, and had her first child at the age of 15—it went straight to adoption.

Shortly afterward, her grandmother died, and both children became wards of court.

From then on it was downhill fast for the young girl. By the time she was in her late teens, she was working as a prostitute between intermittent deadend jobs, and getting in regular trouble with the law, not only for prostitution but also on charges such as drunk driving and disorderly conduct. She also appeared to be developing an early love affair with firearms—on one occasion she was arrested and charged for having fired a gun from a moving vehicle—and in her early 20s had also been charged with assault.

As Aileen drifted across America, there were a couple of potential bright spots. In Florida, she met a wealthy 69-year-old yacht club president, Lewis Fell, and struck up an unlikely relationship. They were married in March 1976, but within a few months the marriage was annulled—Fell discovered that Aileen’s tendency to fight in bars spilled over into the home, when Aileen beat her aging husband with his own cane. Shortly afterward, Aileen shot herself in the stomach in a botched suicide attempt.

Also in 1976, Aileen inherited $10,000 when Keith died from throat cancer in July. In now characteristic style, she took all the money and blew it within two months on drink, drugs, and a car (which she crashed and destroyed). At this point it

BLACK TEXT BLACK

was hard to see how the life of Aileen Wuornos could get much lower.

DESCENT The 1980s marked a new, and appalling, era in the life of Aileen Wuornos. Having squandered an opportunistic marriage and a sudden inheritance, she embraced crime as her principal means of The Last Resort Bar in Port Orange, Florida, the scene of Wuornos’ arrest for an outstanding warrant (not a murder charge). Only when she was in custody did police begin to connect her with the murders.

SER P156-163_3-158.pgs 28.05.2010 12:15

|

159

Timeline of a Murder 1: May 19, 1990. David Spears of Bradenton, Florida, informs his boss (Spears is a heavy equipment operator) that he is going to be heading up to Orlando, to visit his ex-wife. He sets off that day from his workplace in Sarasota.

2: While traveling through Citrus County, he picks up Aileen Wuornos. It is likely that they had sex, as a used condom was later found near his naked (apart from a baseball cap) body.

Rival Colour Ltd BLACK TEXT BLACK

3: Having had sex, Wuornos produces the .22 handgun she carried with her. She shoots Spears a total of six times, killing him at the scene.

4: Wuornos dumps Spears’ body along Interstate 75 in Citrus County. She has removed the license plate and leaves the doors to the vehicle unlocked.

5: Later, at Ormand Beach, Wuornos pawns a set of machine tools that match the description of those taken from Spears’ truck.

SER P159.pgs 18.06.2010 12:55

Rival Colour Ltd

11

100 Best-Selling Albums of the 70s

100 Best-Selling Albums of the 90s

With vinyl sales at their highest in 25 years, 100 Best-selling Albums of the 70s is an expert celebration of popular music from Rumours to Houses of the Holy, from Dark Side of the Moon to Off The Wall. Each album entry is accompanied by the original sleeve artwork and is packed full of facts and recording information, along with an authoritative commentary on the record.

From Nirvana to U2, from Garth Brooks to Shania Twain, from Lauryn Hill to Celine Dion to Alanis Morissette, each entry in 100 Best-Selling Albums of the 90s is accompanied by the original sleeve artwork and is packed full of facts and recording information, along with an authoritative commentary by an expert in the field.

Dan auty, chris barrett, justin cawthorne, pete dodd

Recorded in: London, UK

1 Shine On You Crazy Diamond (Parts I-V) (13:30) 2 Welcome to the Machine (7:26) 3 Have A Cigar (5:08) 4 Wish You Were Here (5:40) 5 Shine On You Crazy Diamond (Parts VI-IX) (12:22)

Producer: Pink Floyd

Total album length: 44 minutes 150

Grammy awards: Record of the year; Album of the year; Best pop vocal performance (female); Song of the year – You’ve Got A Friend Label: US: Ode; UK: A&M

Personnel: Carole King Joel O’Brien Charles Larkey Danny Kootch James Taylor Russ Kunkel Ralph Schuckett Producer: Lou Adler

Recorded in: New York, USA

1 I Feel The Earth Move (2:57) 2 So Far Away (3:56) 3 It’s Too Late (3:53) 4 Home Again (2:30) 5 Beautiful (3:06) 6 Way Over Yonder (4:46) 7 You’ve Got A Friend (5:07)

8 Where You Lead (3:18) 9 Will You Love Me Tomorrow? (4:11) 10 Smackwater Jack (3:43) 11 Tapestry (3:12) 12 (You Make Me Feel) Like A Natural Woman (3:39) Total album length: 45 minutes

190

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Red Intro (1:51) How Many Mics (4:28) Ready Or Not (3:47) Zealots (4:20) The Beast (5:37) Fu-Gee-La (4:20) Family Business (5:43) Killing Me Softly With His Song (4:58) The Score (5:02) The Mask (4:50) Cowboys (5:23) No Woman, No Cry (4:33) Manifest/Outro (5:59) Fu-Gee-La (4:24) Fu-Gee-La (5:27)

Total album length: 67 minutes

l • Album sales: 10,600,000 l • Release date: September 1991 l

he single most important rock album of the 1990s, Nevermind opened the door for dozens of similarly angst-ridden bands from Seattle and sounded the death knell for the commercial glam-metal movement and power ballads of the previous decade. The album sold over 10,000,000 copies worldwide and made lead singer/guitarist Kurt Cobain a massive, if sometimes, reluctant rock icon.

While Cobain’s lyrics were unquestionably powerful and heartfelt, the true success of Nevermind came from the music. Butch Vig managed to make the band sound both slick and raw at the same time – this was an expensively

Number One singles: None Grammy awards: None Label: US & UK: Geffen Recorded in: Van Nuys, USA

Personnel: Kurt Cobain (d. 1994) Krist Novoselic Dave Grohl Kirk Canning Producer: Butch Vig

produced album on a major label, but it was also loud, brash and sounded very real.

The words may have been uncompromising, but the tunes were not – genre-defining songs such as ‘Smells Like Teen Spirit’, ‘Come as You Are’, ‘Lithium’ or ‘On A Plain’ have classic rock structures, enabled by Krist Novoselic and Dave Grohl’s powerhouse rhythm section and Cobain’s vocal roar. It wasn’t all pedal-to-the-metal stuff – ‘Polly’ is a chilling acoustic tale of kidnap and the closing ‘Something In The Way’ is marked by Kirk Canning’s mournful cello – but as a blast of pure punk rock energy, Nevermind has had few rivals before or since.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Smells Like Teen Spirit (5:02) In Bloom (4:15) Come As You Are (3:39) Breed (3:04) Lithium (4:17) Polly (2:56) Territorial Pissings (2:23) Drain You (3:44) Lounge Act (2:37) Stay Away (3:33) On A Plain (3:17) Something In The Way (3:51)

Total album length: 42 minutes 158

Bridges

The 80s saw great albums both from recording artists who had been around since the 60s, such as Paul Simon and Tina Turner, and new acts, such as Prince, George Michael and Tracey Chapman. Combining information from both the US and UK charts, 100 Best-Selling Albums of the 80s is an authoritative chart of the decade.

From ancient abandoned aqueducts to today’s feats of engineering, Bridges is a pictorial celebration of 200 suspension bridges, iron bridges, stone bridges, viaducts, railway bridges, footbridges and rope bridges from the ancient world to the present day. Organised chronologically and presented in a landscape format with informative captions, Bridges is a stunning collection of images.

100 Best-Selling Albums of the 80s 184 x 210mm (7¼ x 8¼”) 224pp 100 colour photographs 45,000 words ISBN: 978-1-78274-621-8 £12.99 Hardback

David ross

Bridges 213 x 290mm (8¼ x 11½”) 224pp 10,000 words 200 colour photographs ISBN: 978-1-78274-576-1 £19.99 Hardback

Purple Rain

l • Album sales: 13,600,000 l • Release date: August 1984 l

P

rince’s previous album,1999, had brought the diminutive singer considerable success in the US, but it was his soundtrack to the 1984 hit film Purple Rain that was to make him and backing band The Revolution, into global superstars.

The album spent 24 weeks at the top of the US album charts, reached Number Seven in the UK, and gave Prince his first two US Number One singles with ‘When Doves Cry’ and ‘Let’s Go Crazy’. The title track reached Number Two in the US, while ‘I Would Die 4 U’ and ‘Take Me With U’ charted in the Billboard Hot 100.

Prince & The Revolution

Number One singles: UK: Prakazrel ‘Pras’ Killing Me Softly; Ready Wyclef Jean or Not Garfield ‘Gus’ Parkinson Red Alert Grammy awards: Ras Baraka Best rap album; Best Handel Tucker R&B performance by Robbie Shakespeare a duo Sly Dunbar or group – Killing Me Forte Softly With His Song Omega Diamond D Label: US: Ruffhouse Pace 1 UK: Columbia Young Zee Ra Digga Recorded in: New Jersey & New York, USA; Producers: Kingston, Jamaica Wyclef Shawn King Personnel: Lauryn Hill Lauryn Hill Salaam Remi

184 x 210mm (7¼ x 8¼”) 224pp 100 colour photographs 45,000 words ISBN: 978-1-78274-622-5 £12.99 Hardback

Nevermind

T

conscience. The group served up a fascinating mixture of soul, reggae, gospel and blues, all within the framework of inventive hip-hop.

It was the group’s treatment of ‘Killing Me Softly’ and Hill’s moving vocal on ‘Ready or Not’ that drove The Score to multi-platinum success.

Released as singles, the former topped the UK chart for five weeks, followed by a three week stint by ‘Ready Or Not’. While the singles failed to hit the Top 40 in the US, The Score stayed at the top of the Billboard chart for four weeks.

100 Best-Selling Albums of the 90s

100 Best-Selling Albums of the 80s Dan auty, chris barrett, justin cawthorne, pete dodd

7

l • Album sales: 7,200,000 l • Release date: February 1996 l

he Fugee’s breakthrough album showcased the eclectic tastes of all three MCs – Lauryn Hill, Pras and Wyclef – while offering an incredibly popular alternative to the macho-posturing of the gangster rap that dominated the mid-1990s.

Innovative and derivative in equal measure, The Score blends the work of Roberta Flack and Bob Marley with cinematic constraints and a social

74

24

The Score

T

Nirvana

Label: US: Columbia; UK: Harvest

Number One singles: US: It’s Too Late; You’ve Got A Friend

own right Tapestry stands as her one glorious moment. Two of the album’s songs, ‘Will You Love Me Tomorrow’ and ‘(You Make Me Feel Like) A Natural Woman’, are reinterpretations from that period with Goffin, but it is the newer songs that notably shine. In ‘It’s Too Late’, knowingly charting the breakdown of a relationship – she had split with Goffin three years earlier – she created a US chart-topping single for herself (it reached Number Six in the UK), while in ‘You’ve Got A Friend’ she wrote a US Number One for James Taylor. In turn, Taylor adds backing vocals and guitar to the song’s original version.

Tapestry clocked up more than 300 weeks on the US chart, 15 of them at Number One, while it was named Album of the Year at the 1971 Grammy Awards.

Fugees

Grammy awards: None

Personnel: Dave Gilmour Roger Waters Rick Wright Dave Mason

l • Album sales: 10,000,000 l • Release date: March 1971 l

arole King tapped into the singer-songwriter movement then taking shape to create an album that set a new watermark for female artists. Unassuming, yet beautifully crafted, this 1971 release paved the way forward for female singer/songwriters, both in terms of the quality of its songs and the honest, highly personal style in which she delivers them.

Together with her husband Gerry Goffin, King had penned a string of hits for others in the previous decade, among them ‘Up On the Roof’ and ‘The Locomotion’, but as an artist in her

Carole King

Number One singles: None

71

Tapestry

C

takes the listener on a sort of aural space shipride, with heavy use of synthesizers and futuristic sound effects as well as more conventional instruments such as acoustic guitars and piano.

Signs that the band’s bassist and lyricist Roger Waters was becoming exasperated with the whole business of music – and perhaps with his fellow band members too – also take shape on the record; in ‘Have A Cigar’ he has a record company executive saying ‘the band is just fantastic/that is really what I think/by the way, which one’s Pink?’

Wish You Were Here scored a Number One in the album charts on both sides of the Atlantic, only the second time thus far that the band had topped the chart in their home market.

184 x 210mm (7¼ x 8¼”) 224pp 100 colour photographs 45,000 words ISBN: 978-1-78274-620-1 £12.99 Hardback

Sleeve artwork by Chuck Beeson, Roland Young and Jim McCrary

l • Album sales: 6,000,000 l • Release date: September 1975 l

A

Pink Floyd

11

Wish You Were Here

nother marathon session of recording activity – seven months – at London’s famous Abbey Road studios went into producing Wish You Were Here, Pink Floyd’s follow-up to the highly regarded Dark Side Of The Moon, which was also recorded at Abbey Road. The band came close to break-up during recording (both Water’s and Mason were splitting from their wives at the time) but many critics, including Dave Gilmour, now see the album as one of Pink Floyd’s best.

It opens with a clear homage to founding member – and, at the time, institutionalized – Syd Barrett on ‘Shine On You Crazy Diamond (Parts I – IV)’ which had to be re-recorded due to an inexperienced sound engineer. The album then

Sleeve artwork by Hipgnosis and George Hardie

25

100 Best-Selling Albums of the 70s

Sleeve artwork by Robert Fisher

Hamish champ

Number One singles: US: When Doves Cry; Let’s Go Crazy

With a reputation for lyrical lewdness, the Prince retained his right to shock with tracks such as ‘Darling Nikki’, but there was a growing sense of maturity in the starkly arresting ‘When Doves Cry’. The album won Prince two Grammy awards and an Academy Award for Best Song Score.

In addition to making the soundtrack, Prince took the starring role in Purple Rain, a loosely autobiographical film about a young Minneapolis rock musician struggling to make it big. The movie grossed over $5 million dollars at the box office and functioned as an extended promotional video for the album. Coupled with the record breaking success of his 1984–85 Purple Rain tour, the hype helped make the album into the biggest hit of Prince’s career.

Recorded in: Los Angeles, USA

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Personnel: Prince Wendy Melvoin Lisa Coleman Grammy awards: Matt Fink Best album or original Brown Mark score for a motion picture; Bobby Z Best rock performance by Apollonia a duo or group with vocal Novi Novog David Coleman Label: US & UK: Warner Suzie Katayama Producers: Prince The Revolution

Let’s Go Crazy (4:39) Take Me With U (3:54) The Beautiful Ones (5:15) Computer Blue (3:59) Darling Nikki (4:15) When Doves Cry (5:52) I Would Die 4 U (2:51) Baby I’m a Star (4:20) Purple Rain (8:45)

LEFT:

ABOVE:

Golden Gate Bridge, San Francisco, California, USA Opened in 1937, the Golden Gate Bridge was, until 1964, the longest suspension bridge main span in the world. It has only been closed three times due to strong winds.

Ponte Vecchio, Florence, Italy Rebuilt in 1345, the Ponte Vecchio is noted for still having shops built along it. Butchers initially occupied the shops; the present tenants are jewellers, art dealers and souvenir sellers.

Total album length: 44 minutes 202

12

13

100 Best-Selling Albums of the 70s

100 Best-Selling Albums of the 90s

With vinyl sales at their highest in 25 years, 100 Best-selling Albums of the 70s is an expert celebration of popular music from Rumours to Houses of the Holy, from Dark Side of the Moon to Off The Wall. Each album entry is accompanied by the original sleeve artwork and is packed full of facts and recording information, along with an authoritative commentary on the record.

From Nirvana to U2, from Garth Brooks to Shania Twain, from Lauryn Hill to Celine Dion to Alanis Morissette, each entry in 100 Best-Selling Albums of the 90s is accompanied by the original sleeve artwork and is packed full of facts and recording information, along with an authoritative commentary by an expert in the field.

Dan auty, chris barrett, justin cawthorne, pete dodd

Recorded in: London, UK

1 Shine On You Crazy Diamond (Parts I-V) (13:30) 2 Welcome to the Machine (7:26) 3 Have A Cigar (5:08) 4 Wish You Were Here (5:40) 5 Shine On You Crazy Diamond (Parts VI-IX) (12:22)

Producer: Pink Floyd

Total album length: 44 minutes 150

Grammy awards: Record of the year; Album of the year; Best pop vocal performance (female); Song of the year – You’ve Got A Friend Label: US: Ode; UK: A&M

Personnel: Carole King Joel O’Brien Charles Larkey Danny Kootch James Taylor Russ Kunkel Ralph Schuckett Producer: Lou Adler

Recorded in: New York, USA

1 I Feel The Earth Move (2:57) 2 So Far Away (3:56) 3 It’s Too Late (3:53) 4 Home Again (2:30) 5 Beautiful (3:06) 6 Way Over Yonder (4:46) 7 You’ve Got A Friend (5:07)

8 Where You Lead (3:18) 9 Will You Love Me Tomorrow? (4:11) 10 Smackwater Jack (3:43) 11 Tapestry (3:12) 12 (You Make Me Feel) Like A Natural Woman (3:39) Total album length: 45 minutes

190

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Red Intro (1:51) How Many Mics (4:28) Ready Or Not (3:47) Zealots (4:20) The Beast (5:37) Fu-Gee-La (4:20) Family Business (5:43) Killing Me Softly With His Song (4:58) The Score (5:02) The Mask (4:50) Cowboys (5:23) No Woman, No Cry (4:33) Manifest/Outro (5:59) Fu-Gee-La (4:24) Fu-Gee-La (5:27)

Total album length: 67 minutes

l • Album sales: 10,600,000 l • Release date: September 1991 l

he single most important rock album of the 1990s, Nevermind opened the door for dozens of similarly angst-ridden bands from Seattle and sounded the death knell for the commercial glam-metal movement and power ballads of the previous decade. The album sold over 10,000,000 copies worldwide and made lead singer/guitarist Kurt Cobain a massive, if sometimes, reluctant rock icon.

While Cobain’s lyrics were unquestionably powerful and heartfelt, the true success of Nevermind came from the music. Butch Vig managed to make the band sound both slick and raw at the same time – this was an expensively

Number One singles: None Grammy awards: None Label: US & UK: Geffen Recorded in: Van Nuys, USA

Personnel: Kurt Cobain (d. 1994) Krist Novoselic Dave Grohl Kirk Canning Producer: Butch Vig

produced album on a major label, but it was also loud, brash and sounded very real.

The words may have been uncompromising, but the tunes were not – genre-defining songs such as ‘Smells Like Teen Spirit’, ‘Come as You Are’, ‘Lithium’ or ‘On A Plain’ have classic rock structures, enabled by Krist Novoselic and Dave Grohl’s powerhouse rhythm section and Cobain’s vocal roar. It wasn’t all pedal-to-the-metal stuff – ‘Polly’ is a chilling acoustic tale of kidnap and the closing ‘Something In The Way’ is marked by Kirk Canning’s mournful cello – but as a blast of pure punk rock energy, Nevermind has had few rivals before or since.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Smells Like Teen Spirit (5:02) In Bloom (4:15) Come As You Are (3:39) Breed (3:04) Lithium (4:17) Polly (2:56) Territorial Pissings (2:23) Drain You (3:44) Lounge Act (2:37) Stay Away (3:33) On A Plain (3:17) Something In The Way (3:51)

Total album length: 42 minutes 158

Bridges

The 80s saw great albums both from recording artists who had been around since the 60s, such as Paul Simon and Tina Turner, and new acts, such as Prince, George Michael and Tracey Chapman. Combining information from both the US and UK charts, 100 Best-Selling Albums of the 80s is an authoritative chart of the decade.

From ancient abandoned aqueducts to today’s feats of engineering, Bridges is a pictorial celebration of 200 suspension bridges, iron bridges, stone bridges, viaducts, railway bridges, footbridges and rope bridges from the ancient world to the present day. Organised chronologically and presented in a landscape format with informative captions, Bridges is a stunning collection of images.

100 Best-Selling Albums of the 80s 184 x 210mm (7¼ x 8¼”) 224pp 100 colour photographs 45,000 words ISBN: 978-1-78274-621-8 £12.99 Hardback

David ross

Bridges 213 x 290mm (8¼ x 11½”) 224pp 10,000 words 200 colour photographs ISBN: 978-1-78274-576-1 £19.99 Hardback

Purple Rain

l • Album sales: 13,600,000 l • Release date: August 1984 l

P

rince’s previous album,1999, had brought the diminutive singer considerable success in the US, but it was his soundtrack to the 1984 hit film Purple Rain that was to make him and backing band The Revolution, into global superstars.

The album spent 24 weeks at the top of the US album charts, reached Number Seven in the UK, and gave Prince his first two US Number One singles with ‘When Doves Cry’ and ‘Let’s Go Crazy’. The title track reached Number Two in the US, while ‘I Would Die 4 U’ and ‘Take Me With U’ charted in the Billboard Hot 100.

Prince & The Revolution

Number One singles: UK: Prakazrel ‘Pras’ Killing Me Softly; Ready Wyclef Jean or Not Garfield ‘Gus’ Parkinson Red Alert Grammy awards: Ras Baraka Best rap album; Best Handel Tucker R&B performance by Robbie Shakespeare a duo Sly Dunbar or group – Killing Me Forte Softly With His Song Omega Diamond D Label: US: Ruffhouse Pace 1 UK: Columbia Young Zee Ra Digga Recorded in: New Jersey & New York, USA; Producers: Kingston, Jamaica Wyclef Shawn King Personnel: Lauryn Hill Lauryn Hill Salaam Remi

184 x 210mm (7¼ x 8¼”) 224pp 100 colour photographs 45,000 words ISBN: 978-1-78274-622-5 £12.99 Hardback

Nevermind

T

conscience. The group served up a fascinating mixture of soul, reggae, gospel and blues, all within the framework of inventive hip-hop.

It was the group’s treatment of ‘Killing Me Softly’ and Hill’s moving vocal on ‘Ready or Not’ that drove The Score to multi-platinum success.

Released as singles, the former topped the UK chart for five weeks, followed by a three week stint by ‘Ready Or Not’. While the singles failed to hit the Top 40 in the US, The Score stayed at the top of the Billboard chart for four weeks.

100 Best-Selling Albums of the 90s

100 Best-Selling Albums of the 80s Dan auty, chris barrett, justin cawthorne, pete dodd

7

l • Album sales: 7,200,000 l • Release date: February 1996 l

he Fugee’s breakthrough album showcased the eclectic tastes of all three MCs – Lauryn Hill, Pras and Wyclef – while offering an incredibly popular alternative to the macho-posturing of the gangster rap that dominated the mid-1990s.

Innovative and derivative in equal measure, The Score blends the work of Roberta Flack and Bob Marley with cinematic constraints and a social

74

24

The Score

T

Nirvana

Label: US: Columbia; UK: Harvest

Number One singles: US: It’s Too Late; You’ve Got A Friend

own right Tapestry stands as her one glorious moment. Two of the album’s songs, ‘Will You Love Me Tomorrow’ and ‘(You Make Me Feel Like) A Natural Woman’, are reinterpretations from that period with Goffin, but it is the newer songs that notably shine. In ‘It’s Too Late’, knowingly charting the breakdown of a relationship – she had split with Goffin three years earlier – she created a US chart-topping single for herself (it reached Number Six in the UK), while in ‘You’ve Got A Friend’ she wrote a US Number One for James Taylor. In turn, Taylor adds backing vocals and guitar to the song’s original version.

Tapestry clocked up more than 300 weeks on the US chart, 15 of them at Number One, while it was named Album of the Year at the 1971 Grammy Awards.

Fugees

Grammy awards: None

Personnel: Dave Gilmour Roger Waters Rick Wright Dave Mason

l • Album sales: 10,000,000 l • Release date: March 1971 l

arole King tapped into the singer-songwriter movement then taking shape to create an album that set a new watermark for female artists. Unassuming, yet beautifully crafted, this 1971 release paved the way forward for female singer/songwriters, both in terms of the quality of its songs and the honest, highly personal style in which she delivers them.

Together with her husband Gerry Goffin, King had penned a string of hits for others in the previous decade, among them ‘Up On the Roof’ and ‘The Locomotion’, but as an artist in her

Carole King

Number One singles: None

71

Tapestry

C

takes the listener on a sort of aural space shipride, with heavy use of synthesizers and futuristic sound effects as well as more conventional instruments such as acoustic guitars and piano.

Signs that the band’s bassist and lyricist Roger Waters was becoming exasperated with the whole business of music – and perhaps with his fellow band members too – also take shape on the record; in ‘Have A Cigar’ he has a record company executive saying ‘the band is just fantastic/that is really what I think/by the way, which one’s Pink?’

Wish You Were Here scored a Number One in the album charts on both sides of the Atlantic, only the second time thus far that the band had topped the chart in their home market.

184 x 210mm (7¼ x 8¼”) 224pp 100 colour photographs 45,000 words ISBN: 978-1-78274-620-1 £12.99 Hardback

Sleeve artwork by Chuck Beeson, Roland Young and Jim McCrary

l • Album sales: 6,000,000 l • Release date: September 1975 l

A

Pink Floyd

11

Wish You Were Here

nother marathon session of recording activity – seven months – at London’s famous Abbey Road studios went into producing Wish You Were Here, Pink Floyd’s follow-up to the highly regarded Dark Side Of The Moon, which was also recorded at Abbey Road. The band came close to break-up during recording (both Water’s and Mason were splitting from their wives at the time) but many critics, including Dave Gilmour, now see the album as one of Pink Floyd’s best.

It opens with a clear homage to founding member – and, at the time, institutionalized – Syd Barrett on ‘Shine On You Crazy Diamond (Parts I – IV)’ which had to be re-recorded due to an inexperienced sound engineer. The album then

Sleeve artwork by Hipgnosis and George Hardie

25

100 Best-Selling Albums of the 70s

Sleeve artwork by Robert Fisher

Hamish champ

Number One singles: US: When Doves Cry; Let’s Go Crazy

With a reputation for lyrical lewdness, the Prince retained his right to shock with tracks such as ‘Darling Nikki’, but there was a growing sense of maturity in the starkly arresting ‘When Doves Cry’. The album won Prince two Grammy awards and an Academy Award for Best Song Score.

In addition to making the soundtrack, Prince took the starring role in Purple Rain, a loosely autobiographical film about a young Minneapolis rock musician struggling to make it big. The movie grossed over $5 million dollars at the box office and functioned as an extended promotional video for the album. Coupled with the record breaking success of his 1984–85 Purple Rain tour, the hype helped make the album into the biggest hit of Prince’s career.

Recorded in: Los Angeles, USA

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Personnel: Prince Wendy Melvoin Lisa Coleman Grammy awards: Matt Fink Best album or original Brown Mark score for a motion picture; Bobby Z Best rock performance by Apollonia a duo or group with vocal Novi Novog David Coleman Label: US & UK: Warner Suzie Katayama Producers: Prince The Revolution

Let’s Go Crazy (4:39) Take Me With U (3:54) The Beautiful Ones (5:15) Computer Blue (3:59) Darling Nikki (4:15) When Doves Cry (5:52) I Would Die 4 U (2:51) Baby I’m a Star (4:20) Purple Rain (8:45)

LEFT:

ABOVE:

Golden Gate Bridge, San Francisco, California, USA Opened in 1937, the Golden Gate Bridge was, until 1964, the longest suspension bridge main span in the world. It has only been closed three times due to strong winds.

Ponte Vecchio, Florence, Italy Rebuilt in 1345, the Ponte Vecchio is noted for still having shops built along it. Butchers initially occupied the shops; the present tenants are jewellers, art dealers and souvenir sellers.

Total album length: 44 minutes 202

12

13

Celtic Castles

A-Z of Animals

Some of the most romantic castles in the world are found in the British Isles, France and Ireland. These strongholds may now largely be ruined, but in their dilapidation they have gained an air of mystery and beauty. The people they once protected are gone, the borders they guarded have dissolved, the fragile communities that built up around them have been dismantled – only the castles remain. With 150 outstanding colour photographs, Celtic Castles is a brilliant pictorial examination of worlds gone by.

If you know your ABC, why not try the animal alphabet? A is for Alligator, B is for Bear, C is for…? Each animal is illustrated with an outstanding colour artwork, with a short description outlining its main characteristics, such as where it lives and what it eats. The A-Z of Animals is informative fun about the animals that children find most interesting.

Martin j. Dougherty

tom jackson

Celtic Castles 297 x 227mm (11¾ x 9”) 224pp 10,000 words 150 colour photographs ISBN: 978-1-78274-623-2 £19.99 Hardback

A-Z of Animals 32pp 254 x 197mm (10 x 7¾”) 26 colour artworks 1,000 words ISBN: 978-1-78274-567-9 £6.99 Hardback

left: Dunluce Castle, County Antrim, Northern Ireland A castle was built on this basalt outcropping in the far north of Ireland in the 13th century, but today it is only ruins from the late 16th century that we can see. Dunluce was the seat of Earl of Antrim until he was defeated supporting the forces of the deposed Catholic King James II against the Protestant William III in the Battle of the Boyne in 1690, after which the castle began to fall into ruin.

above:

Castle Stalker, Loch Linnhe, Argyll, Scotland One of the best preserved medieval tower houses in Scotland, Castle Stalker is situated on Loch Laich, an inlet off Loch Linnhe. The current building was constructed by the Clan Stewart in the 1440s, but, the story goes, was later lost in a drunken bet in 1620 to the Clan Campbell. right: Dolwyddelan Castle, Conwy County Borough, Wales Dolwyddelan Castle may date from the early 13th century, but the battlements are purely romantic decoration – they were added during restoration work in the 1800s. opposite page: Sinclair Castle, Wick, Caithness, Scotland The earlier Castle Girnigoe was built by William Sinclair, the 2nd Earl of Caithness, probably sometime between 1476 and 1496.

122

123

128

129

A-Z of Dinosaurs

A-Z of Snakes

kieron connolly

tom jackson

If you already know your ABC why not try a different one? Why not learn the snakes alphabet? A is for anaconda, B is boa constrictor, C is for coral snake… With 26 slithery creatures, the A-Z of Snakes is excellent fun about the natural world. Each snake is illustrated with an outstanding colour artwork, while a short description outlines its main characteristics, such as where it lives and if it is venomous.

14

A-Z of Snakes 32pp 254 x 197mm (10 x 7¾”) 26 colour artworks 1,000 words ISBN: 978-1-78274-566-2 £6.99 Hardback

The names of dinosaurs are some of the first big words that children learn.

From Apatosaurus to Tyrannosaurus rex to Zephyrosaurus, The A-Z of Dinosaurs is illustrated with an outstanding colour artwork for each of its 26 entries, along with dino facts and a pronunciation guide. If you were ever uncertain how to pronounce dinosaur names before, you’ll be able to roar them after reading this.

A-Z of Dinosaurs 32pp 254 x 197mm (10 x 7¾”) 26 colour artworks 1,000 words ISBN: 978-1-78274-564-8 £6.99 Hardback

15

Celtic Castles

A-Z of Animals

Some of the most romantic castles in the world are found in the British Isles, France and Ireland. These strongholds may now largely be ruined, but in their dilapidation they have gained an air of mystery and beauty. The people they once protected are gone, the borders they guarded have dissolved, the fragile communities that built up around them have been dismantled – only the castles remain. With 150 outstanding colour photographs, Celtic Castles is a brilliant pictorial examination of worlds gone by.

If you know your ABC, why not try the animal alphabet? A is for Alligator, B is for Bear, C is for…? Each animal is illustrated with an outstanding colour artwork, with a short description outlining its main characteristics, such as where it lives and what it eats. The A-Z of Animals is informative fun about the animals that children find most interesting.

Martin j. Dougherty

tom jackson

Celtic Castles 297 x 227mm (11¾ x 9”) 224pp 10,000 words 150 colour photographs ISBN: 978-1-78274-623-2 £19.99 Hardback

A-Z of Animals 32pp 254 x 197mm (10 x 7¾”) 26 colour artworks 1,000 words ISBN: 978-1-78274-567-9 £6.99 Hardback

left: Dunluce Castle, County Antrim, Northern Ireland A castle was built on this basalt outcropping in the far north of Ireland in the 13th century, but today it is only ruins from the late 16th century that we can see. Dunluce was the seat of Earl of Antrim until he was defeated supporting the forces of the deposed Catholic King James II against the Protestant William III in the Battle of the Boyne in 1690, after which the castle began to fall into ruin.

above:

Castle Stalker, Loch Linnhe, Argyll, Scotland One of the best preserved medieval tower houses in Scotland, Castle Stalker is situated on Loch Laich, an inlet off Loch Linnhe. The current building was constructed by the Clan Stewart in the 1440s, but, the story goes, was later lost in a drunken bet in 1620 to the Clan Campbell. right: Dolwyddelan Castle, Conwy County Borough, Wales Dolwyddelan Castle may date from the early 13th century, but the battlements are purely romantic decoration – they were added during restoration work in the 1800s. opposite page: Sinclair Castle, Wick, Caithness, Scotland The earlier Castle Girnigoe was built by William Sinclair, the 2nd Earl of Caithness, probably sometime between 1476 and 1496.

122

123

128

129

A-Z of Dinosaurs

A-Z of Snakes

kieron connolly

tom jackson

If you already know your ABC why not try a different one? Why not learn the snakes alphabet? A is for anaconda, B is boa constrictor, C is for coral snake… With 26 slithery creatures, the A-Z of Snakes is excellent fun about the natural world. Each snake is illustrated with an outstanding colour artwork, while a short description outlines its main characteristics, such as where it lives and if it is venomous.

14

A-Z of Snakes 32pp 254 x 197mm (10 x 7¾”) 26 colour artworks 1,000 words ISBN: 978-1-78274-566-2 £6.99 Hardback

The names of dinosaurs are some of the first big words that children learn.

From Apatosaurus to Tyrannosaurus rex to Zephyrosaurus, The A-Z of Dinosaurs is illustrated with an outstanding colour artwork for each of its 26 entries, along with dino facts and a pronunciation guide. If you were ever uncertain how to pronounce dinosaur names before, you’ll be able to roar them after reading this.

A-Z of Dinosaurs 32pp 254 x 197mm (10 x 7¾”) 26 colour artworks 1,000 words ISBN: 978-1-78274-564-8 £6.99 Hardback

15

A-Z of Sharks

The Pawfect Guide to Thinking Like a Dog

pAulA hAMMond

How many species of shark can you name? Great White, Hammerhead, Tiger? Any more? Here is a chance to learn the names of 26, from the Angel Shark to the Zebra Shark. Each shark is explored over a single page with an outstanding colour artwork, while factboxes offer some bite-size facts about its diet, habitat or lifecycle.

eMMA Milne & kAren wild

The Pawfect Guide to Thinking Like a Dog explains your dog’s behaviour from tail wagging to barking, from chasing to scavenging, from phobias to social interaction. In brief instructions, the book explains the five crucial welfare needs, how to pick the right breed for you, how to train your dog, how to handle tricky issues and how to address health matters.

A-Z of Sharks 32pp 254 x 197mm (10 x 7¾”) 26 colour artworks 1,000 words ISBN: 978-1-78274-565-5 £6.99 Hardback

22

T H E PAW F E C T G U I D E T O T H I N K I N G L I K E A D O G

40. HIDING

You might want to place the cat’s basket in the cutest place where you can see it, but cats need a place to hide. Leave cupboard doors ajar, allow them to snuggle behind the sofa, and don’t be surprised to find them sleeping in a dark corner in the laundry basket.

41. MARKING TERRITORY

Ex evelestorpos es alibus eiumque minimpo rporatem qui cus, quis aut faceriore nosam, adissequat omnihil esequunt ut erum corrorum nitatem fugia veles magnis am, cupiendit quam, iumquo cone magnis ad que volorrore rem aute litat.

42. PREGNANCY

cus, quis aut faceriore nosam, adissequat omnihil esequunt ut erum corrorum nitatem fugia veles magnis am, cupiendit quam, iumquo cone magnis ad que volorrore rem aute erum corrorum nitatem fugia veles magnis am, cupiendit quam.

T H E PAW F E C T G U I D E T O T H I N K I N G L I K E A D O G

23

20

The Pawfect Guide to Thinking Like a Dog 214 x 154mm (8½ x 6”) 208pp 22,000 words 110 colour photographs ISBN: 978-1-78274-615-7 £9.99 Paperback

T H E PAW F E C T G U I D E T O T H I N K I N G L I K E A D O G

34. KENNELS

43. PLAYING

37. READING THE SIGNS

Ex evelestorpos es alibus eiumque minimpo rporatem qui cus, quis aut faceriore nosam, adissequat omnihil esequunt ut erum correriore nosam, a nosam, adissequat omnihil esequunt ut erum dissequat omnihorum

Ex evelestorpos es alibus eiumque minimpo rporatem qui cus, quis aut faceriore nosam, adissequat omnihil esequunt ut erum corrorum nitatem fugia veles magnis am, cupiendit quam, iumquo m nitatem fugia veles magnis am, cupiendit quam, iumquo cocone magnis ad que volorrore rem a

44. MIXING WITH OTHER

DOGS m nitatem fugia veles magnis am, cupiendit quam, iumququi cus, quis aut faceriore nosam, adissequat omnihil esequunt ut erum corrorum nitatem fugia veles magnis am, cupiendit qam, cupiendit quam, iumququi cus, quis aut faceriore nosam,

Ex evelestorpos es alibus eiumque minimpo rporatem qui cus, quis aut fa alibus eiumque minimpo rporatem qui cus, quis aut faceriore nosam, adissequat ceriore nosam, adissequat omnihil esequunt ut erum corrorum nitatem

38. PINING

Ex evelestorpos es alibus eiumque minimpo rporatem qui cus, quis aut faceriore nosam, adissequat poratem qui cus, quis aut faceriore nosam, adissequat omnihil esequunt ut erum corrorum nitatemomnihil esequunt ut erum

35. DON’T DECLAW

Ex evelestorpos es alibus eiumque minimpo rporatem qui cus, quis aut faceriore nosam, adissequat omnihil esequunt ut erum corrorum nitatem fugia veles magnis am, cupiendit quam, iumquo cone magnisad que volorrore rem aute litat.s magnis am, cupiendit quam, iumquo cone magnis ad que volorrore..

36. NERVOUSNESS

45. COPING WITH A CAT

Ex evelestorpos es alibus eiumque minimpo rporatem qui cus, quis aut faceriore nosam, adissequat omnihil esequunt ut erum corrorum nitatem fugia veles magnis am, cupiendit quam, iumquo cone magnis ad que volorrore rem cone magnis ad que volorrore.

IN THE HOUSE Ex evelestorpos es alibus eiumque minimpo rporatem qui cus, quis aut faceriore nosam, adissequat omnihil esequunt ut erum corrorum nitatem fugia veles magnis am, cupiendit quam. iumquo cone magnis ad que volorrore rem aute litat.

21

T H E PAW F E C T G U I D E T O T H I N K I N G L I K E A D O G

39.

FRIENDLINESS Ex evelestorpos es alibus eiumque minimpo rporatem qui cus, quis aut faceriore nosam, adissequat omnihil esequunt ut erum corrorum nitatem fugia veles magnis am, cupiendit quam, iumquo cone magnis ad que volorrore rem aute litat.s magnis am, cupiendit quam, iumquo cone magnis ad que volorrore.

MAY 2018 PUBliCATioN

The Eastern Front

The Purrfect Guide to Thinking Like a Cat

duncAn Anderson, lloyd clArk, stephen wAlsh

eMMA Milne & kAren wild

In brief instructions, The Purrfect Guide to Thinking like a Cat explains how to understand your cat’s behaviour and how you can adapt your own behaviour to make the most of your relationship. Featuring 110 colour photographs, the book deftly addresses all manner of issues, from marking territory to hissing, from scratching to self-harming. This is an essential guide to forging a lasting, healthy relationship with your cat.

The conflict on the Eastern Front in World War II was colossal in both scale and intensity, as Hitler and Stalin vied for supremacy in Eastern Europe.

The Eastern Front is an authoritative account of this epic clash, ranging from the state of the two armies in 1941, the most infamous campaigns and offensive operations, to the final Soviet victory. Authoritatively written, this superbly illustrated book features more than 250 photographs, artworks and maps.

The Purrfect Guide to Thinking Like a Cat 214 x 154mm (8¼ x 6”) 208pp 22,000 words 110 colour photographs ISBN: 978-1-78274-614-0 £9.99 Paperback

CAMPAIGNS OF WORLD WAR II:

The Eastern Front

297 x 227mm (11¾ x 9in) 256 pages 70,000 words 45 artworks, 230 photographs, 10 colour maps ISBN: 978-1-78274-608-9 £22.99 Paperback

102 / the battle of stalingrad

the battle of stalingrad / 103

Richthofen’s Air Fleet 4. A daytime crossing was suicidal, but night brought the risk of collisions with other craft or sunken wrecks moving in the Volga’s dark currents.

CHAPTER FIVE RIGHT

Another German MG34 machine-gun team in Stalingrad. Visible in the background is the grain elevator, where 50 Soviet soldiers held off attacks from three German divisions.

The Battle of Stalingrad

Local knowledge vital The intimate local knowledge of the river possessed by Rogachev’s patchwork crews proved invaluable in sustaining 62nd Army, but it would have counted for nought if Soviet troops had failed to defend the crucial landing stages dotted along the western shore of the Volga. This was the crucible of the battle of Stalingrad. If the Luftwaffe severed the Volga artery, then 62nd Army’s fate was inevitable. If Rear Admiral Rogachev’s men – Stalingrad’s unsung heroes – could defy the Luftwaffe, Paulus’s jaded 6th Army would wither, while Chuikov’s 62nd Army would survive the ordeal. The Luftwaffe retained its tactical superiority over the Red Air Force to the bitter end at Stalingrad, but could not close the Volga. This failure played a key role in the Soviet victory at Stalingrad.

The battle for the city of Stalingrad became a symbol for the entire struggle on the Eastern Front. Hitler staked more and more on its capture, but Chuikov’s 62nd Army refused to yield.

talingrad, originally known as Tsaritsyn, had prospered in the 19th century as a trading town on the Volga. During the Russian Civil War (1918–21), the Reds had triumphed decisively at Tsaritsyn. Stalin’s contribution to the Reds’ success was marginal, but, once he had achieved supreme power in 1925 and named the city after himself, his role in the victory of 1920 was systematically manipulated and enhanced. By the 1930s, Stalin was officially credited as having played a key role in both the October Revolution of 1917 and the triumph at Tsaritsyn. Stalingrad was thus indelibly associated with Stalin and the Russian Revolution, a psychological dimension that significantly influenced both Hitler and Stalin’s approach to the battle of Stalingrad.

Stalingrad before the battle By 1941 Stalingrad was a city of 600,000 people. It had played an important role in Stalin’s industrial drive of the 1930s and its location on the Volga ensured that it was a significant cog in the Soviet war economy.

It was a valuable political, economic, communications and psychological objective.

However, if the Red Army was to fight a major battle of annihilation, Stalingrad, rather like Moscow in 1941, was an ideal place to do so. The uneven terrain west of the city was less

16

than ideal for rapid movement. Stalingrad itself, with its sprawling workers’ apartment blocks and cavernous factories, ensured that agile combat dependent on the smooth integration of air power, armour and infantry – the secret of German success – would be next to impos­ sible. The city’s odd shape also undermined the Wehrmacht’s ability to defeat the Red Army by the traditional German method of encirclement. As it nestled on the western bank of the Volga, Stalingrad stretched for 40km (25 miles), but was only eight kilometres (five miles) wide. The Volga, more than one kilometre (just over half a mile) wide, meant that, if the Wehrmacht wanted to encircle the city, a major amphibious operation would be necessary. This ensured that, unless there was a dramatic collapse by the Red Army, German troops would be forced into a prolonged frontal assault.

The Mamayev Kurgan, an ancient Tartar burial mound, loomed over central Stalingrad.

It was marked on military maps as Point 102.0 and provided a magnificent observation site.

It was a tactical position of immense value, one that, in weeks of intense, hand­to­hand fighting, neither side would concede. The northern end of the city was Stalingrad’s industrial heart. In the northern reaches lay the Dzerzhinsky Tractor Factory, while on its left lay the massive Barrikady Ordnance

ABOVE

Soviet troops advance cautiously through the rubble. Each house was fought over, sometimes by units as large as a company, and strongpoints could change hands many times during a day.

SOVIET UNION

Kursk

•

•

Voronezh Do

n

Do

ts

•

6th Army

•Stalingrad

ne

Vo

lga

Rostov

SPARTAKOVKA

•

OPPOSITE

A 50mm (2.45in) mortar of the 13th Guards Rifle Division fires on German positions in Stalingrad.

Much of the city was quickly reduced to rubble by the German bombardments and air attacks.

military insights and his inability to see beyond Stalingrad. To Halder, a battle of annihilation on the Volga, which even if victorious was likely to be indecisive in strategic terms, was military madness. However, the more Halder voiced his doubts, the more obsessed Hitler became with victory. Stalin’s city – the one he had named for himself – was to be taken. That was Hitler’s strategy. Victory at Stalingrad would demonstrate the superior racial qualities of the Aryan over the Slav, thus inducing the destruction of the Soviet Union. Hitler was descending into the ideological strait­jacket that increasingly made the conduct of rational military operations all but impossible. It is ironic that, as Hitler denied his commanders the tactical flexibility they had become accustomed to, Stalin slowly but surely allowed his senior commanders, such as Zhukov, Vasilevsky, Rokossovsky and Vatutin, greater scope to display their talents.

As Paulus redeployed the main body of 6th Army to the centre and north of the city, the full complement of 284th Siberian Division made its way across the Volga. It was integrated into the Soviet line between the Mamayev Kurgan and the Red October steelworks. The Red Army’s ability to provide 62nd Army with supplies and men from the eastern shore was a critical factor at Stalingrad.

As Paulus’s 6th Army and Hoth’s 4th Panzer Army bled, Chuikov’s 62nd Army was nourished and sustained by the Volga naval flotilla under the command of Rear Admiral Rogachev. His force included hundreds of civilian craft and this miniature naval armada fought a constant battle of attrition with the Luftwaffe. As it delivered thousands of tonnes of food and ammunition, and men to the western bank, steamers, barges, gunboats, dinghies and all manner of fishing craft played a deadly game of cat and mouse with

• BLACK SEA

Astrakhan Stravopol

Caucasus

German offensive June–November 1942

Tractor Plant Barrikady Factory

CASPIAN SEA

Krasny Oktyabr Factory

Moun

tains

Krutoy Gully

Key German forces Soviet forces

62nd Army

Mamayev Kurgan

4th Pz Army

Front line 12 Sept

Tsaritsa Railway Station Grain Silos

Front line 26 Sept

Volga

S

13th Guards Div

Krutoy Gully

Central Stalingrad

Railway Station

9th of January Square

SO

LE

CH

NA

Nail Factory

YA

ST

Pavlov’s House NKVD and 42nd Regt HQ

A

ST

AY

SK

ET

Rodimtsev’s 1st HQ

VI

The Battle of Stalingrad September 1942

64th Army

Red Square

SO

Univermag Gorki Theatre

State Bank Volga

17

A-Z of Sharks

The Pawfect Guide to Thinking Like a Dog

pAulA hAMMond

How many species of shark can you name? Great White, Hammerhead, Tiger? Any more? Here is a chance to learn the names of 26, from the Angel Shark to the Zebra Shark. Each shark is explored over a single page with an outstanding colour artwork, while factboxes offer some bite-size facts about its diet, habitat or lifecycle.

eMMA Milne & kAren wild

The Pawfect Guide to Thinking Like a Dog explains your dog’s behaviour from tail wagging to barking, from chasing to scavenging, from phobias to social interaction. In brief instructions, the book explains the five crucial welfare needs, how to pick the right breed for you, how to train your dog, how to handle tricky issues and how to address health matters.

A-Z of Sharks 32pp 254 x 197mm (10 x 7¾”) 26 colour artworks 1,000 words ISBN: 978-1-78274-565-5 £6.99 Hardback

22

T H E PAW F E C T G U I D E T O T H I N K I N G L I K E A D O G

40. HIDING

You might want to place the cat’s basket in the cutest place where you can see it, but cats need a place to hide. Leave cupboard doors ajar, allow them to snuggle behind the sofa, and don’t be surprised to find them sleeping in a dark corner in the laundry basket.

41. MARKING TERRITORY

Ex evelestorpos es alibus eiumque minimpo rporatem qui cus, quis aut faceriore nosam, adissequat omnihil esequunt ut erum corrorum nitatem fugia veles magnis am, cupiendit quam, iumquo cone magnis ad que volorrore rem aute litat.

42. PREGNANCY

cus, quis aut faceriore nosam, adissequat omnihil esequunt ut erum corrorum nitatem fugia veles magnis am, cupiendit quam, iumquo cone magnis ad que volorrore rem aute erum corrorum nitatem fugia veles magnis am, cupiendit quam.

T H E PAW F E C T G U I D E T O T H I N K I N G L I K E A D O G

23

20

The Pawfect Guide to Thinking Like a Dog 214 x 154mm (8½ x 6”) 208pp 22,000 words 110 colour photographs ISBN: 978-1-78274-615-7 £9.99 Paperback

T H E PAW F E C T G U I D E T O T H I N K I N G L I K E A D O G

34. KENNELS

43. PLAYING

37. READING THE SIGNS

Ex evelestorpos es alibus eiumque minimpo rporatem qui cus, quis aut faceriore nosam, adissequat omnihil esequunt ut erum correriore nosam, a nosam, adissequat omnihil esequunt ut erum dissequat omnihorum

Ex evelestorpos es alibus eiumque minimpo rporatem qui cus, quis aut faceriore nosam, adissequat omnihil esequunt ut erum corrorum nitatem fugia veles magnis am, cupiendit quam, iumquo m nitatem fugia veles magnis am, cupiendit quam, iumquo cocone magnis ad que volorrore rem a

44. MIXING WITH OTHER

DOGS m nitatem fugia veles magnis am, cupiendit quam, iumququi cus, quis aut faceriore nosam, adissequat omnihil esequunt ut erum corrorum nitatem fugia veles magnis am, cupiendit qam, cupiendit quam, iumququi cus, quis aut faceriore nosam,

Ex evelestorpos es alibus eiumque minimpo rporatem qui cus, quis aut fa alibus eiumque minimpo rporatem qui cus, quis aut faceriore nosam, adissequat ceriore nosam, adissequat omnihil esequunt ut erum corrorum nitatem

38. PINING

Ex evelestorpos es alibus eiumque minimpo rporatem qui cus, quis aut faceriore nosam, adissequat poratem qui cus, quis aut faceriore nosam, adissequat omnihil esequunt ut erum corrorum nitatemomnihil esequunt ut erum

35. DON’T DECLAW

Ex evelestorpos es alibus eiumque minimpo rporatem qui cus, quis aut faceriore nosam, adissequat omnihil esequunt ut erum corrorum nitatem fugia veles magnis am, cupiendit quam, iumquo cone magnisad que volorrore rem aute litat.s magnis am, cupiendit quam, iumquo cone magnis ad que volorrore..

36. NERVOUSNESS

45. COPING WITH A CAT

Ex evelestorpos es alibus eiumque minimpo rporatem qui cus, quis aut faceriore nosam, adissequat omnihil esequunt ut erum corrorum nitatem fugia veles magnis am, cupiendit quam, iumquo cone magnis ad que volorrore rem cone magnis ad que volorrore.

IN THE HOUSE Ex evelestorpos es alibus eiumque minimpo rporatem qui cus, quis aut faceriore nosam, adissequat omnihil esequunt ut erum corrorum nitatem fugia veles magnis am, cupiendit quam. iumquo cone magnis ad que volorrore rem aute litat.

21

T H E PAW F E C T G U I D E T O T H I N K I N G L I K E A D O G

39.

FRIENDLINESS Ex evelestorpos es alibus eiumque minimpo rporatem qui cus, quis aut faceriore nosam, adissequat omnihil esequunt ut erum corrorum nitatem fugia veles magnis am, cupiendit quam, iumquo cone magnis ad que volorrore rem aute litat.s magnis am, cupiendit quam, iumquo cone magnis ad que volorrore.

MAY 2018 PUBliCATioN

The Eastern Front

The Purrfect Guide to Thinking Like a Cat

duncAn Anderson, lloyd clArk, stephen wAlsh

eMMA Milne & kAren wild

In brief instructions, The Purrfect Guide to Thinking like a Cat explains how to understand your cat’s behaviour and how you can adapt your own behaviour to make the most of your relationship. Featuring 110 colour photographs, the book deftly addresses all manner of issues, from marking territory to hissing, from scratching to self-harming. This is an essential guide to forging a lasting, healthy relationship with your cat.

The conflict on the Eastern Front in World War II was colossal in both scale and intensity, as Hitler and Stalin vied for supremacy in Eastern Europe.

The Eastern Front is an authoritative account of this epic clash, ranging from the state of the two armies in 1941, the most infamous campaigns and offensive operations, to the final Soviet victory. Authoritatively written, this superbly illustrated book features more than 250 photographs, artworks and maps.

The Purrfect Guide to Thinking Like a Cat 214 x 154mm (8¼ x 6”) 208pp 22,000 words 110 colour photographs ISBN: 978-1-78274-614-0 £9.99 Paperback

CAMPAIGNS OF WORLD WAR II:

The Eastern Front

297 x 227mm (11¾ x 9in) 256 pages 70,000 words 45 artworks, 230 photographs, 10 colour maps ISBN: 978-1-78274-608-9 £22.99 Paperback

102 / the battle of stalingrad

the battle of stalingrad / 103

Richthofen’s Air Fleet 4. A daytime crossing was suicidal, but night brought the risk of collisions with other craft or sunken wrecks moving in the Volga’s dark currents.

CHAPTER FIVE RIGHT

Another German MG34 machine-gun team in Stalingrad. Visible in the background is the grain elevator, where 50 Soviet soldiers held off attacks from three German divisions.

The Battle of Stalingrad

Local knowledge vital The intimate local knowledge of the river possessed by Rogachev’s patchwork crews proved invaluable in sustaining 62nd Army, but it would have counted for nought if Soviet troops had failed to defend the crucial landing stages dotted along the western shore of the Volga. This was the crucible of the battle of Stalingrad. If the Luftwaffe severed the Volga artery, then 62nd Army’s fate was inevitable. If Rear Admiral Rogachev’s men – Stalingrad’s unsung heroes – could defy the Luftwaffe, Paulus’s jaded 6th Army would wither, while Chuikov’s 62nd Army would survive the ordeal. The Luftwaffe retained its tactical superiority over the Red Air Force to the bitter end at Stalingrad, but could not close the Volga. This failure played a key role in the Soviet victory at Stalingrad.

The battle for the city of Stalingrad became a symbol for the entire struggle on the Eastern Front. Hitler staked more and more on its capture, but Chuikov’s 62nd Army refused to yield.

talingrad, originally known as Tsaritsyn, had prospered in the 19th century as a trading town on the Volga. During the Russian Civil War (1918–21), the Reds had triumphed decisively at Tsaritsyn. Stalin’s contribution to the Reds’ success was marginal, but, once he had achieved supreme power in 1925 and named the city after himself, his role in the victory of 1920 was systematically manipulated and enhanced. By the 1930s, Stalin was officially credited as having played a key role in both the October Revolution of 1917 and the triumph at Tsaritsyn. Stalingrad was thus indelibly associated with Stalin and the Russian Revolution, a psychological dimension that significantly influenced both Hitler and Stalin’s approach to the battle of Stalingrad.

Stalingrad before the battle By 1941 Stalingrad was a city of 600,000 people. It had played an important role in Stalin’s industrial drive of the 1930s and its location on the Volga ensured that it was a significant cog in the Soviet war economy.

It was a valuable political, economic, communications and psychological objective.

However, if the Red Army was to fight a major battle of annihilation, Stalingrad, rather like Moscow in 1941, was an ideal place to do so. The uneven terrain west of the city was less

16

than ideal for rapid movement. Stalingrad itself, with its sprawling workers’ apartment blocks and cavernous factories, ensured that agile combat dependent on the smooth integration of air power, armour and infantry – the secret of German success – would be next to impos­ sible. The city’s odd shape also undermined the Wehrmacht’s ability to defeat the Red Army by the traditional German method of encirclement. As it nestled on the western bank of the Volga, Stalingrad stretched for 40km (25 miles), but was only eight kilometres (five miles) wide. The Volga, more than one kilometre (just over half a mile) wide, meant that, if the Wehrmacht wanted to encircle the city, a major amphibious operation would be necessary. This ensured that, unless there was a dramatic collapse by the Red Army, German troops would be forced into a prolonged frontal assault.

The Mamayev Kurgan, an ancient Tartar burial mound, loomed over central Stalingrad.

It was marked on military maps as Point 102.0 and provided a magnificent observation site.

It was a tactical position of immense value, one that, in weeks of intense, hand­to­hand fighting, neither side would concede. The northern end of the city was Stalingrad’s industrial heart. In the northern reaches lay the Dzerzhinsky Tractor Factory, while on its left lay the massive Barrikady Ordnance

ABOVE

Soviet troops advance cautiously through the rubble. Each house was fought over, sometimes by units as large as a company, and strongpoints could change hands many times during a day.

SOVIET UNION

Kursk

•

•

Voronezh Do

n

Do

ts

•

6th Army

•Stalingrad

ne

Vo

lga

Rostov

SPARTAKOVKA

•

OPPOSITE

A 50mm (2.45in) mortar of the 13th Guards Rifle Division fires on German positions in Stalingrad.

Much of the city was quickly reduced to rubble by the German bombardments and air attacks.

military insights and his inability to see beyond Stalingrad. To Halder, a battle of annihilation on the Volga, which even if victorious was likely to be indecisive in strategic terms, was military madness. However, the more Halder voiced his doubts, the more obsessed Hitler became with victory. Stalin’s city – the one he had named for himself – was to be taken. That was Hitler’s strategy. Victory at Stalingrad would demonstrate the superior racial qualities of the Aryan over the Slav, thus inducing the destruction of the Soviet Union. Hitler was descending into the ideological strait­jacket that increasingly made the conduct of rational military operations all but impossible. It is ironic that, as Hitler denied his commanders the tactical flexibility they had become accustomed to, Stalin slowly but surely allowed his senior commanders, such as Zhukov, Vasilevsky, Rokossovsky and Vatutin, greater scope to display their talents.

As Paulus redeployed the main body of 6th Army to the centre and north of the city, the full complement of 284th Siberian Division made its way across the Volga. It was integrated into the Soviet line between the Mamayev Kurgan and the Red October steelworks. The Red Army’s ability to provide 62nd Army with supplies and men from the eastern shore was a critical factor at Stalingrad.

As Paulus’s 6th Army and Hoth’s 4th Panzer Army bled, Chuikov’s 62nd Army was nourished and sustained by the Volga naval flotilla under the command of Rear Admiral Rogachev. His force included hundreds of civilian craft and this miniature naval armada fought a constant battle of attrition with the Luftwaffe. As it delivered thousands of tonnes of food and ammunition, and men to the western bank, steamers, barges, gunboats, dinghies and all manner of fishing craft played a deadly game of cat and mouse with

• BLACK SEA

Astrakhan Stravopol

Caucasus

German offensive June–November 1942

Tractor Plant Barrikady Factory

CASPIAN SEA

Krasny Oktyabr Factory

Moun

tains

Krutoy Gully

Key German forces Soviet forces

62nd Army

Mamayev Kurgan

4th Pz Army

Front line 12 Sept

Tsaritsa Railway Station Grain Silos

Front line 26 Sept

Volga

S

13th Guards Div

Krutoy Gully

Central Stalingrad

Railway Station

9th of January Square

SO

LE

CH

NA

Nail Factory

YA

ST

Pavlov’s House NKVD and 42nd Regt HQ

A

ST

AY

SK

ET

Rodimtsev’s 1st HQ

VI

The Battle of Stalingrad September 1942

64th Army

Red Square

SO

Univermag Gorki Theatre

State Bank Volga

17

Enigma: How Breaking the Code Helped win World War II

Troy

ben hubbArd

Troy tells the story of the Trojan War from its beginnings with the sparring of the gods to the love story between Paris and Helen to the war fleet, the siege, and on to the final battles and destruction of the city.

The book offers a fascinating history that provides a broader context for the war and also highlights where sources differ on aspects of the story.

This is an expertly written account and investigation of one of the classic stories of ancient mythology.

MichAel kerrigAn

At its peak, 10,000 people worked at Bletchley Park, reading 4,000 messages a day, decrypting German and Japanese communications. But how did its efforts actually change the course of the war? Which victories was Bletchley instrumental in?

Illustrated with 180 black-&-white and colour photographs, artworks and maps, Enigma: How Breaking the Code Helped Win World War II is an authoritative and novel perspective on WWII history.

14

2

Enigma: How Breaking the Code Helped Win World War II 244 x 186mm (9½ x 7½”) 224pp 50,000 words 180 b/w and colour photographs and artworks ISBN: 978-1-78274-587-7 £19.99 Hardback

DECIPHERING ENIGMA

DECIPHERING ENIGMA

Troy 268 x 205mm (10½ x 8”) 224pp 50,000 words 180 b/w and colour photographs, diagrams and maps ISBN: 978-1-78274-590-7 £19.99 Hardback

15

In 1936, TurIng InvenTed

Deciphering Enigma The decryption of German messages by the code breakers at Bletchley Park was considered by Supreme Allied Commander Dwight D. Eisenhower to have been “decisive” to the Allied victory.

L

orem ipsum dolor sit amet, pri illud similique rationibus id. Vis alii simul at, nam at esse appareat, vim esse corpora gubergren at. Per alii corpora ne. Eos zril utinam temporibus at, eos tale quot timeam an. Pro ad commune copiosae rationibus, ad omnes offendit volutpat vel, posse albucius persequeris feugait pertinacia mei.

Left: the bombe was an electromechanical device used by british cryptologists to help decipher german enigmamachine-encrypted secret messages. the initial

breaking the code Et vis tamquam inciderint appellantur, ex partem ubique delenit eam. Ut cum omnes commune vituperatoribus. No pro soluta laoreet mediocrem, vis in laoreet ponderum, ius in perpetua vituperatoribus. Oratio recusabo nec ea. An harum melius recteque eos, quod graeco option id his. Dolor sit amet, pri illud similique rationibus id. Vis alii simul at, nam at esse appareat, vim esse corpora utinam temporibus at, eos tale quot timeam an.

Pro ad commune copiosae rationibus, ad omnes offendit volutpat

design was produced in 1939 at bletchley Park by alan turing.

vel, posse albucius persequeris ne mea. Eam id reque utroque habemus, ut feugait pertinacia a hypoTheTIcal compuTIng mei. Et vis tamquam inciderint appellantur, ex devIce ThaT came To be partem ubique.

Ut cum omnes commune. No pro soluta known as The ‘unIversal laoreet mediocrem, vis in laoreet ponderum, TurIng machIne’. ius in perpetua vituperatoribus. Oratio posse albucius persequeris fem, vis in laoreet ponderum, ius in perpetua vituperatoribus. atio posse albucius persequeris feugaitugait Et vis tamquam inciderint appellantur, ex patemporibus at, eos tale quot timeam an.Oratio posse albucius persequeris feugaitugait vis tamquam inciderint appellantur, ex patemporibus at, eos tale quot timeam an. Pro ad commune copiosae opposite: enigma machine rationibus, ad omnes offendit volutpat vel, posse albucius g was modified to the persequeris ne mea. Eam id reque utroque habemus, ut feugait enigma i by June 1930.

hoW d oeS t he enigMa Ma c hine Wor k ?

A GermAn eniGmA operAtor would be given a plaintext message to encrypt. For each letter typed in, a lamp indicated a different letter according to a pseudorandom substitution, based upon the wiring of the machine. the letter indicated by the lamp would be recorded as the enciphered substitution. the action of pressing a key also moved the rotor so that the next key press used a different electrical pathway, and thus a different substitution would occur.

For each key press there was rotation of at least the right hand rotor, giving a different substitution alphabet. this continued for each letter in the message until the message was completed to create a cyphertext. the cyphertext would then be transmitted as normal to an operator of another enigma machine.

Kings & Queens of the Medieval World

The Victorians

MArtin J. dougherty

John d. wright

The Victorian era boasted the glory of the Empire and the grandeur that Empire afforded, mass urbanisation and social change, but it was also a time of great poverty, of British concentration camps in the Boer War, of the boom and bust of the California Gold Rush and slavery being fought over in America. The Victorians reveals that behind the splendour and the facades was a world of poverty, disease and hypocrisy, where fortunes could be quickly made – and swiftly lost.

From Charlemagne to Alexander Nevsky to Eleanor of Aquitaine, the Middle Ages produced a fascinating array of monarchs. From Britain to Russia, from the 9th century CE to the completion of the Reconquista of Spain in 1492, Kings & Queens of the Medieval World explores the captivating stories of monarchs from all across Europe. Arranged thematically from military leaders to law-makers, from religious reformers to patrons of the arts, this is a fascinating, accessible history.

The Victorians 244 x 186mm (9½ x 7¼”) 224pp 50,000 words 180 colour and b/w photographs and artworks ISBN: 978-1-78274-588-4 £19.99 Hardback

CHAPTER

God and King

2

20

Kings & Queens of the Medieval World 244 x 186mm (9½ x 7¼”) 224pp 50,000 words 180 colour and b/w photographs, artworks and maps ISBN: 978-1-78274-589-1 £19.99 Hardback

GOD AND KING

GOD AND KING

21

The divine right of kings asserted that a monarch was subject to no earthly authority, deriving the right to rule directly from the will of God. The king was thus not subject to the will of his people, the aristocracy, or any other estate of the realm.

E

LECEATECTO DI REHENDUCIM quibernam ligent, saescimus delit dis velibus mil es aut erae. Ut aut ex et quam aniaspe rorrum assimet et omnihiciti quia que pere nonest, occuscimus cuptatem aut ut ad modi dem quibus voloreiur sitiorestium apisita sperume necaboreiunt magnima dolla aut facerferfero dolest res et earum, cus con et harion con pore peri oditatetust, optio ernam, soloreic te pero eat aut aut autaturit rerios est, se sin prae cusa nam rerspe comnihic te apisita sperume necaboreiunt magnima dolla aut facerferfero dolest res et earum, cus con et harion con pore peri oditatetust, optio ernam.

Saints and Warriors te pero eat aut aut autaturit rerios est, se sin prae cusa nam rerspe comnihic te nobit, autem volorepudam sequi tem nobit, autem volorepudam sequi tem voluptiisini optature, sit, aliqui beaquo vellatur, volorernatur arcil experspero dolum et occusam harumquas etur? Ehent ut volessimod ut reperio eleceatecto di rehenducim quibernam ligent, saescimus delit dis velibus mil es aut erae. Ut aut ex et quam aniaspe rorrum assimet et omnihiciti

18

oPPoSite:

A statue of King (and Saint) Stephen in Heroes’ Square, Budapest. Stephen was the first king of a unified Hungarian kingdom. beloW:

The Holy Crown of Hungary, also known as the Crown of Saint Stephen.

‘There had been many battles and engagements

in those times across the world, but none of those alive remembered a devastation so terrible.’

rorrum assimet et omnihiciti quia que pere nonest, occuscimus cuptatemditatetust, optio ernam, soloreic te pero eat aut aut autaturit rerios est, se sin prae cusa nam rerspe comnihic te nobit, autem volorepudam sequi tem voluptiisini optature, sit, aliqui beaquo vellatur, volorerrorrum assimet et omnihiciti quia que pere nonest, occuscimus cuptatemditatetust, optio ernam, e sin prae cusa nam rerspe comnihic te nobit, autem volorepudam sequi tem vosoloreic te pero eat aut aut autaturit rerios est, se

above:

In this 19th century painting by Jan Matejko the Polish-Lithuanian army is at the point of crushing the reeling and bleeding troops of the Teutonic Order.

19

Enigma: How Breaking the Code Helped win World War II

Troy

ben hubbArd

Troy tells the story of the Trojan War from its beginnings with the sparring of the gods to the love story between Paris and Helen to the war fleet, the siege, and on to the final battles and destruction of the city.

The book offers a fascinating history that provides a broader context for the war and also highlights where sources differ on aspects of the story.

This is an expertly written account and investigation of one of the classic stories of ancient mythology.

MichAel kerrigAn

At its peak, 10,000 people worked at Bletchley Park, reading 4,000 messages a day, decrypting German and Japanese communications. But how did its efforts actually change the course of the war? Which victories was Bletchley instrumental in?

Illustrated with 180 black-&-white and colour photographs, artworks and maps, Enigma: How Breaking the Code Helped Win World War II is an authoritative and novel perspective on WWII history.

14

2

Enigma: How Breaking the Code Helped Win World War II 244 x 186mm (9½ x 7½”) 224pp 50,000 words 180 b/w and colour photographs and artworks ISBN: 978-1-78274-587-7 £19.99 Hardback

DECIPHERING ENIGMA

DECIPHERING ENIGMA

Troy 268 x 205mm (10½ x 8”) 224pp 50,000 words 180 b/w and colour photographs, diagrams and maps ISBN: 978-1-78274-590-7 £19.99 Hardback

15

In 1936, TurIng InvenTed

Deciphering Enigma The decryption of German messages by the code breakers at Bletchley Park was considered by Supreme Allied Commander Dwight D. Eisenhower to have been “decisive” to the Allied victory.

L

orem ipsum dolor sit amet, pri illud similique rationibus id. Vis alii simul at, nam at esse appareat, vim esse corpora gubergren at. Per alii corpora ne. Eos zril utinam temporibus at, eos tale quot timeam an. Pro ad commune copiosae rationibus, ad omnes offendit volutpat vel, posse albucius persequeris feugait pertinacia mei.

Left: the bombe was an electromechanical device used by british cryptologists to help decipher german enigmamachine-encrypted secret messages. the initial

breaking the code Et vis tamquam inciderint appellantur, ex partem ubique delenit eam. Ut cum omnes commune vituperatoribus. No pro soluta laoreet mediocrem, vis in laoreet ponderum, ius in perpetua vituperatoribus. Oratio recusabo nec ea. An harum melius recteque eos, quod graeco option id his. Dolor sit amet, pri illud similique rationibus id. Vis alii simul at, nam at esse appareat, vim esse corpora utinam temporibus at, eos tale quot timeam an.

Pro ad commune copiosae rationibus, ad omnes offendit volutpat

design was produced in 1939 at bletchley Park by alan turing.

vel, posse albucius persequeris ne mea. Eam id reque utroque habemus, ut feugait pertinacia a hypoTheTIcal compuTIng mei. Et vis tamquam inciderint appellantur, ex devIce ThaT came To be partem ubique.

Ut cum omnes commune. No pro soluta known as The ‘unIversal laoreet mediocrem, vis in laoreet ponderum, TurIng machIne’. ius in perpetua vituperatoribus. Oratio posse albucius persequeris fem, vis in laoreet ponderum, ius in perpetua vituperatoribus. atio posse albucius persequeris feugaitugait Et vis tamquam inciderint appellantur, ex patemporibus at, eos tale quot timeam an.Oratio posse albucius persequeris feugaitugait vis tamquam inciderint appellantur, ex patemporibus at, eos tale quot timeam an. Pro ad commune copiosae opposite: enigma machine rationibus, ad omnes offendit volutpat vel, posse albucius g was modified to the persequeris ne mea. Eam id reque utroque habemus, ut feugait enigma i by June 1930.

hoW d oeS t he enigMa Ma c hine Wor k ?

A GermAn eniGmA operAtor would be given a plaintext message to encrypt. For each letter typed in, a lamp indicated a different letter according to a pseudorandom substitution, based upon the wiring of the machine. the letter indicated by the lamp would be recorded as the enciphered substitution. the action of pressing a key also moved the rotor so that the next key press used a different electrical pathway, and thus a different substitution would occur.

For each key press there was rotation of at least the right hand rotor, giving a different substitution alphabet. this continued for each letter in the message until the message was completed to create a cyphertext. the cyphertext would then be transmitted as normal to an operator of another enigma machine.

Kings & Queens of the Medieval World

The Victorians

MArtin J. dougherty

John d. wright

The Victorian era boasted the glory of the Empire and the grandeur that Empire afforded, mass urbanisation and social change, but it was also a time of great poverty, of British concentration camps in the Boer War, of the boom and bust of the California Gold Rush and slavery being fought over in America. The Victorians reveals that behind the splendour and the facades was a world of poverty, disease and hypocrisy, where fortunes could be quickly made – and swiftly lost.

From Charlemagne to Alexander Nevsky to Eleanor of Aquitaine, the Middle Ages produced a fascinating array of monarchs. From Britain to Russia, from the 9th century CE to the completion of the Reconquista of Spain in 1492, Kings & Queens of the Medieval World explores the captivating stories of monarchs from all across Europe. Arranged thematically from military leaders to law-makers, from religious reformers to patrons of the arts, this is a fascinating, accessible history.

The Victorians 244 x 186mm (9½ x 7¼”) 224pp 50,000 words 180 colour and b/w photographs and artworks ISBN: 978-1-78274-588-4 £19.99 Hardback

CHAPTER

God and King

2

20

Kings & Queens of the Medieval World 244 x 186mm (9½ x 7¼”) 224pp 50,000 words 180 colour and b/w photographs, artworks and maps ISBN: 978-1-78274-589-1 £19.99 Hardback

GOD AND KING

GOD AND KING

21

The divine right of kings asserted that a monarch was subject to no earthly authority, deriving the right to rule directly from the will of God. The king was thus not subject to the will of his people, the aristocracy, or any other estate of the realm.

E

LECEATECTO DI REHENDUCIM quibernam ligent, saescimus delit dis velibus mil es aut erae. Ut aut ex et quam aniaspe rorrum assimet et omnihiciti quia que pere nonest, occuscimus cuptatem aut ut ad modi dem quibus voloreiur sitiorestium apisita sperume necaboreiunt magnima dolla aut facerferfero dolest res et earum, cus con et harion con pore peri oditatetust, optio ernam, soloreic te pero eat aut aut autaturit rerios est, se sin prae cusa nam rerspe comnihic te apisita sperume necaboreiunt magnima dolla aut facerferfero dolest res et earum, cus con et harion con pore peri oditatetust, optio ernam.

Saints and Warriors te pero eat aut aut autaturit rerios est, se sin prae cusa nam rerspe comnihic te nobit, autem volorepudam sequi tem nobit, autem volorepudam sequi tem voluptiisini optature, sit, aliqui beaquo vellatur, volorernatur arcil experspero dolum et occusam harumquas etur? Ehent ut volessimod ut reperio eleceatecto di rehenducim quibernam ligent, saescimus delit dis velibus mil es aut erae. Ut aut ex et quam aniaspe rorrum assimet et omnihiciti

18

oPPoSite:

A statue of King (and Saint) Stephen in Heroes’ Square, Budapest. Stephen was the first king of a unified Hungarian kingdom. beloW:

The Holy Crown of Hungary, also known as the Crown of Saint Stephen.

‘There had been many battles and engagements

in those times across the world, but none of those alive remembered a devastation so terrible.’

rorrum assimet et omnihiciti quia que pere nonest, occuscimus cuptatemditatetust, optio ernam, soloreic te pero eat aut aut autaturit rerios est, se sin prae cusa nam rerspe comnihic te nobit, autem volorepudam sequi tem voluptiisini optature, sit, aliqui beaquo vellatur, volorerrorrum assimet et omnihiciti quia que pere nonest, occuscimus cuptatemditatetust, optio ernam, e sin prae cusa nam rerspe comnihic te nobit, autem volorepudam sequi tem vosoloreic te pero eat aut aut autaturit rerios est, se

above:

In this 19th century painting by Jan Matejko the Polish-Lithuanian army is at the point of crushing the reeling and bleeding troops of the Teutonic Order.

19

Ireland

JUNE 2018 PUBliCATioN

Dinosaurs: The World’s Most Terrifying Creatures veronicA ross

Did you know that Brachiosaurus means ‘arm lizard’? Or that Megalodon was a 56ft (17m) long prehistoric shark? Including 80 dinosaurs and prehistoric animals and covering a span of more than 540 million years, Dinosaurs is a lively exploration of a fascinating world.

42

EARLY JURASSIC

Dinosaurs: The World’s Most Terrifying Creatures 192pp 213 x 290mm (8½ x 11½”) 250 col a/ws 43,000 words ISBN: 978-1-78274-583-9 £14.99 Hardback

DIlophoSauruS

206–180 MIllIon YEarS aGo

Dilophosaurus skin Dilophosaurus may have had camouflage markings.

tail The slender tail was as long as the rest of the body and would have helped Dilophosaurus balance as it chased prey.

BaCk legs The long, slender back legs were typical of a fast runner.

T

Crests The paired crests were semicircular in shape and very light.

his fast-moving killer with two large head crests would have sent peaceful, planteating dinosaurs scattering in terror as it galloped towards them. Dilophosaurus was slender, agile and built for speed. It could have easily outrun most dinosaurs that shared its world and, armed with sharp-clawed hands and feet, it was capable of tearing through its victim’s soft flesh with ease.

Scientists are not sure why Dilophosaurus had the curious pair of bony head-crests on top of its head. They were far too fragile to be used in combat, but they may have been used by males when courting females or in warning displays to intimidate rivals.

teeth Dilophosaurus’s teeth were sharp but small and thin. The front section of the upper jaw was loosely attached to the main section. a large tooth on the lower jaw fitted into the notch formed at the join between the two.

hanDs These were 20cm long, with three clawed ‘fingers’ and a ‘thumb’ to grip prey firmly.

hoW BIG WaS IT? a young male is feasting on the flesh of a freshly killed plant-eater. a larger, more powerful male approaches. his bigger, brightly coloured crests show he is older and more dominant than the young male.

Did You Know?

•

When fossil remains of Dilophosaurus were first found they were thought to belong to a species of Megalosaurus. It was not until a double head-crest was found with better preserved remains that Dilophosaurus was recognized as a different dinosaur altogether.

1

Ireland 297 x 227mm (11¾ x 9”) 224pp 10,000 words 150 colour photographs ISBN: 978-1-78274-656-0 £19.99 Hardback

43

DINO FACTS LEngth

up to 6m

WEIght

about 450kg

LEg LEngth

up to 1.5m

PREY

plant-eating dinosaurs, dead or alive

WEAPonS

needle-like teeth; sharp claws on toes and fingers

MEAnIng

‘Two-crested lizard’

of nAME

Dilophosaurus remains were first discovered on an expedition to a navajo Indian reservation in arizona in 1942. Fossils thought to belong to Dilophosaurus have also been found in the Yunnan region of China, in 1986, by a Kunming Museum team.

2

The newcomer thunders towards the carcass. he roars at his rival and dips his head to show the size and brightness of his superior crests. The younger dinosaur dares not risk a fight and retreats from the kill.

•

a relative of Dilophosaurus, Coelophysis, was also a fast-running and savage predator. hundreds of skeletons of this dinosaur were found at a site in new Mexico in 1947, suggesting that, like the crested Dilophosaurus, it too lived and hunted in packs, enabling it to bring down prey bigger than itself.

Italy

Sharks & Predators of the Deep susAn bArrAclough

From the great white shark to the giant squid, Sharks & Predators of the Deep takes the reader on a fascinating journey into a little-known world. With examples drawn from habitats as diverse as the Arctic and the Indian Ocean, this accessible volume reveals the secrets of some of nature’s strangest animals.

20

Ireland: The Emerald Isle presents 150 outstanding photographs celebrating the island’s most evocative places, whether in nature or man-made, from immense beaches to the Mourne Mountains, from the fishing towns of County Cork to Dublin’s elegant Georgian streets. Featuring images from both the Republic and Northern Ireland, the book ranges widely across landscapes and history.

Sharks & Predators of the Deep 213 x 290mm (8½ x 11½”) 192pp 250 col a/ws 30,000 words ISBN: 978-1-78274-584-6 £14.99 Hardback

In 150 striking images, Italy: Birthplace of the Renaissance celebrates perhaps the most beautiful country in the world.

From Lake Como to the vineyards in Tuscany to the many beaches, from the magnificence of classical antiquity in Rome to the ArabNorman architecture of Palermo to Renaissance Florence, there is just so much to feast on in Italy.

Italy 297 x 227mm (11¾ x 9”) 224pp 10,000 words 150 colour photographs ISBN: 978-1-78274-657-7 £19.99 Hardback

21

Ireland

JUNE 2018 PUBliCATioN

Dinosaurs: The World’s Most Terrifying Creatures veronicA ross

Did you know that Brachiosaurus means ‘arm lizard’? Or that Megalodon was a 56ft (17m) long prehistoric shark? Including 80 dinosaurs and prehistoric animals and covering a span of more than 540 million years, Dinosaurs is a lively exploration of a fascinating world.

42

EARLY JURASSIC

Dinosaurs: The World’s Most Terrifying Creatures 192pp 213 x 290mm (8½ x 11½”) 250 col a/ws 43,000 words ISBN: 978-1-78274-583-9 £14.99 Hardback

DIlophoSauruS

206–180 MIllIon YEarS aGo

Dilophosaurus skin Dilophosaurus may have had camouflage markings.

tail The slender tail was as long as the rest of the body and would have helped Dilophosaurus balance as it chased prey.

BaCk legs The long, slender back legs were typical of a fast runner.

T

Crests The paired crests were semicircular in shape and very light.

his fast-moving killer with two large head crests would have sent peaceful, planteating dinosaurs scattering in terror as it galloped towards them. Dilophosaurus was slender, agile and built for speed. It could have easily outrun most dinosaurs that shared its world and, armed with sharp-clawed hands and feet, it was capable of tearing through its victim’s soft flesh with ease.

Scientists are not sure why Dilophosaurus had the curious pair of bony head-crests on top of its head. They were far too fragile to be used in combat, but they may have been used by males when courting females or in warning displays to intimidate rivals.

teeth Dilophosaurus’s teeth were sharp but small and thin. The front section of the upper jaw was loosely attached to the main section. a large tooth on the lower jaw fitted into the notch formed at the join between the two.

hanDs These were 20cm long, with three clawed ‘fingers’ and a ‘thumb’ to grip prey firmly.

hoW BIG WaS IT? a young male is feasting on the flesh of a freshly killed plant-eater. a larger, more powerful male approaches. his bigger, brightly coloured crests show he is older and more dominant than the young male.

Did You Know?

•

When fossil remains of Dilophosaurus were first found they were thought to belong to a species of Megalosaurus. It was not until a double head-crest was found with better preserved remains that Dilophosaurus was recognized as a different dinosaur altogether.

1

Ireland 297 x 227mm (11¾ x 9”) 224pp 10,000 words 150 colour photographs ISBN: 978-1-78274-656-0 £19.99 Hardback

43

DINO FACTS LEngth

up to 6m

WEIght

about 450kg

LEg LEngth

up to 1.5m

PREY

plant-eating dinosaurs, dead or alive

WEAPonS

needle-like teeth; sharp claws on toes and fingers

MEAnIng

‘Two-crested lizard’

of nAME

Dilophosaurus remains were first discovered on an expedition to a navajo Indian reservation in arizona in 1942. Fossils thought to belong to Dilophosaurus have also been found in the Yunnan region of China, in 1986, by a Kunming Museum team.

2

The newcomer thunders towards the carcass. he roars at his rival and dips his head to show the size and brightness of his superior crests. The younger dinosaur dares not risk a fight and retreats from the kill.

•

a relative of Dilophosaurus, Coelophysis, was also a fast-running and savage predator. hundreds of skeletons of this dinosaur were found at a site in new Mexico in 1947, suggesting that, like the crested Dilophosaurus, it too lived and hunted in packs, enabling it to bring down prey bigger than itself.

Italy

Sharks & Predators of the Deep susAn bArrAclough

From the great white shark to the giant squid, Sharks & Predators of the Deep takes the reader on a fascinating journey into a little-known world. With examples drawn from habitats as diverse as the Arctic and the Indian Ocean, this accessible volume reveals the secrets of some of nature’s strangest animals.

20

Ireland: The Emerald Isle presents 150 outstanding photographs celebrating the island’s most evocative places, whether in nature or man-made, from immense beaches to the Mourne Mountains, from the fishing towns of County Cork to Dublin’s elegant Georgian streets. Featuring images from both the Republic and Northern Ireland, the book ranges widely across landscapes and history.

Sharks & Predators of the Deep 213 x 290mm (8½ x 11½”) 192pp 250 col a/ws 30,000 words ISBN: 978-1-78274-584-6 £14.99 Hardback

In 150 striking images, Italy: Birthplace of the Renaissance celebrates perhaps the most beautiful country in the world.

From Lake Como to the vineyards in Tuscany to the many beaches, from the magnificence of classical antiquity in Rome to the ArabNorman architecture of Palermo to Renaissance Florence, there is just so much to feast on in Italy.

Italy 297 x 227mm (11¾ x 9”) 224pp 10,000 words 150 colour photographs ISBN: 978-1-78274-657-7 £19.99 Hardback

21

The Illustrated Encyclopedia of Weapons of World War II

Paris

In 150 striking images, Paris celebrates the French capital, from its world-famous landmarks to beautiful alleyways and corners that might surprise you. Presented in a landscape format and with captions explaining the story behind each entry, Paris is a stunning collection of images celebrating the world’s most romantic city.

chris bishop

Paris 213 x 290mm (8¼ x 11½”) Extent: 224pp Word count: 10,000 words Illustrations: 150 colour photographs ISBN: 978-1-78274-658-4 £19.99 Hardback

The Illustrated Encyclopedia of Weapons of World War II includes more than 1500 pieces of equipment from handguns to tanks, from dive bombers to aircraft carriers.

Each weapon system is illustrated with a detailed profile artwork and photograph. Accompanying the visual material is detailed text that covers each weapon’s service history, the numbers built, and its variants, as well as full specifications.

The Illustrated Encyclopedia of Weapons of World War II 608pp 276 x 220mm (11 x 8¾”) 1,600 colour & b/w photos and artworks 220,000 words ISBN: 978-1-78274-167-1 £35 Hardback

Lighthouses Lighthouses celebrates 150 structures and the stunning vistas surrounding them. Taking examples from around the world, the book features lighthouses in all weathers – from storms to tranquil waters to those that have become ice palaces.

From working lighthouses to eerie, abandoned ones, from those in beautiful locorms to tranquil waters to those that have become ice palaces.

22

Lighthouses 297 x 227mm (11¾ x 9”) 224pp 10,000 words 150 colour photographs ISBN: 978-1-78274-659-1 £19.99 Hardback

23

The Illustrated Encyclopedia of Weapons of World War II

Paris

In 150 striking images, Paris celebrates the French capital, from its world-famous landmarks to beautiful alleyways and corners that might surprise you. Presented in a landscape format and with captions explaining the story behind each entry, Paris is a stunning collection of images celebrating the world’s most romantic city.

chris bishop

Paris 213 x 290mm (8¼ x 11½”) Extent: 224pp Word count: 10,000 words Illustrations: 150 colour photographs ISBN: 978-1-78274-658-4 £19.99 Hardback

The Illustrated Encyclopedia of Weapons of World War II includes more than 1500 pieces of equipment from handguns to tanks, from dive bombers to aircraft carriers.

Each weapon system is illustrated with a detailed profile artwork and photograph. Accompanying the visual material is detailed text that covers each weapon’s service history, the numbers built, and its variants, as well as full specifications.

The Illustrated Encyclopedia of Weapons of World War II 608pp 276 x 220mm (11 x 8¾”) 1,600 colour & b/w photos and artworks 220,000 words ISBN: 978-1-78274-167-1 £35 Hardback

Lighthouses Lighthouses celebrates 150 structures and the stunning vistas surrounding them. Taking examples from around the world, the book features lighthouses in all weathers – from storms to tranquil waters to those that have become ice palaces.

From working lighthouses to eerie, abandoned ones, from those in beautiful locorms to tranquil waters to those that have become ice palaces.

22

Lighthouses 297 x 227mm (11¾ x 9”) 224pp 10,000 words 150 colour photographs ISBN: 978-1-78274-659-1 £19.99 Hardback

23

Birds

Dr Per Christiansen and paula hammond

Birds profiles more than 400 of the world’s most fascinating bird species, from the flamingo to the humming bird, and the eagle to the ostrich, offering a comprehensive overview of birds from every continent and giving a sense of the incredible diversity of bird species. Birds are grouped by order and each entry includes a table of information as well as informative maps and detailed box features.

Birds 305 x 227mm (12 x 9”) 448 pages 150,000 words More than 1000 colour artworks and photographs ISBN: 978-1-78274-526-6 £24.99 Paperback

ACCIPITRIFORMES

ACCIPITRIFORMES

Steppe Eagle VITAL STATISTICS LENGTH

62–74cm (24.4–29.1in)

WINGSPAN SEXUAL MATURITY

• ORDER • Accipitriformes • FAMILY • Accipitridae • SPECIES • Aquila nipalensis

Steppe Eagles are an adaptable and successful species – equally at home in grasslands or cities, and happy to make a meal of any available food.

VITAL STATISTICS WEIGHT

6.5kg (14.3lb)

1.6–1.9 m (5.2–6.2ft)

LENGTH

78–86cm (30.7–33.8in)

At least 1 year

WINGSPAN

2.5m (8.2ft)

SEXUAL MATURITY

5–6 years

INCUBATION PERIOD

47–53 days

FLEDGLING PERIOD

59–99 days

WHERE IN THE WORLD?

NUMBER OF EGGS 1–3 eggs INCUBATION PERIOD

45 days

FLEDGLING PERIOD

55–56 days

NUMBER OF BROODS

1 a year

TYPICAL DIET

Birds, mammals, insects and carrion

LIFE SPAN

Martial Eagle

Steppe Eagles get their name from their preference for such dry open habitats as those found on the Russian steppes. They breed mainly in Central Asia, from eastern Europe through to Kazakhstan.

Up to 41 years in captivity

CREATURE COMPARISONS It is while they are in flight that you are most likely to be able to tell a juvenile Steppe Eagle from an adult. The underside of an adult’s wing is dark, tipped with grey-black ‘primary feathers’. A juvenile’s wing is paler brown with a broad, white band.

WINGS

EYES

The eagles’ wings are tipped with fingerlike primary feathers.

These are splayed to reduce friction and give more control in the air.

Steppe Eagles have remarkable eyesight. It is believed that they can spot a grasshopper, from the air, 100m (328ft) away.

• ORDER • Accipitriformes • FAMILY • Accipitridae • SPECIES • Polemaetus bellicosus

These magnificent birds of prey are Africa’s largest known species of Eagle – easily powerful enough to kill and carry away a small antelope.

WHERE IN THE WORLD?

Limited numbers are found throughout sub-Saharan Africa, especially Zimbabwe and South Africa. They can adapt to life in parched, savannah grasslands as well as mountains.

NUMBER OF EGGS 1 egg every 2 years HABITS

Diurnal, nonmigratory

TYPICAL DIET

Small mammals, birds and reptiles

LIFE SPAN

Typically 16 years EYES

Eagles – especially Martial Eagles – have extremely good eyesight, enabling them to spot potential prey from high up in the air.

CREATURE COMPARISONS Ornithologists can guess how old Martial Eagles are by the colour of their plumage and the number of speckles on their breast. As a general rule, older birds have more speckles and darker plumage.

Juveniles (shown) are grey above, with more white below.

WINGS

Large, broad wings are the ideal design for soaring, while finger-like primary feathers give greater control in the air.

LEGS

LEGS

Unusually for birds of prey, Steppe Eagles have legs adapted for hunting on the ground as well as for catching prey in mid-air.

Many birds of prey have completely bare or partially bare legs so their feathers do not get matted with blood.

HOW BIG IS IT? Juvenile Steppe Eagle

SPECIAL ADAPTATION These magnificent birds are one of the few species of eagle to nest on the ground. This might sound dangerous, but adaptability is an important survival tactic. Steppe Eagles can – and do – take advantage of a wide range of environments, even nesting in cities.

HOW BIG IS IT? Juvenile Martial Eagle

SPECIAL ADAPTATION Martial Eagles, in common with many birds of prey, use their sharp talons to hold down and kill their prey. Holding their claws outstretched while in flight, they can grab even quickly moving prey with relative ease.

15

14

Text

24

Job: 01186

Title: Encyclopedia of Birds

2nd Proof

Page:14

Text

Job: 01186

Title: Encyclopedia of Birds

2nd Proof

Page:15

UK & IRELAND

COMPASS INDEPENDENT PUBLISHING SERVICES HEAD OFFICE Compass Ltd Great West House Great West Road Brentford TW8 9DF Tel: 020 8326 5696 Email: sales@compass-ips.london

LONDON, SOUTH EAST, ESSEX Sue Wilcox Mobile: 07801 926247 Email: sue@compass-ips.london

THE NORTH OF ENGLAND AND SCOTLAND David Smith Mobile: 07901 916164 Email: david@compass-ips.london

SALES ADMINISTRATION Pat Vance Tel: 020 8326 5696 pat@compass-ips.london

Join our mailing list

IRELAND SALES Brian Blennerhassett Butler Sims Ltd First Floor, 89 Rathgar Road Rathgar, Dublin 6 Ireland Tel: +353 1 406 3639 Mobile: +353 86 825 7305 Email: butlersims@eircom.net

OPERATIONS MANAGER Nuala O’Neill Mobile: 07584 020 951 Email: nuala@compass-ips.london

Help us to keep you up to date on new releases, special offers and any other relevant news.

You can either sign up direct on our website: www.amberbooks.co.uk/about-us Or you can email us at editorial@amberbooks.co.uk Or you can fill in the form and send it to us at the address below:

SOUTH WEST, SOUTH WALES, EAST ANGLIA AND THE MIDLANDS Martin Remmers Mobile: 07747 794271 Email: martin@compass-ips.london

Amber Books mailing list Name/Company name

EXPORT SALES & MARKETING Gunnar Lie & Associates Ltd. 3 Linkside New Malden Surrey KT3 4LA United Kingdom Tel: +44 (0)20 8605 1097 E-mail: gunnar@gunnarlie.com www.gunnarlie.com GUNNAR LIE TERRITORIES: South-East Asia, Indian Sub-Continent, Africa ADDRESS AS ABOVE Tel: +44 771 2526 894 E-mail: gunnar@gunnarlie.com JOHN EDGELER TERRITORIES: Scandinavia, Middle East, Caribbean, Greece & Cyprus, The Netherlands ADDRESS AS ABOVE Tel: +44 780 1866 936 E-mail: john@gunnarlie.com GUILLAUME FERRAND TERRITORIES: France, Belgium, Eastern Europe, Luxembourg, Spain, Portugal, Italy, Central & South America, Gibraltar, Malta ADDRESS AS ABOVE Tel: +44 (0)20 8605 1097 E-mail: guillaume@gunnarlie.com GABRIELE KERN TERRITORIES: Austria, Germany, Switzerland ADDRESS: Gabriele Kern Publishers Services Ziegenhainer Strasse 169, D-60433 Frankfurt Germany Tel +49 69 510 694 Fax +49 69 510 695 E-mail: Gabriele.Kern@publishersservices.de

LORIE & MICHAEL OCAMPO TERRITORIES: Korea, Philippines, Taiwan, Japan, China, Hong Kong ADDRESS: Lorie Ocampo Marketing Services for Publishers 57 STA Teresita, Kapitolyo, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel +63 2 635 3592 Fax + 63 2 635 3593 E-mail: lorieocampo78@gmail.com michael.c.ocampo@gmail.com

PANSING DISTRIBUTION PTE LTD TERRITORIES: Singapore, Malaysia, Brunei ADDRESS: Times Centre 1 New Industrial Road Singapore 536196 Tel: 65 6319 9939 Fax: 65 6459 4930 Email: infobooks@pansing.com

AJAY PARMAR TERRITORIES: India ADDRESS : Ajay Parmar Research Press GF-31, Ground Floor, MGF Megacity Mall, M G Road, Gurgaon, 122002 India Tel: +91 124 4040017 Email: marketing@researchpress.co.in

GENERAL SALES/ RIGHTS ENQUIRIES

Address

Postcode/ZIP code

Country:

Telephone number

Sara McKie Rights Director– sara@amberbooks.co.uk

Email address

PRESS/MEDIA ENQUIRIES

Charles Catton Publishing Manager charles@amberbooks.co.uk

Are you on Social Media?

PHAMBILI TERRITORIES: South Africa ADDRESS: Phambili Agencies cc Book wholesalers to trade and libraries Address : Unit 57, 5 Sunnyrock Park Sunrock Close Germiston, South Africa, 1401 Tel: 0027114553537/4550091 Email: phambili@wbs.co.za Contact: Rosanna Kalogiannis Email: rosannak@phambili.com

Twitter: Facebook: Instagram: Thank you for taking time in helping us to keep you up to date

Amber Books Ltd

DISTRIBUTOR

Orca Book Services Ltd 01235465500 tradeorders@orcabookservices.co.uk

11/17

United House North Road London N7 9DP United Kingdom Tel: +44 (0)20 7520 7600

Amber Books Ltd United House North Road London N7 9DP United Kingdom Tel: +44 (0)20 7520 7600 rights@amberbooks.co.uk www.amberbooks.co.uk www.facebook.com/amberbooks twitter: @amberbooks itunes.com/amberbooksltd pinterest: amberbooksltd instagram: amberbooksltd

BOOKS Spring 2018